Im01c25t02 01en

User’s
Manual
DPharp
Fieldbus Communication Type
(EJXA, EJAE)
IM 01C25T02-01E
IM 01C25T02-01E
17th Edition
Toc-1
DPharp
IM 01C25T02-01E 17th Edition
CONTENTS
1. Introduction................................................................................................ 1-1
 Regarding This Manual................................................................................................. 1-1
 Trademarks ................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Safe Use of This Product .................................................................................. 1-2
1.2 Warranty.............................................................................................................. 1-3
2. Handling Cautions..................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Installation of an Explosion-Protected Instrument........................................ 2-1
2.1.1 FM approval........................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 CSA Certification................................................................................. 2-4
2.1.3 ATEX Certification............................................................................... 2-6
2.1.4 IECEx Certification............................................................................ 2-11
3. About Fieldbus.......................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Outline................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Internal Structure of DPharp............................................................................. 3-1
3.2.1 System/network Management VFD................................................... 3-1
3.2.2 Function Block VFD............................................................................ 3-1
3.3 Logical Structure of Each Block...................................................................... 3-1
3.4 Wiring System Configuration........................................................................... 3-1
4. Getting Started........................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Connection of Devices...................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Host Setting........................................................................................................ 4-2
4.3 Bus Power ON.................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3.1 Integral Indicator Display When Powering On.................................... 4-3
4.3.2 Confirming that Transmitter is Operating Properly............................. 4-3
4.4 Integration of DD................................................................................................ 4-4
4.5 Set the parameters using DTM......................................................................... 4-4
4.6 Reading the Parameters.................................................................................... 4-4
4.7 Continuous Record of Values........................................................................... 4-4
4.8 Generation of Alarm........................................................................................... 4-4
17th Edition: Apr. 2020 (YK) IM 01C25T02-01E

All Rights Reserved, Copyright © 2004, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
Toc-2
5. Configuration............................................................................................. 5-1
5.1 Network Design.................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 Network Definition............................................................................................. 5-2
5.3 Definition of Combining Function Blocks....................................................... 5-3
5.4 Setting of Tags and Addresses........................................................................ 5-4
5.5 Communication Setting.................................................................................... 5-4
5.5.1 VCR Setting........................................................................................ 5-4
5.5.2 Function Block Execution Control....................................................... 5-6
5.6 Block Setting...................................................................................................... 5-6
5.6.1 Link Object.......................................................................................... 5-6
5.6.2 Trend Object....................................................................................... 5-7
5.6.3 View Object......................................................................................... 5-7
5.6.4 Function Block Parameters.............................................................. 5-12
6. Explanation of Basic Items...................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Outline................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2 Setting and Changing Parameters for the Whole Process........................... 6-1
6.3 SENSOR Transducer Block.............................................................................. 6-1
6.3.1 Functional Block.................................................................................. 6-1
6.3.2 Block Mode......................................................................................... 6-2
6.3.3 Functions Relating to Pressure/Differential Pressure........................ 6-2
6.3.4 Functions Relating to Static Pressure................................................ 6-3
6.3.5 Functions Relating to Capsule and Amplifier Temperature................ 6-4
6.3.6 BLOCK_ERR...................................................................................... 6-5
6.3.7 XD_ERROR........................................................................................ 6-5
6.4 LCD Transducer Block...................................................................................... 6-5
6.4.1 Outline of the Functions...................................................................... 6-5
6.4.2 Block Mode......................................................................................... 6-5
6.4.3 Display Contents of the Integral Indicator........................................... 6-5
6.4.4 Example Displays of the Integral Indicator......................................... 6-6
6.4.5 Procedure to Set the Built-in Display.................................................. 6-7
6.4.6 Units That Can Be Displayed on the LCD by the Automatic Link
Function.............................................................................................. 6-9
6.5 AI Function Block............................................................................................. 6-12
6.5.1 Function Blocks................................................................................. 6-12
6.5.2 Block Mode....................................................................................... 6-12
6.5.3 IO_OPTS.......................................................................................... 6-12
6.5.4 STATUS_OPTS................................................................................ 6-12
6.5.5 OUT_D.............................................................................................. 6-13
6.5.6 Basic Parameters of the AI Block..................................................... 6-13
IM 01C25T02-01E
Toc-3
7. In-Process Operation................................................................................ 7-1
7.1 Mode Transition................................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 Generation of Alarm........................................................................................... 7-1
7.2.1 Indication of Alarm.............................................................................. 7-1
7.2.2 Alarms and Events.............................................................................. 7-1
7.2.3 Standard categories for NAMUR NE-107 instrument diagnostics
alarms................................................................................................. 7-2
7.3 Simulation Function.......................................................................................... 7-4
7.4 Write lock (Write-protect) function................................................................... 7-5
8. Device Information.................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 DEVICE STATUS................................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 Status of Each Parameter in Failure Mode...................................................... 8-5
9. Parameter Lists......................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Resource Block.................................................................................................. 9-1
9.2 SENSOR Transducer Block.............................................................................. 9-5
9.3 LCD Transducer Block...................................................................................... 9-8
9.4 Al Function Block............................................................................................. 9-10
10. General Specifications........................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Standard Specifications.................................................................................. 10-1
10.2 Optional Specifications................................................................................... 10-2
10.3 Optional Specifications (For Explosion Protected type)............................. 10-2
Appendix 1. Signal Characterizer (SC) Block..............................................A1-1
A1.1 Schematic Diagram of Signal Characterizer Block..................................... A1-1
A1.2 Input Section................................................................................................... A1-2
A1.2.1 Determining the Mode......................................................................A1-2
A1.2.2 Judging BLOCK_ERR......................................................................A1-2
A1.3 Line-segment Factor Determination Section............................................... A1-3
A1.3.1 Conditions for Configuring Valid Coefficients
(CURVE_X, CURVE_Y)...................................................................A1-3
A1.4 List of Signal Characterizer Block Parameters........................................... A1-5
A1.5 Application Example...................................................................................... A1-6
A1.5.1 Input Compensation..........................................................................A1-6
A1.5.2 Calorie Flow Compensation.............................................................A1-6
A1.5.3 Backward Control .............................................................................A1-7
Appendix 2. Integrator (IT) Block..................................................................A2-1
A2.1 Schematic Diagram of Integrator Block ...................................................... A2-1
A2.2 Input Process Section.................................................................................... A2-2
A2.2.1 Determining Input Value Statuses....................................................A2-2
A2.2.2 Converting the Rate..........................................................................A2-2
A2.2.3 Converting Accumulation..................................................................A2-3
A2.2.4 Determining the Input Flow Direction...............................................A2-3
IM 01C25T02-01E
Toc-4
A2.3 Adder................................................................................................................ A2-3
A2.3.1 Status of Value after Addition............................................................A2-3
A2.3.2 Addition.............................................................................................A2-4
A2.4 Integrator......................................................................................................... A2-4
A2.5 Output Process............................................................................................... A2-5
A2.5.1 Status Determination........................................................................A2-5
A2.5.2 Determining the Output Value...........................................................A2-6
A2.5.3 Mode Handling .................................................................................A2-7
A2.6 Reset................................................................................................................. A2-7
A2.6.1 Reset Trigger....................................................................................A2-7
A2.6.2 Reset Timing.....................................................................................A2-8
A2.6.3 Reset Process...................................................................................A2-8
A2.7 List of Integrator Block Parameters.............................................................. A2-9
Appendix 3. Input Selector (IS) Block...........................................................A3-1
A3.1 Input Selector Function Block Schematic ................................................... A3-1
A3.2 Input Section ................................................................................................... A3-3
A3.2.1 Mode Handling .................................................................................A3-3
A3.2.2 MIN_GOOD Handling ......................................................................A3-4
A3.3 Selection ......................................................................................................... A3-5
A3.3.1 OP_SELECT Handling ....................................................................A3-5
A3.3.2 SELECTION Handling .....................................................................A3-6
A3.4 Output Processing ....................................................................................... A3-12
A3.4.1 Handling of SELECTED .................................................................A3-12
A3.4.2 OUT Processing .............................................................................A3-13
A3.4.3 STATUS_OPTS .............................................................................A3-14
A3.5 List of Input Selector Block Parameters .................................................... A3-14
A3.6 Application Example .................................................................................... A3-16
Appendix 4. Arithmetic (AR) Block ..............................................................A4-1
A4.1 Arithmetic Function Block Schematic ......................................................... A4-1
A4.2 Input Section ................................................................................................... A4-2
A4.2.1 Main Inputs .......................................................................................A4-2
A4.2.2 Auxiliary Inputs .................................................................................A4-2
A4.2.3 INPUT_OPTS ..................................................................................A4-3
A4.2.4 Relationship between the Main Inputs and PV ................................A4-3
A4.3 Computation Section ..................................................................................... A4-4
A4.3.1 Computing Equations ......................................................................A4-4
A4.3.2 Compensated Values .......................................................................A4-4
A4.3.3 Average Calculation .........................................................................A4-4
A4.4 Output Section ............................................................................................... A4-4
A4.4.1 Mode Handling .................................................................................A4-5
A4.4.2 Status Handling ................................................................................A4-5
A4.5 List of the Arithmetic Block Parameters...................................................... A4-6
IM 01C25T02-01E
Toc-5
Appendix 5. PID Block....................................................................................A5-1
A5.1 Function Diagram........................................................................................... A5-1
A5.2 Functions of PID Block................................................................................... A5-1
A5.3 Parameters of PID Block................................................................................ A5-2
A5.4 PID Computation Details................................................................................ A5-4
A5.4.1 PV-proportional and -derivative Type PID (I-PD)
Control Algorithm..............................................................................A5-4
A5.4.2 PID Control Parameters....................................................................A5-4
A5.5 Control Output................................................................................................. A5-4
A5.5.1 Velocity Type Output Action..............................................................A5-4
A5.6 Direction of Control Action............................................................................ A5-4
A5.7 Control Action Bypass................................................................................... A5-5
A5.8 Feed-forward................................................................................................... A5-5
A5.9 Block Modes.................................................................................................... A5-5
A5.9.1 Mode Transitions...............................................................................A5-6
A5.10 Bumpless Transfer.......................................................................................... A5-6
A5.11 Setpoint Limiters............................................................................................. A5-6
A5.11.1 When PID Block Is in Auto Mode......................................................A5-6
A5.11.2 When PID Block Is in Cas or RCas Mode........................................A5-6
A5.12 External-output Tracking............................................................................... A5-7
A5.13 Measured-value Tracking............................................................................... A5-7
A5.14 Initialization and Manual Fallback (IMan)..................................................... A5-7
A5.15 Manual Fallback.............................................................................................. A5-8
A5.16 Auto Fallback................................................................................................... A5-8
A5.17 Mode Shedding upon Computer Failure...................................................... A5-8
A5.17.1 SHED_OPT......................................................................................A5-8
A5.18 Alarms.............................................................................................................. A5-9
A5.18.1 Block Alarm (BLOCK_ALM)..............................................................A5-9
A5.18.2 Process Alarms.................................................................................A5-9
A5.19 Example of Block Connections..................................................................... A5-9
A5.20 View Object for PID Function Block............................................................ A5-10
Appendix 6. Link Master Functions..............................................................A6-1
A6.1 Link Active Scheduler.................................................................................... A6-1
A6.2 Link Master...................................................................................................... A6-1
A6.3 Transfer of LAS............................................................................................... A6-2
A6.4 LM Functions................................................................................................... A6-3
A6.5 LM Parameters................................................................................................ A6-4
A6.5.1 LM Parameter List.............................................................................A6-4
A6.5.2 Descriptions for LM Parameters.......................................................A6-6
A6.6 FAQs................................................................................................................. A6-8
IM 01C25T02-01E
Toc-6
Appendix 7. Software Download...................................................................A7-1
A7.1 Benefits of Software Download..................................................................... A7-1
A7.2 Specifications.................................................................................................. A7-1
A7.3 Preparations for Software Downloading...................................................... A7-1
A7.4 Software Download Sequence...................................................................... A7-2
A7.5 Download Files................................................................................................ A7-2
A7.6 Steps after Activating a Field Device............................................................ A7-3
A7.7 Troubleshooting.............................................................................................. A7-3
A7.8 Resource Block’s Parameters Relating to Software Download................ A7-4
A7.9 System/Network Management VFD Parameters Relating to Software
Download......................................................................................................... A7-5
A7.10 Comments on System/Network Management VFD Parameters
Relating to Software Download..................................................................... A7-6
Appendix 8. Advanced Diagnostics.............................................................A8-1
A8.1 Multi-sensing Process Monitoring................................................................ A8-1
A8.2 Impulse Line Blockage Detection (ILBD)..................................................... A8-1
A8.2.1 Blockage Detection...........................................................................A8-3
A8.2.2 Combination of Reference Result and Blockage Detection.............A8-5
A8.2.3 Operating Parameters......................................................................A8-6
A8.2.4 Operating Procedure........................................................................A8-7
A8.2.5 Alarm and Alert Setting.....................................................................A8-8
A8.2.6 Condition Check..............................................................................A8-10
A8.2.7 Obtain Reference Values................................................................A8-10
A8.2.8 Capability Test of Blockage Detection Operation...........................A8-11
A8.2.9 Start ILBD Operation.......................................................................A8-12
A8.2.10 Tuning.............................................................................................A8-12
A8.2.11 Reset of Reference Value...............................................................A8-13
A8.2.12 ILBD Parameter Lists......................................................................A8-14
A8.2.13 Checklist..........................................................................................A8-17
A8.3 Heat Trace Monitoring.................................................................................. A8-22
A8.3.1 FLG_TEMP_COEF Setting............................................................A8-23
A8.3.2 Alert and Alarm Setting...................................................................A8-23
A8.3.3 Assignment of FLG_TEMP_VAL to Process Value (PV) in
AI Function block ............................................................................A8-23
A8.3.4 Analog Alert.....................................................................................A8-23
A8.3.5 Out of Temperature Measurement Range......................................A8-23
A8.3.6 Status Error.....................................................................................A8-24
A8.3.7 Parameter Lists for Heat Trace Monitoring Function......................A8-24
Revision Information
IM 01C25T02-01E
<1. Introduction> 1-1
1. Introduction
This manual is for the DPharp EJX/EJA Series • Please note that changes in the specifications,
Differential Pressure/Pressure Transmitter Fieldbus construction, or component parts of the
Communication Type "transmitter". The Fieldbus instrument may not immediately be reflected
communication type is based on the same silicon in this manual at the time of change, provided
resonant sensing technology used in the BRAIN/ that postponement of revisions will not cause
HART communication type, and is similar to the difficulty to the user from a functional or
communication types in terms of basic performance performance standpoint.
and operation. This manual describes only those • The following safety symbols are used in this
topics that are required for operation of the manual:
Fieldbus communication type. For information
on the installation, wiring, and maintenance of
transmitters, refer to the user’s manual for each
model. Also note that the contents of this manual WARNING
are applicable for device revision 6 of EJX series
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,
pressure transmitters and device revision 2 of
if not avoided, could result in death or serious
EJA series pressure transmitters. See a device
injury.
information sheet attached to the instrument to
check the device revision.
CAUTION
 Regarding This Manual
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,
• This manual should be provided to the end
if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
user.
injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe
• The contents of this manual are subject to practices.
change without prior notice.
• All rights reserved. No part of this manual may
be reproduced in any form without Yokogawa’s IMPORTANT
written permission. Indicates that operating the hardware or software
• Yokogawa makes no warranty of any kind with in this manner may damage it or lead to system
regard to this manual, including, but not limited failure.
to, implied warranty of merchantability and
fitness for a particular purpose.
• If any question arises or errors are found, or if NOTE
any information is missing from this manual,
Draws attention to information essential for
please inform the nearest Yokogawa sales
understanding the operation and features.
office.
• The specifications covered by this manual are
limited to those for the standard type under the  Trademarks
specified model number break-down and do not
cover custom-made instruments. • ‘DPharp’, ‘EJX’, ‘EJA’, ‘FieldMate’ and ‘BRAIN
TERMINAL’ are registered trademarks of
Yokogawa Electric Corporation. Company
names and product names used in this material
are registered trademarks or trademarks of their
respective owners.
• In this manual, trademarks or registered
trademarks are not marked with ™ or ®.
IM 01C25T02-01E
1.1 Safe Use of This Product (c) Operation
For the safety of the operator and to protect the • Wait 5 min. after the power is turned off, before
instrument and the system, please be sure to follow opening the covers.
this manual’s safety instructions when handling this
(d) Maintenance
instrument. If these instructions are not heeded,
the protection provided by this instrument may be • Please carry out only the maintenance
impaired. In this case, Yokogawa cannot guarantee procedures described in this manual. If you
that the instrument can be safely operated. Please require further assistance, please contact the
pay special attention to the following points: nearest Yokogawa office.
• Care should be taken to prevent the build up of
(a) Installation
dust or other materials on the display glass and
• This instrument may only be installed by an the name plate. To clean these surfaces, use a
engineer or technician who has an expert soft, dry cloth.
knowledge of this device. Operators are not
allowed to carry out installation unless they (e) Explosion Protected Type Instrument
meet this condition. • Users of explosion proof instruments should
• With high process temperatures, care must refer first to section 2.1 (Installation of an
be taken not to burn yourself by touching the Explosion Protected Instrument) of this manual.
instrument or its casing. • The use of this instrument is restricted to those
• Never loosen the process connector nuts when who have received appropriate training in the
the instrument is installed in a process. This can device.
lead to a sudden, explosive release of process • Take care not to create sparks when accessing
fluids. the instrument or peripheral devices in a
• When draining condensate from the pressure hazardous location.
detector section, take appropriate precautions
to prevent the inhalation of harmful vapors and (f) Modification
the contact of toxic process fluids with the skin • Yokogawa will not be liable for malfunctions or
or eyes. damage resulting from any modification made
• When removing the instrument from a to this instrument by the customer.
hazardous process, avoid contact with the fluid (g) Product Disposal
and the interior of the meter.
• The instrument should be disposed of in
• All installation shall comply with local installation accordance with local and national legislation/
requirements and the local electrical code. regulations.
(b) Wiring (h) Authorized Representative in EEA
• The instrument must be installed by an • In relation to the CE Marking, The
engineer or technician who has an expert authorised representative for this product
knowledge of this instrument. Operators are not in the EEA (European Economic Area) is:
permitted to carry out wiring unless they meet Yokogawa Europe B.V. Euroweg 2, 3825 HD
this condition. Amersfoort,The Netherlands
• Before connecting the power cables, please
confirm that there is no current flowing through
the cables and that the power supply to the
instrument is switched off.
IM 01C25T02-01E
1.2 Warranty
• The warranty shall cover the period noted on
the quotation presented to the purchaser at the
time of purchase. Problems occurring during
the warranty period shall basically be repaired
free of charge.
• If any problems are experienced with this
instrument, the customer should contact the
Yokogawa representative from which this
instrument was purchased or the nearest
Yokogawa office.
• If a problem arises with this instrument,
please inform us of the nature of the problem
and the circumstances under which it
developed, including the model specification
and serial number. Any diagrams, data and
other information you can include in your
communication will also be helpful.
• The party responsible for the cost of fixing the
problem shall be determined by Yokogawa
following an investigation conducted by
Yokogawa.
• The purchaser shall bear the responsibility for
repair costs, even during the warranty period, if
the malfunction is due to:
- Improper and/or inadequate maintenance by

the purchaser.
- Malfunction or damage due to a failure
to handle, use, or store the instrument in
accordance with the design specifications.
- Use of the product in question in a location
not conforming to the standards specified by
Yokogawa, or due to improper maintenance
of the installation location.
- Failure or damage due to modification or
repair by any party except Yokogawa or an
approved representative of Yokogawa.
- Malfunction or damage from improper
relocation of the product in question after
delivery.
- Reason of force majeure such as fires,
earthquakes, storms/floods, thunder/
lightening, or other natural disasters, or
disturbances, riots, warfare, or radioactive
contamination.
IM 01C25T02-01E
<2. Handling Cautions> 2-1
2. Handling Cautions
2.1 Installation of an Explosion- 2.1.1 FM approval
Protected Instrument a. FM Explosionproof Type
If a customer makes a repair or modification to Caution for FM Explosionproof type
an intrinsically safe or explosionproof instrument
and the instrument is not restored to its original Note 1. The transmitters with optional code
condition, its intrinsically safe or explosionproof /FF1 are applicable for use in hazardous
construction may be compromised and the locations:
instrument may be hazardous to operate. Please • Applicable Standard: FM3600, FM3615,
contact Yokogawa before making any repair or FM3810, NEMA 250, ANSI/UL 61010-1,
modification to an instrument. ANSI/UL 61010-2-30
• Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1,
Groups B, C and D.
CAUTION • Dust-ignitionproof for Class II/III, Division 1,
Groups E, F and G.
This instrument has been tested and certified • Enclosure: Type 4X
as being intrinsically safe or explosionproof. • Temperature Class: T6
Please note that severe restrictions apply to this • Ambient Temperature: –40 to 60°C
instrument’s construction, installation, external • Supply Voltage:
wiring, maintenance and repair. A failure to abide 32 V dc max. (FOUNDATION Fieldbus and
by these restrictions could make the instrument a PROFIBUS PA type)
hazard to operate. • Output signal:
15 mA (FOUNDATION Fieldbus and
PROFIBUS PA type)
WARNING Note 2. Wiring
• All wiring shall comply with National Electrical
Maintaining the safety of explosionproof
Code ANSI/NFPA70 and Local Electrical
equipment requires great care during mounting,
Codes.
wiring, and piping. Safety requirements also
• When installed in Division 1, “FACTORY
place restrictions on maintenance and repair.
SEALED, CONDUIT SEAL NOT
Please read the following sections very carefully.
REQUIRED.”
Note 3. Operation
• Keep the “WARNING” nameplate attached to
WARNING the transmitter.
The range setting switch must not be used in a WARNING: OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE
hazardous area. REMOVING COVER.
FACTORY SEALED, CONDUIT SEAL NOT
REQUIRED.
INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
IMPORTANT USERS MANUAL IM 01C25.
All the blind plugs which accompany the • Take care not to generate mechanical
transmitters upon shipment from the factory are sparking when accessing the instrument and
certified by the applicable agency in combination peripheral devices in a hazardous location.
with the transmitters. The plugs which are Note 4. Maintenance and Repair
marked with the symbols “◊ Ex” on their surfaces • The instrument modification or parts
are certified only in combination with the replacement by other than authorized
transmitters. representative of Yokogawa Electric
Corporation is prohibited and will void
Factory Mutual Explosionproof Approval.
IM 01C25T02-01E
b. FM Intrinsically safe and Nonincendive Model: EJX-F Series Date: January 27, 2005
Type Control drawing (intrinsic safety)
EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters with

optional code /FS15 are applicable for use in
hazardous locations.
Note 1.
• Applicable Standard:
FM 3600
FM 3610
FM 3611
FM 3810 Class I, II, III, Division 1
ANSI/ISA-60079-0-2009 Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G
Class I, Zone 0, Group IIC
ANSI/ISA-60079-11-2009
ANSI/ISA-60079-27-2006
ANSI/UL 121201
ANSI/ISA-61010-1
NEMA 250
Associated Apparatus
• Rating (Safety Barrier)
Intrinsically Safe with Entity/FISCO for

Class I, II, III Division 1,
Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G T4
Class I Zone 0 AEx ia IIC T4 Rev.1: July 16, 2019 Doc. No.: IFM024-A12 P.1
Nonincendive field wiring/FNICO for Yokogawa Electric Corporation

IFM024
Class I, II Division 2
Groups A, B, C, D, F, G T4
Model: EJX-F Series Date: January 27, 2005
Class III Division 1 T4
Specific conditions of use:
Class I, Zone 2 Group IIC T4 - Precautions shall be taken to minimize the risk from electrostatic discharge of
painted parts.
• Ambient temperature: –55 to 60°C - When the enclosure of the Pressure Transmitters is made of aluminum alloy, if it is
mounted in Zone 0, it shall be installed such that, even in the event of rare incidents,
an ignition source due to impact and/or friction sparks is excluded.
• Enclosure: Type 4X Entity parameters [Groups: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and IIC]
• Electrical Connection: Ui: 24 V

Ii: 250 mA
Pi: 1.2 W
1/2 NPT female, M20 female Ci: 3.52 nF
Li: 0 µH
FISCO parameters (1) [Groups: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and IIC]
Note 2. Installation Ui: 17.5 V

Ii: 380 mA
Pi: 5.32 W
Installation should be in accordance with Ci: 3.52 nF
Li: 0 µH
Control Drawing IFM024-A12. FISCO parameters (2) [Groups: C, D, E, F, G, and IIB]

Ui: 17.5 V
Ii: 460 mA
Pi: 5.32 W
Note 3. Specific conditions of use Ci: 3.52 nF
Li: 0 µH
Precautions shall be taken to minimize the Notes:

1. Installation must be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NFPA70),
risk from electrostatic discharge of painted ANSI/ISA-RP12.06.01, and relevant local codes.
2. The Associated Apparatus and the Terminators must be FM-approved.
parts. 3. The following conditions must be satisfied.

Voc (or Uo) ≤ Ui
Isc (or Io) ≤ Ii
When the enclosure of the Pressure Po ≤ Pi
Ca (or Co) ≥ Ci + Ccable
Transmitters is made of aluminum alloy, if it is La (or Lo) ≥ Li + Lcable
4. General Purpose Equipment connected to the Associated Apparatus must not use or
generate a voltage more than Um of the Associated Apparatus.
mounted in Zone 0, it shall be installed such 5. The control drawing of the Associated Apparatus must be followed when installing the
equipment.
that, even in the event of rare incidents, an 6. Dust-tight conduit seals must be used when installed in Class II or Class III
environments.
ignition source due to impact and/or friction

7. WARNING –ELECTROSTATIC CHARGE MAY CAUSE AN EXPLOSION HAZARD.
AVOID ANY ACTIONS THAT CAUSE THE GENERATION O F ELECTROSTATIC
CHARGE, SUCH AS RUBBING WITH A DRY CLOTH ON COATING FACE OF THE
sparks is excluded. PRODUCT.
8. WARNING – SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR INTRINSIC SAFETY
AND SUITABILITY FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATION
Note 4. Maintenance and Repair

Only personnel authorized by Yokogawa
Rev.4: July 16, 2019 Doc. No.: IFM024-A12 P.2
Electric Corporation can repair the Yokogawa Electric Corporation
equipment. IFM024
IM 01C25T02-01E
Model: EJX-F Series Date: May 9, 2006 Model: EJX-F Series Date: January 27, 2005
FISCO Rules Nonincendive field wiring parameters

Vmax: 32 V
The FISCO Concept allows the interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus to associated apparatus Ci: 3.52 nF
not specifically examined in such combination. The criterion for such interconnection is that the Li: 0 µH
voltage (Ui), the current (Ii) and the power (Pi) which intrinsically safe apparatus can receive and
remain intrinsically safe, considering faults, must be equal or greater than the voltage (Uo, Voc or Vt), Notes:
the current (Io, Isc or It) and the power (Po) which can be provided by the associated apparatus 1. Installation must be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NFPA70),
(supply unit). In addition, the maximum unprotected residual capacitance (Ci) and inductance (Li) of ANSI/ISA-RP12.06.01, and relevant local codes.
each apparatus (other than terminators) connected to the Fieldbus must be less than or equal to 5 nF 2. The following conditions must be satisfied.
and 10 μH respectively. 3. In case Nonincendive Field Wiring Concept is used for the interconnection,
In each I.S. Fieldbus segment only one active source, normally the associated apparatus, is allowed to FM-approved Associated Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus, which meets the
provide the necessary power for the Fieldbus system. The allowed voltage (Uo, Voc or Vt) of the following conditions, must be used as the General Purpose Equipment. The
associated apparatus used to supply the bus cable must be limited to the range of 14 V d.c. to 17.5 V d.c. Terminators also must be FM approved.
All other equipment connected to the bus cable has to be passive, meaning that the apparatus is not Voc (or Uo) ≤ Vmax
allowed to provide energy to the system, except a leakage current of 50 μA for each connected device. Ca (or Co) ≥ Ci + Ccable
Separately powered equipment needs galvanic isolation to ensure the intrinsically safe Fieldbus La (or Lo) ≥ Li + Lcable
circuit remains passive. 4. Dust-tight conduit seals must be used when installed in Class II or Class III
The cable used to interconnect the devices needs to comply with the following parameters: environments.
Loop resistance R': 15....150 Ω/km 5. WARNING – SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR INTRINSIC SAFETY
Inductance per unit length L': 0.4....1 mH/km AND SUITABILITY FOR HAZARD OUS LOCATION
Capacitance per unit length C': 45....200 nF/km C' = C' line/line + 0.5 C' line/screen, if both lines are
floating or C' = C' line/line + C'line/screen, if the screen is connected to one line.
Length of spur cable: max. 60 m
Length of trunk cable: max. 1 km in IIC and 5 km in IIB
Length of splice: max = 1 m
Terminators
At the end of each trunk cable an FM Approved line terminator with the following parameters is
suitable:
R = 90...100 Ω
C = 0 ....2.2 μF
Rev.1: July 16, 2019 Doc. No.: IFM024-A12 P.2-1 Rev.5: July 16, 2019 Doc. No.: IFM024-A12 P.4-1
Yokogawa Electric Corporation Yokogawa Electric Corporation

IFM024 IFM024
Model: EJX-F Series Date: January 27, 2005 Model: EJX-F Series Date: August 19, 2005
Control drawing (nonincendive) FNICO Rules
The FNICO Concept allows the interconnection of nonincendive field wiring apparatus to associated
nonincendive field wiring apparatus not specifically examined in such combination. The criterion for
such interconnection is that the voltage (Vmax), the current (Imax) and the power (Pmax), which
nonincendive field wiring apparatus can receive and remain nonincendive, must be equal or greater
than the voltage (Uo, Voc or Vt), the current (Io, Isc or It) and the power (Po) which can be provided by
the associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus (supply unit). In addition the maximum
unprotected residual capacitance (Ci) and inductance (Li) of each apparatus (other than terminators)
connected to the Fieldbus must be less than or equal to 5 nF and 20 μH respectively.
In each N.I. Fieldbus segment only one active source, normally the associated nonincendive field
wiring apparatus, is allowed to provide the necessary power for the Fieldbus system. The allowed
voltage (Uo, Voc or Vt) of the associated nonincendive field wiring apparatus used to supply the bus
cable must be limited to the range 14 V d.c. to 17.5 V d.c. All other equipment connected to the bus
cable has to be passive, meaning that the apparatus is not allowed to provide energy to the system,
except a leakage current of 50 μA for each connected device. Separately powered equipment needs
galvanic isolation to ensure the nonincendive field wiring Fieldbus circuit remains passive.
The cable used to interconnect the devices needs to comply with the following parameters:
Loop resistance R': 15....150 Ω/km
Inductance per unit length L': 0.4....1 mH/km
Capacitance per unit length C': 45....200 nF/km C' = C' line/line + 0.5 C' line/screen, if both lines are
floating or C' = C' line/line + C'line/screen, if the screen is connected to one line.
Length of spur cable: max. 60 m
Length of trunk cable: max. 1 km in IIC and 5 km in IIB
Length of splice: max = 1 m
Class I, II, Division 2
Terminators
Groups A, B, C, D, F, G At the end of each trunk cable an FM Approved line terminator with the following parameters is
Class III, Division 1
suitable:
R = 90...100 Ω
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC C = 0 ....2.2 μF
General Purpose (Refer to Note 3)

Equipment
Rev.1: July 16, 2019 Doc. No.: IFM024-A12 P.3 Rev.2: July 16, 2019 Doc. No.: IFM024-A12 P.4-2
Yokogawa Electric Corporation Yokogawa Electric Corporation

IFM024 IFM024
IM 01C25T02-01E
2.1.2 CSA Certification Note 3. Operation
• WARNING:
a. CSA Explosionproof Type AFTER DE-ENERGIZING, DELAY 5
Caution for CSA explosionproof type. MINUTES BEFORE OPENING.
APRÉS POWER-OFF, ATTENDRE 5
Note 1. The transmitters with optional code /CF1 MINUTES AVANT D'OUVRIR.
are applicable for use in hazardous • WARNING:
locations: WHEN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ≥ 65°C,
Certificate: 2014354 USE THE HEAT-RESISTING CABLES ≥
• Applicable Standard: 90°C.
C22.2 No. 25 QUAND LA TEMPÉRATURE AMBIANTE
C22.2 No. 30 ≥ 65°C, UTILISEZ DES CÂBLES
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 94 RÉSISTANTES Á LA CHALEUR ≥ 90°C.
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1-12 • Take care not to generate mechanical
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-2-030-12 sparking when accessing to the instrument
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60079-0:07 and peripheral devices in a hazardous
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60079-1:07 location.
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60529
ANSI/ISA-12.27.01 Note 4. Maintenance and Repair
• Explosion-proof for Class I, Groups B, C and • The instrument modification or parts
D. replacement by other than authorized
• Dustignition-proof for Class II/III, Groups E, F representative of Yokogawa Electric
and G. Corporation and Yokogawa Corporation of
• Enclosure: Type 4X, IP66/IP67 America is prohibited and will void Canadian
• Temperature Code: T6...T4 Standards Explosionproof Certification.
• Ex d IIC T6...T4 Non-Hazardous Hazardous Locations Division 1
• Maximum Process Temperature: Locations
120°C (T4), 100°C (T5), 85°C (T6) Non-hazardous
Location
• Ambient Temperature: Equipment 45 cm Max.
–50* to 75°C (T4), –50* to 80°C (T5),
–50* to 75°C (T6)
* –15°C when /HE is specified.
32 V DC Max. Conduit
• Supply Voltage: 32 V dc max. 15 mA DC Sealing Fitting
• Output Signal: 15 mA dc Signal
Transmitters
Note 2. Wiring Non-Hazardous Hazardous Locations Division 2
• All wiring shall comply with Canadian Locations
Electrical Code Part I and Local Electrical Non-hazardous
Codes. Location
Equipment
• In hazardous location, wiring shall be in
conduit as shown in the figure.
• WARNING:
32 V DC Max.
A SEAL SHALL BE INSTALLED WITHIN 15 mA DC Sealing Fitting
45cm OF THE ENCLOSURE. Signal
Transmitters
UN SCELLEMENT DOIT ÊTRE INSTALLÉ À F0204.ai
MOINS DE 45cm DU BOÎTIER.

• WARNING:
WHEN INSTALLED IN CL.I, DIV 2, SEAL
NOT REQUIRED.
UNE FOIS INSTALLÉ DANS CL I, DIV 2,
AUCUN JOINT N'EST REQUIS.
IM 01C25T02-01E
b. CSA Intrinsically safe and Nonincendive Note 1. The safety barrier must be CSA certified.
Type
Note 2. Input voltage of the safety barrier must be
The transmitters with optional code /CS15. less than 250Vrms/Vdc.
• Certificate: 1689689
Note 3. Installation should be in accordance with
• Applicable standard: C22.2 No.0,
Canadian Electrical Code Part I and local
C22.2 No.94, C22.2 No.157, C22.2 No.213,
Electrical Code.
C22.2 No.61010-1, C22.2 No.61010-2-030,
CAN/CSA-C22.2 E60079-0:07, Note 4. Do not alter drawing without authorization
CAN/CSA-E60079-11:02, from CSA.
CAN/CSA-E60079-15:02, Electrical Data:
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.60529
ANSI/ISA-12.27.01 • Rating 1 (Entity)
• CSA Intrinsically Safe Approval For Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, and G or Group IIC
Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, & D; Class Ui (vmax) = 24 V dc
II, Division 1, Groups E, F & G; Class III; Ex ia Ii (Imax) = 250 mA
IIC T4 Pi (Pmax) = 1.2 W
Ambient Temperature: –55* to 60°C Ci = 3.52 nF
* –15°C when /HE is specified. Li = 0 μH
Type 4X, IP66/IP67 or
• CSA Nonincendive Approval • Rating 2 (FISCO)
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, & D; Class For Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, and G or Group IIC
II, Division 2, Groups F & G; Class III; Ex nL IIC Ui (vmax) = 17.5 V dc
T4 Ii (Imax) = 380 mA
Ambient Temperature: –55* to 60°C Pi (Pmax) = 5.32 W
Ci = 3.52 nF
Type 4X, IP66/ IP67 Li = 0 μH
or
 Caution for CSA Intrinsically safe type.
• Rating 3 (FISCO)
(Following contents refer to “DOC. No.
For Groups C, D, E, F, and G or Group IIB
ICS018)
Ui (vmax) = 17.5 V dc
Installation Diagram for Intrinsically safe Ii (Imax) = 460 mA
(Division 1 Installation) Pi (Pmax) = 5.32 W
Ci = 3.52 nF
Terminator Li = 0 μH
Installation requirements;
+ Pressure Po ≤ Pi Uo ≤ Ui Io ≤ Ii,
– Transmitter Co ≥ Ci + Ccable Lo ≥ Li + Lcable
Vmax ≥ Voc Imax ≥ Isc
+
– Field Instruments Ca ≥ Ci + Ccable La ≥ Li + Lcable
Uo, Io, Po, Co, Lo,Voc, Isc, Ca and La are
parameters of barrier.
+
– Field Instruments
Hazardous Location
Non-Hazardous Location
Terminator
+ –
Safety Barrier
+ – F0205.ai
IM 01C25T02-01E
 Caution for CSA Non-incendive type. 2.1.3 ATEX Certification
(Following contents refer to “DOC. No.
ICS018) (1) Technical Data
Installation Diagram for Non-incendive a. ATEX Intrinsically Safe Ex ia

or Type of protection "n" (Division 2
Caution for ATEX Intrinsically safe type.
Installation)
Note 1. EJX/EJA-E series pressure transmitters
Terminator with optional code /KS26 for potentially
explosive atmospheres:
+
–
SUPPLY Certification Information:
Pressure
Transmitter
+
WARNING
Transmitter
–
A modification of the equipment would no longer
comply with the construction described in the
certificate documentation.
+
Transmitter
–
Certificate Number:
Hazardous location KEMA 04ATEX1116 X
Non-Hazardous location
Terminator NOTE
The symbol “X” placed after the certificate
+ – number indicates that the equipment is subject to
CSA Certified
Equipment [nL] specific conditions of use.
+ –
Applicable Standard:
F0206.ai
EN IEC 60079-0, EN 60079-11
Note 1. Installation should be in accordance with Note 2. Rating
Canadian Electrical Code Part I and local Ex Marking:
Electrical Code. II 2 G Ex ia IIC/IIB T4 Ga
Note 2. Dust-tight conduit seal must be used when II 2 D Ex ia IIIC T85°C T100°C T120°C Db
installed in class II and III environments. Temperature Specifications:
Ambient Temperature range and Process
Note 3. Do not alter drawing without authorization Temperature range for Gas:
from CSA. Ambient temperature Process temperature
Electrical Data: range range
–55 to 60°C –55 to 120°C
• Rating (including FNICO)
Ui or Vmax = 32 V Ambient Temperature range and Process
Ci = 3.52 nF Temperature range for Dust:
Li = 0 μH Maximum Ambient Process
Type of
surface temperature temperature
O-ring
temperature range range
–30 to 60°C –30 to 80°C NBR
T85°C Fluoro-
–15 to 60°C –15 to 80°C rubber
(FKM)
–30 to 60°C –30 to 100°C NBR
T100°C Fluoro-
–15 to 60°C –15 to 100°C rubber
(FKM)
–30 to 60°C –30 to 120°C NBR
T120°C Fluoro-
–15 to 60°C –15 to 120°C rubber
(FKM)
IM 01C25T02-01E
Enclosure: Note 5. Specific conditions of use:
IP66/IP67 in accordance with only EN60529 - When the enclosure of the pressure
Electrical Parameters: transmitter is made of aluminum alloy, if
Intrinsically safe ratings are as follows: it is mounted in an area where the use of
[Entity] Category 1 G equipment is required, it shall
Ui = 24 V be installed such that, even in the event
Ii = 250 mA of rareincidents, an ignition source due to
Pi = 1.2 W impact and friction sparks is excluded.
Ci = 3.52 nF - Precautions shall be taken to minimize the
Li = 0 μH risk from electrostatic discharge of painted
[FISCO IIC] parts.
Ui = 17.5 V - The dielectric strength of at least 500 V of
Ii = 380 mA the intrinsically safe circuits of the pressure
Pi = 5.32 W transmitter is limited only by the overvoltage
Ci = 3.52 nF protection.
Li = 0 μH
Note 6. Maintenance and Repair:
[FISCO IIB]
- Only personnel authorized by Yokogawa
Ui = 17.5 V
Electric Corporation can repair the
Ii = 460 mA
equipment.
Pi = 5.32 W
Ci = 3.52 nF Note 7. Control drawing
Li = 0 μH
Note 3. Installation:
- Refer to the control drawing IKE022-A12 P.1
and P.2. (Note 7.)
- The type of threads is indicated at the cable
entry, using the following marking.
Screw Size Marking
ISO M20 × 1.5 female M
ANSI 1/2 NPT female A or N or W
F0201.ai
- The selected type of the Ex marking on the

name plate should be indicated. For this
purpose, the tick boxes can be used as
follows.
 Ex ia IIC/IIB T4 Ga
 Ex ia IIIC T85°C T100°C T120°C Db
Note 4. Operation:
- If the pressure transmitter is mounted in an
area where explosive atmospheres may be
present, it must be installed in such a way
that the risk from electrostatic discharges
and propagating brush discharges caused by
rapid flow of dust are avoided.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Note 2. Electrical Data
• Supply voltage: 32 V dc max.
Output current: 15 mA dc
Note3. For combined approval types
Once a device of multiple approval type is
installed, it should not be re-installed using
any other approval types. Apply a permanent
mark in the check box of the selected
approval type on the ertification label on
the transmitter to distinguish it from unused
approval types.
Note 4. Installation
• All wiring shall comply with local installation
requirements.
• In order to prevent the earthing conductor
from loosening, the conductor must be
secured to the terminal, tightening the screw
with appropriate torque. Care must be taken
not to twist the conductor.
• Cable glands, adapters and/or blanking
elements with a suitable IP rating shall
be of Ex d IIC/Ex tb IIIC certified by ATEX
and shall be installed so as to maintain the
specific degree of protection (IP Code) of the
b. ATEX Flameproof Type
equipment.
Caution for ATEX flameproof type
Note 5. Operation
Note 1. The transmitters with optional code /KF22 • WARNING: AFTER DE-ENERGIZING,
for potentially explosive atmospheres: DELAY 5 MINUTES BEFORE OPENING.
• No. KEMA 07ATEX0109X WHEN THE AMBIENT TEMP.≥65°C, USE
• Applicable Standard: HEAT-RESISTING CABLES≥90°C.
EN IEC 60079-0, EN 60079-1, • Take care not to generate mechanical
EN 60079-31 sparking when accessing the instrument and
• Type of Protection and Marking Code: peripheral devices in hazardous location.
II 2G Ex db IIC T6...T4 Gb,
Note 6. Maintenance and Repair
II 2D Ex tb IIIC T85°C Db
• Warning: When maintenance and repair are
• Group: II
performed, confirm the following conditions
• Category: 2G, 2D
and the then perform works.
• Enclosure: IP66 / IP67
Confirm the power supply is cut off and
• Temperature Class for gas-proof:
the voltage of power supply terminal is not
T6, T5, and T4
supplied.
• Ambient Temperature for gas-proof:
• Only personnel authorized by Yokogawa
–50 to 75°C (T6), –50 to 80°C (T5),
Electric Corporation can repair the
and –50 to 75°C (T4)
equipment in accordance with the relevant
• Maximum Process Temperature (Tp.) for
standards: IEC / EN 60079-19 (Equipment
gas-proof:
repair, overhaul and reclamation) and
85°C (T6), 100°C (T5), and 120°C (T4)
IEC / EN 60079-17 (Electrical installation
• Maximum Surface Temperature for dust-
inspection and maintenance); otherwise the
proof:
certification will be voided.
T85°C (Tamb.: –30* to 75°C, Tp.: 85°C)
IM 01C25T02-01E
Note 7. Special Conditions for Safe Use Note 3. Installation
- See control drawing IKE047-A70. (Note 7.)
WARNING
• Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion Screw Size Marking
hazard. Avoid any actions that cause the ISO M20 × 1.5 female M
generation of electrostatic charge, such as ANSI 1/2 NPT female A or N or W
rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of F0201.ai
the product.
• In the case where the enclosure of the Note 4. Operation
Pressure Transmitter is made of aluminium, If the pressure transmitter is mounted in an
if it is mounted in an area where the use of area where explosive atmospheres may be
category 2D apparatus is required, it shall present, it must be installed in such a way
be installed in such a way that the risk from that the risk from electrostatic discharges.
electrostatic discharges and propagating Note 5. Specific conditions of use
brush discharges caused by rapid flow of See control drawing IKE047-A70 (Note 7.)
dust is avoided.
• The fasteners used to fasten the transmitter Note 6. Maintenance and Repair
enclosure onto the sensor capsule is special Only personnel authorized by Yokogawa
fastener, and the property class of it is A2-50 Electric Corporation can repair the
(A4-50) or more. equipment.
• For transmitters with a membrane made of Note 7. Control drawing
titanium, ignition hazard due to impact and Note 7. Control drawing
friction on the membranes shall be avoided.

• Maximum Surface Temperature for dust-
proof: T85°C (Tamb.: –30* to 75°C, Tp.: –30*
to 85°C)
c. ATEX Intrinsically Safe Ex ic

Caution for ATEX Intrinsically safe Ex ic
Note 1. The transmitters with option code /KN26

for potentially explosive atmospheres:
EN IEC 60079-0, EN 60079-11
Note 2. Rating
Ex Marking
II 3 G Ex ic IIC T4 Gc
Temperature specifications:
Ambient Process
temperature temperature Type of O-ring
range range
–30 to 60°C –30 to 120°C NBR
Fluoro-rubber
–15 to 60°C –15 to 120°C
(FKM)
IP Code: IP66
Overvoltage Category: I
Electrical Parameters: See control drawing
IKE047-A70 (Note 7.)
IM 01C25T02-01E
(2) Electrical Connection (6) Name Plate
A mark indicating the electrical connection type is  Name plate
stamped near the electrical connection port. These
marks are as follows.
Screw Size Marking
ANSI 1/2 NPT female N or W
 Tag plate for flameproof type
No. KEMA 07ATEX0109 X Enlcosure : IP66/IP67
 Ex db IIC T6...T4 Gb
TEMP. CLASS T6 T5 T4
PROCESS TEMP.(Tp.) -50 TO 85 100 120 °C
Tamb. -50 TO 75 80 75 °C
 Ex tb IIIC T85°C Db
T85°C(Tamb.:-30(-15) TO 75°C, Tp.:-30(-15) TO 85°C)
D
Location of the mark WARNING
F0210.ai
AFTER DE-ENERGIZING, DELAY 5 MINUTES
BEFORE OPENING.
WHEN THE AMBIENT TEMP. ≥ 65°C,
USE THE HEAT-RESISTING CABLE AND CABLE GLAND ≥ 90°C
POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING HAZARD
(3) Installation  Tag plate for intrinsically safe Ex ia for Fieldbus

No. KEMA 04ATEX1116 X
Ex ia IIC/IIB T4 Ga Ta: -55 TO 60°C Tp.: -55 TO 120°C
Ex ia IIIC T85°C T100°C T120°C Db Ta:-30(-15) TO 60°C
WARNING
Max. surface temp.: T85°C T100°C T120°C
Tp.: -30(-15) TO 80°C 100°C 120°C
FISCO field device(IIC/IIB)
Entity parameters
Ui=24V, Ii=250mA, Pi=1.2W, Ci=3.52nF, Li=0μH
• All wiring shall comply with local installation *3 D

requirements and the local electrical code. WARNING
• There is no need for a conduit seal in

Division 1 and Division 2 hazardous POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING HAZARD - SEE USER'S MANUAL.
locations because this product is sealed at  Tag plate for intrinsically safe Ex ic
the factory. Ex ic IIC T4 Gc
IP66
Tamb -30(-15) TO 60°C
MAX. PROCESS TEMP. 120°C
Ui=32V, Ci=3.52nF, Li=0µH
(4) Operation
WARNING
WARNING POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING HAZARD - SEE USER'S MANUAL.
F0211.ai
• OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOVING MODEL: Specified model code.

COVER. INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH STYLE: Style code.
THIS USER’S MANUAL SUFFIX: Specified suffix code.
• Take care not to generate mechanical SUPPLY: Supply voltage.
sparking when accessing the instrument and OUTPUT: Output signal.
peripheral devices in a hazardous location. MWP: Maximum working pressure.
CAL RNG: Specified calibration range.
NO.: Serial number and year of production*1.
(5) Maintenance and Repair
TOKYO 180-8750 JAPAN:
The manufacturer name and the address*2.
WARNING *1: The first digit in the final three numbers of the serial
number appearing after “NO.” on the name plate indicates
When maintenance and repair are performed, the year of production. The following is an example of a
serial number for a product that was produced in 2010:
confirm the following conditions and then
perform works. Confirm that the power supply is 91K819857 032
cut off and the voltage of power supply terminal
is not supplied. The year 2010
*2: “180-8750” is the Zip code for the following address.

2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo Japan
*3: The identification number of Notified Body.
IM 01C25T02-01E
2.1.4 IECEx Certification Note 4. Maintenance and Repair
• The instrument modification or parts
a. IECEx Flameproof Type replacement by other than authorized
Caution for IECEx flameproof type. representative of Yokogawa Electric
Corporation is prohibited and will void IECEx
Note 1. The transmitters with optional code /SF2 Certification.
are applicable for use in hazardous • Electrical Connection
locations: A mark indicating the electrical connection
• No. IECEx CSA 07.0008 type is stamped near the electrical
• Applicable Standard: connection port. These marks are as follows.
IEC60079-0:2011, IEC60079-1:2007-4
Screw Size Marking
• Flameproof for Zone 1, Ex d IIC T6...T4 Gb
• Enclosure: IP66 and IP67
ANSI 1/2 NPT female N or W
• Maximum Process Temperature:
120°C (T4), 100°C (T5), 85°C (T6)
• Ambient Temperature:
–50* to 75°C (T4), –50* to 80°C (T5),
–50* to 75°C (T6)
Location of the mark
• Supply Voltage: 32 V dc max.
• Output Signal: 15 mA dc F0210.ai
Note 2. Wiring
• In hazardous locations, the cable entry b. IECEx Intrinsically Safe Ex ia
devices shall be of a certified flameproof Caution for IECEx Intrinsically safe Ex ia.
type, suitable for the conditions of use and
correctly installed. Note 1. EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters
• Unused apertures shall be closed with with optional code /SS26 are applicable for
suitable flameproof certified blanking use in hazardous locations.
elements. Certification Information:
Note 3. Operation
• WARNING: WARNING
AFTER DE-ENERGIZING, DELAY 5
A modification of the equipment would no longer
MINUTES BEFORE OPENING.
comply with the construction described in the
• WARNING:
certificate documentation.
WHEN THE AMBIENT TEMP.≥65°C, USE
HEAT-RESISTING CABLE AND CABLE
GLAND ≥90°C. Certificate Number:
• Take care not to generate mechanical IECEx DEK 12.0016X
sparking when accessing to the instrument
and peripheral devices in a hazardous NOTE
location.
The symbol “X” placed after the certificate
• Electrostatic charge may cause an explosion
number indicates that the equipment is subject to
hazard. Avoid any actions that cause the
specific conditions of use.
generation of electrostatic charge, such as
rubbing with a dry cloth on coating face of the
product.
IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-11
IM 01C25T02-01E
Note 2. Rating Note 5. Specific conditions of use
Ex Marking: Ex ia IIC/IIB T4 Ga - When the pressure transmitter is made of
Temperature specifications: aluminum alloy, if it is mounted in an area
Ambient Temperature range and Process where the use of EPL Ga equipment is
Temperature range for Gas: required, it shall be installed such that, even
Ambient temperature Process temperature in the event of rareincidents, an ignition
range range source due to impact and friction sparks is
–55 to 60°C –55 to 120°C excluded.
Electrical Parameters: - Precautions shall be taken to minimize the
Intrinsically safe ratings are as follows: risk from electrostatic discharge of painted
[Entity] parts.
Ui = 24 V - The dielectric strength of at least 500 V of
Ii = 250 mA the intrinsically safe circuits of the pressure
Pi = 1.2 W transmitter is limited only by the overvoltage
Ci = 3.52 nF protection.
Li = 0 μH Note 6. Maintenance and Repair
[FISCO IIC] - Only personnel authorized by Yokogawa
Ui = 17.5 V Electric Corporation can repair the
Ii = 380 mA equipment.
Pi = 5.32 W
Ci = 3.52 nF Note7. Control drawing
Li = 0 μH
[FISCO IIB]
Ui = 17.5 V
Ii = 460 mA
Pi = 5.32 W
Ci = 3.52 nF
Li = 0 μH
- Refer to the control drawing IKE022-A12 P.1
and P.2. (Note 7.)
Screw Size Marking
F0201.ai
- The selected type of the Ex marking on the

follows.
 Ex ia IIC/IIB T4 Ga
 Ex ic IIC T4 Gc
Note 4. Operation
area where explosive atmospheres may be
that the risk from electrostatic discharges
and propagating brush discharges caused by
rapid flow of dust are avoided.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Note 2. Ratings
Ex Marking: Ex ic IIC T4 Gc
Temperature specifications:
Ambient Process
temperature temperature Type of O-ring
range range
–30 to 60°C –30 to 120°C NBR
Fluoro-rubber
–15 to 60°C –15 to 120°C
(FKM)
IP Code: IP66
Overvoltage Category: I
Electrical Parameters: See control drawing
IIE020-A70 (Note 7.)
- See control drawing IIE020-A70. (Note 7.)
Screw Size Marking
F0201.ai
c. IECEx Intrinsically Safe Ex ic - The selected type of the Ex marking on the

Caution for IECEx Intrinsically safe Ex ic.
Note 1. EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters follows.
with optional code /SS26 are applicable for  Ex ia IIC/IIB T4 Ga
use in hazardous locations.  Ex ic IIC T4 Gc
Certification Information:
Note 4. Operation
WARNING area where explosive atmospheres may be
A modification of the equipment would no longer that the risk from electrostatic discharges
comply with the construction described in the and propagating brush discharges caused by
certificate documentation. rapid flow of dust are avoided.
Note 5. Specific conditions of use
Certificate Number: IECEx DEK 13.0064X
See control drawing IIE020-A70 (Note 7.)
NOTE Note 6. Maintenance and Repair

- Only personnel authorized by Yokogawa
The symbol “X” placed after the certificate Electric Corporation can repair the
number indicates that the equipment is subject to equipment.
specific conditions of use.
IEC 60079-0, IEC 60079-11
IM 01C25T02-01E
Note 7. Control drawing
IM 01C25T02-01E
<3. About Fieldbus> 3-1
3. About Fieldbus
3.1 Outline • Carry out scaling, damping and square root
extraction.
Fieldbus is a widely used bi-directional digital
communication protocol for field devices that (5) PID function block
enable the simultaneous output to many types of • Performs the PID control computation based on
data to the process control system. the deviation of the measured value from the
The transmitter of Fieldbus communication type setpoint.
employs the specification standardized by The
FieldComm Group, and provides interoperability 3.3 Logical Structure of Each
between Yokogawa devices and those produced by
Block
other manufacturers. Fieldbus comes with software
consisting of three AI function blocks that enable the DPharp System/network management VFD
flexible implementation of systems. Fieldbus PD Tag Communication
parameters
Node address
For information on other features, engineering, VCR
design, construction work, startup and maintenance Function block
execution schedule
of Fieldbus, refer to “Fieldbus Technical Information”
Link Master
(TI 38K03A01-01E).
Function block VFD
LCD LCD PID function

3.2 Internal Structure of DPharp Transducer block block
Block tag AR function
The transmitter contains two virtual field devices Parameters block
IS function
(VFD) that share the following functions. block
IT function
3.2.1 System/network Management VFD block
SC function
block
• Sets node addresses and Physical Device tags AI function
(PD Tag) necessary for communication. block
AI function
• Controls the execution of function blocks. block
• Manages operation parameters and SENSOR AI function
Transducer block block
communication resources (Virtual Sensor
Sensor
input Block tag Block tag

Communication Relationship: VCR). Parameters Parameters Output
3.2.2 Function Block VFD OUT
OUT_D
(1) Resource block Resource block

Block tag
• Manages the status of transmitter hardware.
Parameters
• Automatically informs the host of any detected F0301.ai
faults or other problems. Figure 3.1 Logical Structure of Each Block

(2) SENSOR Transducer block
Setting of various parameters, node addresses,
• Converts sensor output to pressure, static and PD Tags shown in Figure 3.1 is required before
pressure, and capsule temperature signals, and starting operation.
transfers to the AI function blocks.
(3) LCD Transducer block
3.4 Wiring System Configuration
• Controls the display of the integral indicator.
The number of devices that can be connected to
(4) AI1 function block a single bus and the cable length vary depending
on system design. When constructing systems,
• Condition raw data from the Transducer block.
both the basic and overall design must be carefully
• Output differential pressure, static pressure and
considered to achieve optimal performance.
capsule temperature signals.
IM 01C25T02-01E
<4. Getting Started> 4-1
4. Getting Started
Fieldbus is fully dependent upon digital cross section of 0.9 mm2 or more and a cycle
communication protocol and differs in operation period of within 5 cm (2 inches) may be used.
from conventional 4 to 20 mA transmission and Termination processing depends on the type of
the BRAIN or HART communication protocol. It is device being deployed. For the transmitter, use
recommended that novice users use field devices an M4 screw terminal claw. Some hosts require
in accordance with the procedures described in this a connector.
section. The procedures assume that field devices
Refer to Yokogawa when making arrangements to
will be set up on a bench or in an instrument shop.
purchase the recommended equipment.
Connect the devices as shown in Figure 4.1.
4.1 Connection of Devices Connect the terminators at both ends of the
The following are required for use with Fieldbus trunk, with a minimum length of the spur laid for
devices: connection.
The polarity of signal and power must be
• Power supply: maintained.
Fieldbus requires a dedicated power supply. It
is recommended that current capacity be well Fieldbus power
supply
over the total value of the maximum current Transmitter HOST
consumed by all devices (including the host).
Conventional DC current cannot be used as is. Terminator
• Terminator:
Fieldbus requires two terminators. Refer to
Terminator
the supplier for details of terminators that are F0401.ai
attached to the host. Figure 4.1 Cabling
• Field devices:
Connect the Fieldbus communication type
transmitter. Two or more transmitters or other
devices can be connected.
• Host:
Used for accessing field devices. A
dedicated host (such as DCS) is used for
an instrumentation line while dedicated
communication tools are used for experimental Terminal 1
purposes. For operation of the host, refer to Terminal 2
the instruction manual for each host. No other

+ 1
Power supply and output terminals
details on the host are given in this manual. SUPPLY – 2
• Cable: Ground terminal

F0402.ai
Used for connecting devices. Refer to “Fieldbus Figure 4.2 Wiring Diagram
Technical Information” (TI 38K03A01-01E)
for details of instrumentation cabling. For
laboratory or other experimental use, a twisted
pair cable two to three meters in length with a
IM 01C25T02-01E
Table 4.1 Operation Parameters
NOTE Symbol Parameter Description and Settings
No CHECK terminal is used for Fieldbus V (ST) Slot-Time Indicates the time
necessary for immediate
communication transmitter. Do not connect the reply of the device. Unit of
field indicator and check meter. time is in octets (256 μs).
Set maximum
specification for all
Before using a Fieldbus configuration tool other devices. For the
than the existing host, confirm it does not affect the transmitter, set a value of
loop functionality in which all devices are already 4 or greater.
installed in operation. Disconnect the relevant V (MID) Minimum-Inter- Minimum value of
PDU-Delay communication data
control loop from the bus if necessary. intervals. Unit of time is in
octets (256 μs). Set the
IMPORTANT maximum specification
for all devices. For the
Connecting a Fieldbus configuration tool transmitter, set a value of
4 or greater.
to a loop with its existing host may cause
V (MRD) Maximum- The worst case time
communication data scrambling resulting in a Reply-Delay elapsed until a reply is
functional disorder or a system failure. recorded. The unit is
Slot-time; set the value
so that V (MRD) × V
(ST) is the maximum
4.2 Host Setting value of the specification
To activate Fieldbus, the following settings are transmitter, the setting
must be a value of 12 or
required for the host. greater.
V (FUN) First-Unpolled- Indicate the address next
IMPORTANT Node to the address range used
by the host. Set 0 × 15 or
Do not turn off the power immediately after greater.
setting. When the parameters are saved to the V (NUN) Number-of- Unused address range.
EEPROM, the redundant processing is executed consecutive-
Unpolled-Node
for an improvement of reliability. If the power
is turned off within 60 seconds after setting is
0x00
made, the modified parameters are not saved Not used
and the settings may return to the original values. 0x0F
0x10
Bridge device
0x13
0x14
LM device
V(FUN)
Unused V(NUN)
V(FUN)+V(NUN)
BASIC device
0xF7
0xF8
Default address
0xFB
0xFC
Portable device address
0xFF
Note 1: Bridge device: A linking device which brings data
from one or more H1 networks.
Note 2: LM device: with bus control function (Link Master
function).
Note 3: BASIC device: without bus control function.
F0403.ai
Figure 4.2 Available Address Range
IM 01C25T02-01E
4.3 Bus Power ON 4.3.2 Confirming that Transmitter is
Operating Properly
4.3.1 Integral Indicator Display When Turn on the power of the host and the bus. If the
Powering On indicator is not lit, check the polarity of the power
Turn on the power of the host and the bus. supply.
For models with the integral indicator code “D”, the The device information, including PD tag, Node
display shows all segments in the LCD and then address, and Device ID, is described on the sheet
changes to the displays shown below sequentially. attached to the transmitter. The device information
is given in duplicate on this sheet.
DEVICE INFORMATION
Device ID : 594543000CXXXXXXXX
PD Tag : PT2001
Device Revision : 6
All segments display Model name (3s) Node Address
Serial No.
:
:
0xf5
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Physical Location :
Note:
Our Device Description Files and Capabilities Files available at

http://www.yokogawa.com/fld/ (English) or
http://www.yokogawa.co.jp/fld/ (Japanese)
Communication Protocol (3s) Device Revision (3s)

DEVICE INFORMATION
Device ID : 594543000CXXXXXXXX
PD Tag : PT2001
Device Revision : 6
Node Address : 0xf5
Serial No. : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Physical Location :
Note:
Our Device Description Files and Capabilities Files available at

http://www.yokogawa.com/fld/ (English) or
http://www.yokogawa.co.jp/fld/ (Japanese)
Software Revision (3s) F0405.ai
NOTE F0404.ai
LCD display can be set to all segments display Figure 4.4 Device Information Sheet Attached to
only by changing the following parameter. Transmitter
LCD Tranceducer Block POWER_ON_INFO
1:ON(Default) If no transmitter is detected, check the available
Show all segments display, Model name, address range and the polarity of the power supply.
Communication Protocol, device revision and If the node address and PD tag are not specified
software revision when powering on. when ordering, default value is factory set. If two
0:OFF or more transmitters are connected at a time with
Show all segments display when powering on. default value, only one transmitter will be detected
from the host as transmitters have the same initial
address. Separately connect each transmitter and
set a different address for each.
IM 01C25T02-01E
4.4 Integration of DD 4.6 Reading the Parameters
If the host supports DD (Device Description), the To read the transmitter parameters, select the AI1
DD of the transmitter needs to be installed. Check if block of the transmitter from the host screen and
host has the following directory under its default DD read the OUT parameter. The current selected
directory. signal is displayed. Check that MODE_BLOCK
of the function block and resource block is set to
594543\000C AUTO, and change the signal input and read the
(594543 is the manufacturer number of parameter again. A new designated value should be
Yokogawa Electric Corporation, and 000C is the displayed.
EJX device number, respectively. The device
number of EJA is "0011".)
If this directory is not found, the DD of the 4.7 Continuous Record of
transmitter has not been included. Create the Values
above directory and copy the DD file (0m0n.ffo,
0m0n.sym, 0m0n.ff5, 0m0n.sy5) (m, n is a numeral) If the host has a function that continuously
into the directory. ‘0m’ in the file name shows the records the indications, use this function to list the
device revision, and ‘0n’ shows the DD revision. If indications (values). Depending on the host being
you do not have the DD or capabilities files, you can used, it may be necessary to set the schedule of
download them from our web site: Publish (the function that transmits the indication on
a periodic basis).
https://www.yokogawa.com/library/
Once the DD is installed in the directory, the name
4.8 Generation of Alarm
and attribute of all parameters of the transmitter are
displayed. Generation of an alarm can be attempted from
the transmitter. Block alarm, Output limit alarm,
Off-line configuration is possible by using
and Update alarm are informed to the host. When
capabilities files.
generating alarm, a Link Object and a VCR Static
Entry need to be set. For details of Link Object and
4.5 Set the parameters using VCR Static Entry, refer to section 5.6.1 Link object
and section 5.5.1 VCR Setting.
DTM
When configure the parameters using FieldMate,
use the DTM (Device Type Manager) shown in the
Table 4.2.
Table 4.2 DTM
DTM Transmitters
Model Devise Device
Name
Name Type Revision
EJXA
EJX
EJX V5.1 (Except 6
(0x000C)
EJX9A)
EJA –NEXT EJA-NEXT
EJAE 2
V1.1 (0x0011)
“Field Diagnostics” function (refer to IM 01R01A15-

01EN) is available on EJX FF DTM Revision
3.4.0.21 or later and EJA-NEXT FF DTM Revision
3.4.0.21 or later.
The DTM corresponding to the above is included in
Yokogawa Device DTM Library 4.0/Device Files
R 3.05.00 or later.
IM 01C25T02-01E
<5. Configuration> 5-1
5. Configuration
This chapter describes how to adapt the function 5.1 Network Design
and performance of the transmitter to suit specific
applications. Because multiple devices are Select the devices to be connected to the Fieldbus
connected to Fieldbus, it is important to carefully network. The following are essential for the
consider the device requirements and settings operation of Fieldbus.
when configuring the system. The following steps
• Power supply
must be taken.
Fieldbus requires a dedicated power supply. It
(1) Network design is recommended that current capacity be well
Determines the devices to be connected to over the total value of the maximum current
Fieldbus and checks the capacity of the power consumed by all devices (including the host).
supply. Conventional DC current cannot be used as is.
(2) Network definition • Terminator
Determines the tag and node addresses for all Fieldbus requires two terminators. Refer to
devices. the supplier for details of terminators that are
attached to the host.
(3) Definition of combining function blocks
• Field devices
Determines how function blocks are combined.
Connect the field devices necessary for
(4) Setting tags and addresses instrumentation. The transmitter has passed the
Sets the PD Tag and node addresses for each interoperability test conducted by The Fieldbus
device. Foundation. In order to properly start Fieldbus,
it is recommended that the devices used satisfy
(5) Communication setting the requirements of the above test.
Sets the link between communication • Host
parameters and function blocks.
Used for accessing field devices. A minimum
(6) Block setting of one device with the bus control function is
Sets the parameters for function blocks. needed.
• Cable
The following section describes in sequence each
step of this procedure. The use of a dedicated Used for connecting devices. Refer to “Fieldbus
configuration tool significantly simplifies this Technical Information” (TI 38K03A01-01E) for
procedure. Refer to Appendix 6 when the details of instrumentation cabling. Provide a
transmitter is used as Link Master. cable sufficiently long to connect all devices.
For field branch cabling, use terminal boards or
a connection box as required.
First, check the capacity of the power supply. The

power supply capacity must be greater than the
sum of the maximum current consumed by all
devices to be connected to Fieldbus. The maximum
current consumed (power supply voltage 9 V to 32
V) for the transmitter is 15 mA (24 mA in Software
download operation). The cable used for the spur
must be of the minimum possible length.
IM 01C25T02-01E
5.2 Network Definition 0x00
Not used
Before connection of devices with Fieldbus, define 0x0F
0x10
the Fieldbus network. Allocate PD Tag and node Bridge device
0x13
addresses to all devices (excluding such passive 0x14
devices as terminators). LM device
V(FUN)
The PD Tag is the same as the conventional
Unused V(NUN)
one used for the device. Up to 32 alphanumeric
characters may be used for definition. Use a
V(FUN)+V(NUN)
hyphen as a delimiter as required. BASIC device
0xF7
The node address is used to specify devices for 0xF8
communication purposes. Because this data is Default address
0xFB
too long for a PD Tag, the host uses the node 0xFC
address in place of the PD Tag for communication. Portable device address
0xFF
A range of 20 to 247 (or hexadecimal 14 to F7) can F0501.ai
be set. The device (LM device) with bus control
Figure 5.1 Available Range of Node Addresses
function (Link Master function) is allocated from
a smaller address number (20) side, and other To ensure stable operation of Fieldbus, determine
devices (BASIC device) without bus control function the operation parameters and set them to the LM
allocated from a larger address number (247) side devices. While the parameters in Table 5.2 are to
respectively. Place the transmitter in the range of be set, the worst-case value of all the devices to
the BASIC device. When the transmitter is used as be connected to the same Fieldbus must be used.
Link Master, place the transmitter in the range of the Refer to the specification of each device for details.
LM device. Set the range of addresses to be used Table 5.2 lists DPharp specification values.
to the LM device. Set the following parameters.
Table 5.2 Operation Parameter Values of the
Table 5.1 Parameters for Setting Address Range DPharp to be Set to LM Devices
Symbol Parameters Description Description and
Symbol Parameters
V (FUN) First-Unpolled- Indicates the address Settings
Node next to the address range V (ST) Slot-Time Indicates the time
used for the host or other necessary for immediate
LM device. reply of the device. Unit of
V (NUN) Number-of- Unused address range time is in octets (256 μs).
consecutive- Set maximum
Unpolled-Node specification for all
devices. For the
transmitter, set a value of
The devices within the address range written
4 or greater.
as “Unused” in Figure 5.1 cannot be used on a V (MID) Minimum-Inter- Minimum value of
Fieldbus. For other address ranges, the range is PDU-Delay communication data
periodically checked to identify when a new device intervals. Unit of time is in
is mounted. Care must be taken to keep the unused octets (256 μs). Set the
maximum specification
device range as narrow as possible so as to lessen for all devices. For the
the load on the Fieldbus. transmitter, set a value of
4 or greater.
V (MRD) Maximum- The worst case time
Reply-Delay elapsed until a reply is
recorded. The unit is
Slottime; set the value
so that V (MRD) × V
(ST) is the maximum
value of the specification
transmitter, the setting
must be a value of 12 or
greater.
IM 01C25T02-01E
5.3 Definition of Combining
LIC100
Function Blocks
The input/output parameters for function blocks are
combined. As required, they can be combined with EJX FIC100
the input of the control block. The setting is written #1
to the transmitter link object. See “Block setting” in LI100
Section 5.6 for the details. It is also possible to read
values from the host at proper intervals instead of
EJX
connecting the transmitter block output to other
#2
blocks. FI100
FC100
The combined blocks need to be executed F0502.ai
synchronously with other blocks on the Figure 5.2 Example of Loop Connecting
communications schedule. In this case, change the Function Block of Two EJX with Other
DPharp schedule according to the following table. Instruments
The values in the table are factory-settings.
Table 5.3 Execution Schedule of the DPharp
Function Blocks Macrocycle (Control Period)
Setting (Enclosed is LI100

Index Parameters
factory-setting) OUT IN
LIC100 CAS_IN
269 MACROCYCLE_ Cycle BKCAL_OUT
(SM) DURATION (MACROCYCLE)
BKCAL_IN
period of control or FIC100 FC100
measurement. Unit IN
is 1/32 ms. (32000 = FI100
1.0 s) OUT BKCAL_IN BKCAL_OUT
351 FB_START_ENTRY.1 AI1 block startup time.
(SM) Elapsed time from the
start of MACROCYCLE Commu- Unscheduled
specified in 1/32 ms. nication Communication
(0 = 0 s) Schedule
352 FB_START_ENTRY.2 Not used.
to to Scheduled
381 FB_START_ENTRY.31 Communication
F0503.ai
(SM)
Figure 5.3 Function Block Schedule and
Communication Schedule
A maximum of 30 ms is taken for execution of
AI block. For scheduling of communications for When the control period (macrocycle) is set to more
combination with the next function block, the than 4 seconds, set the following intervals to be
execution is so arranged as to start after a lapse more than 1% of the control period.
of longer than 30 ms. In no case should function
blocks of the transmitter be executed at the same - Interval between “end of block execution” and
time (execution time is overlapped). “start of sending CD from LAS”
- Interval between “end of block execution” and
Figure 5.3 shows an example of schedule based on “start of the next block execution”
the loop shown in Figure 5.2.
IM 01C25T02-01E
5.4 Setting of Tags and 5.5 Communication Setting
Addresses To set the communication function, it is necessary
to change the database residing in SM-VFD.
This section describes the steps in the procedure to
set PD Tags and node addresses in the transmitter.
5.5.1 VCR Setting
There are three states of Fieldbus devices as
shown in Figure 5.4, and if the state is other than Set VCR (Virtual Communication Relationship),
the lowest SM_OPERATIONAL state, no function which specifies the called party for communication
block is executed. EJX must be transferred to this and resources. The transmitter has 38 VCRs whose
state when a transmitter tag or address is changed. application can be changed, except for the first
VCR, which is used for management.
UNINITIALIZED The transmitter has VCRs of four types:
(No tag nor address is set)
Server(QUB) VCR
Tag clear Tag setting A Server responds to requests from a host. This
communication needs data exchange. This
type of communication is called QUB (Queued
INITIALIZED
(Only tag is set)
User-triggered Bidirectional) VCR.
Source (QUU) VCR
Address clear Address setting A Source multicasts alarms or trends to other
devices. This type of communication is called
SM_OPERATIONAL QUU (Queued User-triggered Unidirectional)
(Tag and address are retained, and VCR.
the function block can be executed.)
F0504.ai Publisher (BNU) VCR
Figure 5.4 Status Transition by Setting PD Tag and A Publisher multicasts AI block output to
Node Address another function block(s). This type of
communication is called BNU (Buffered
The transmitter has a PD Tag (PT2001) and node Network-triggered Unidirectional) VCR.
address (245, or hexadecimal F5) that are set
upon shipment from the factory unless otherwise Subscriber (BNU) VCR
specified. To change only the node address, clear A Subscriber receives output of another
the address once and then set a new node address. function block(s) by PID block.
To set the PD Tag, first clear the node address and A Server VCR is capable to responding to
clear the PD Tag, then set the PD Tag and node requests from a Client (QUB) VCR after the Client
address again. successfully initiates connection to the Server. A
Devices whose node addresses have been cleared Source VCR transmits data without established
will have the default address (randomly chosen connection. A Sink (QUU) VCR on another device
from a range of 248 to 251, or from hexadecimal F8 can receive it if the Sink is configured so. A
to FB). At the same time, it is necessary to specify Publisher VCR transmits data when LAS requests
the device ID in order to correctly specify the device. so. An explicit connection is established from
The device ID of the EJX is 594543000Cxxxxxxxx Subscriber (BNU) VCR(s) so that a Subscriber
and that of the EJA is 5945430011xxxxxxxx. (The knows the format of published data.
xxxxxxxx at the end of the above device ID is a total Each VCR has the parameters listed in Table 5.4.
of 8 alphanumeric characters.) Parameters must be changed together for each
VCR because modification of individual parameters
may cause inconsistent operation.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Table 5.4 VCR Static Entry
Sub- Sub-
Parameter Description Parameter Description
index index
1 FasArTypeAndRole Indicates the type and 7 FasDllMaxDlsduSize Specifies maximum DL
role of communication Service Data unit Size
(VCR). The following (DLSDU). Set 256 for
4 types are used for Server and Trend VCR,
DPharp. and 64 for other VCRs.
0x32: Server 8 FasDllResidual Specifies whether
(Responds to ActivitySupported connection is
requests from monitored. Set TRUE
host.) (0xff) for Server.
0x44: Source This parameter is
(Transmits alarm not used for other
or trend.) communication.
0x66: Publisher (Sends
AI block output to 9 FasDllTimelinessClass Not used for DPharp.
other blocks.) 10 FasDllPublisherTime Not used for DPharp.
0x76: Subscriber WindowSize
(Receives output 11 FasDllPublisher Not used for DPharp.
of other blocks by SynchronizaingDlcep
PID block.)
12 FasDllSubsriberTime Not used for DPharp
2 FasDllLocalAddr Sets the local address WindowSize
to specify VCR in
DPharp. A range of 20 13 FasDllSubscriber Not used for DPharp.
to F7 in hexadecimal. SynchronizationDlcep
3 FasDllConfigured Sets the node address 14 FmsVfdId Sets VFD for DPharp
RemoteAddr of the called party for to be used.
communication and 0x1: System/network
the address (DLSAP management VFD
or DLCEP) used to 0x1234: Function block
specify VCR in that VFD
address. For DLSAP or 15 FmsMaxOutstanding Set 0 to Server. It is
DLCEP, a range of 20 ServiceCalling not used for other
to F7 in hexadecimal is applications.
used.
Addresses in Subindex 16 FmsMaxOutstanding Set 1 to Server. It is
2 and 3 need to be set ServiceCalled not used for other
to the same contents of applications.
the VCR as the called 17 FmsFeatures Indicates the type
party (local and remote Supported of services in the
are reversed). application layer.
4 FasDllSDAP Specifies the quality In the DPharp, it is
of communication. automatically set
Usually, one of the according to specific
following types is set. applications.
0x2B: Server
0x01: Source (Alert) VCRs are factory-set as shown in the table below.
0x03: Source (Trend)
0x91: Publisher/
Subscriber
5 FasDllMaxConfirm To establish connection
DelayOnConnect for communication, a
maximum wait time
for the called party's
response is set in ms.
Typical value is 60
seconds (60000).
6 FasDllMaxConfirm For request of data,
DelayOnData a maximum wait time
for the called party's
response is set in ms.
Typical value is 60
seconds (60000).
IM 01C25T02-01E
Table 5.5 VCR List Table 5.6 Link Object Parameters
Index VCR Sub-
Factory Setting Parameter Description
(SM) Number index
402 1 For system management (Fixed) 1 LocalIndex Sets the index of function
403 2 Server (LocalAddr = 0xF3) block parameters to be
combined; set “0” for Trend
404 3 Server (LocalAddr = 0xF4) and Alert.
405 4 Server (LocalAddr = 0xF7) 2 VcrNumber Sets the index of VCR to be
406 5 Trend Source (LocalAddr = 0x07, combined. If set to “0”, this
Remote Address=0x111) link object is not used.
407 6 Publisher for AI1 (LocalAddr = 0x20) 3 RemoteIndex Not used in DPharp. Set
to “0”.
408 7 Alert Source (LocalAddr = 0x07,
Remote Address=0x110) 4 ServiceOperation Set one of the following.
Set only one each for link
409 8 Server (LocalAddr = 0xF9) object for Alert or Trend.
410 9 Publisher for AI2 (LocalAddr = 0x21) 0: Undefined
411 to 10 to 38 Not used. 2: Publisher
439 3: Subscriber
6: Alert
7: Trend
5.5.2 Function Block Execution Control 5 StaleCountLimit Set the maximum number
of consecutive stale input
According to the instructions given in Section 5.3, values which may be
received before the input
set the execution cycle of the function blocks and status is set to BAD. To
schedule of execution. avoid the unnecessary
mode transition caused
when the data is not
5.6 Block Setting correctly received by
subscriber, set this
Set the parameter for function block VFD. parameter to “2” or more.
5.6.1 Link Object Set link objects as shown in Table 5.7.
A link object combines the data voluntarily sent by Table 5.7 Factory-Settings of Link Objects
the function block with the VCR. A single link object (example)
specifies one combination. Each link object has the Index Link Object # Factory Settings
parameters listed in Table 5.6. Parameters must 30000 1 AI1.OUT → VCR#6
be changed together for each VCR because the 30001 2 Trend → VCR#5
modifications made to each parameter may cause 30002 3 Alert → VCR#7
inconsistent operation. 30003 4 AI2.OUT → VCR#9
30004
to 5 to 45 Not used
30044
IM 01C25T02-01E
5.6.2 Trend Object Table 5.9 Trend Object are Factory-Set
It is possible to set the parameter so that the Index Parameters Factory Settings
function block automatically transmits Trend. The 32000 to TREND_FLT.1 to Not used.
32007 TREND_FLT.8
transmitter has 10 Trend objects, 8 of which are
32008 to TREND_DIS.1 to Not used.
used for Trend in analog mode parameters and 2 is 32009 TREND_DIS.2
used for Trend in discrete mode parameter. A single
Trend object specifies the trend of one parameter.
SMIB
(System Resource Transducer
Each Trend object has the parameters listed in Management AI1 OUT AI2 OUT
block block
Table 5.8. The first four parameters are the items Information
Base)
to be set. Before writing to a Trend object, it is NMIB
(Network Alert
necessary to release the WRITE_LOCK parameter. Management FBOD
Information Trend
Base)
Table 5.8 Parameters for Trend Objects
Link #1 #4 #3 #2
Sub-
Parameter Description object
index
1 Block Index Sets the leading index
DPharp
of the function block that VCR #1 #2 #3 #4 #8 #6 #9 #7 #5
takes a trend.
2 Parameter Relative Sets the index of
Index parameters taking a trend DLSAP 0xF8 0xF3 0xF4 0xF7 0xF9 0x20 0x21 0x07
by a value relative to the DLCEP
beginning of the function
block. In the DPharp Fieldbus Cable
AI block, the following Host 1 Host 2 Device 1 Device 2
three types of trends are
possible. F0505.ai
7: PV
8: OUT Figure 5.5 Example of Default Configuration
19: FIELD_VAL
3 Sample Type Specifies how trends are 5.6.3 View Object
taken. Choose one of the
following 2 types: This object forms a group of parameters in a
1: Sampled upon
execution of a function block. One advantage brought by forming groups
block. of parameters is the reduction of load for data
2: The average value is transactions. View Object has the parameters
sampled.
listed in Table 5.11 to 5.14. Purpose of View Objects
4 Sample Interval Specifies sampling
intervals in units of 1/32 is shown in Table 5.10.
ms. Set the integer
multiple of the function Table 5.10 Purpose of Each View Object
block execution cycle. Description
5 Last Update The last sampling time. VIEW_1 Set of dynamic parameters required by
6 to List of Status Status part of a sampled operator for plant operation. (PV, SV, OUT,
21 parameter. Mode etc.)
22 to List of Samples Data part of a sampled VIEW_2 Set of static parameters which need to be
37 parameter. shown to plant operator at once. (Range etc.)
VIEW_3 Set of all the dynamic parameters.
10 trend objects are factory-set as shown Table 5.9. VIEW_4 Set of static parameters for configuration or
maintenance.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Table 5.11 View Object for Resource Block
Relative VIEW Relative VIEW
Parameter Mnemonic Parameter Mnemonic
Index 1 2 3 3_2 4 4_2 Index 1 2 3 3_2 4 4_2
1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2 2 2 52 DEVICE_STATUS_8 4
2 TAG_DESC SOFTDWN_
53 1
PROTECT
3 STRATEGY 2
54 SOFTDWN_FORMAT
4 ALERT_KEY 1
55 SOFTDWN_COUNT 2
5 MODE_BLK 4 4
SOFTDWN_ACT
6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2 56 1
_AREA
7 RS_STATE 1 1
SOFTDWN_MOD
8 TEST_RW 57 16
_REV
9 DD_RESOURCE 58 SOFTDWN_ERROR 2
10 MANUFAC_ID 4 59 SOFTDWN_HISTORY
11 DEV_TYPE 2 SOFTDWN_HIST_
60
12 DEV_REV 1 INDEX
13 DD_REV 1 61 COMPATIBILITY_REV 1
14 GRANT_DENY 2 62 CAPABILITY_LEV 1
63 CAPABILITY_CONFIG 2
15 HARD_TYPES 2
64 WRITE_LOCK_LEVEL 1
16 RESTART
65 SI_CONTROL_CODES 1
17 FEATURES 2
66 FD_VER 2
18 FEATURE_SEL 2 67 FD_FAIL_ACTIVE 4 4
19 CYCLE_TYPE 2 FD_OFFSPEC
68 4 4
20 CYCLE_SEL 2 _ACTIVE
21 MIN_CYCLE_T 4 69 FD_MAINT_ACTIVE 4 4
22 MEMORY_SIZE 2 70 FD_CHECK_ACTIVE 4 4
23 NV_CYCLE_T 4 71 FD_FAIL_MAP 4
72 FD_OFFSPEC_MAP 4
24 FREE_SPACE 4
73 FD_MAINT_MAP 4
25 FREE_TIME 4 4
74 FD_CHECK_MAP 4
26 SHED_RCAS 4
75 FD_FAIL_MASK 4
27 SHED_ROUT 4 76 FD_OFFSPEC_MASK 4
28 FAULT_STATE 1 1 77 FD_MAINT_MASK 4
29 SET_FSTATE 78 FD_CHECK_MASK 4
30 CLR_FSTATE 79 FD_FAIL_ALM
31 MAX_NOTIFY 1 80 FD_OFFSPEC_ALM
32 LIM_NOTIFY 1 81 FD_MAINT_ALM
33 CONFIRM_TIME 4 82 FD_CHECK_ALM
83 FD_FAIL_PRI 1
34 WRITE_LOCK 1
84 FD_OFFSPEC_PRI 1
35 UPDATE_EVT
85 FD_MAINT_PRI 1
36 BLOCK_ALM
86 FD_CHECK_PRI 1
37 ALARM_SUM 8 8 87 FD_SIMULATE 9
38 ACK_OPTION 2 88 FD_RECOMMEN_ACT 2 2
39 WRITE_PRI 1 FD_EXTENDED
89 4
40 WRITE_ALM _ACTIVE_1
41 ITK_VER 2 FD_EXTENDED
90 4
_ACTIVE_2
42 SOFT_REV
FD_EXTENDED
43 SOFT_DESC 91 4
_ACTIVE_3
44 SIM_ENABLE_MSG FD_EXTENDED
92 4
45 DEVICE_STATUS_1 4 _ACTIVE_4
46 DEVICE_STATUS_2 4 FD_EXTENDED
93 4
47 DEVICE_STATUS_3 4 _ACTIVE_5
FD_EXTENDED
48 DEVICE_STATUS_4 4 94 4
_ACTIVE_6
49 DEVICE_STATUS_5 4 FD_EXTENDED
50 DEVICE_STATUS_6 4 95 4
_ACTIVE_7
51 DEVICE_STATUS_7 4
IM 01C25T02-01E
Relative VIEW Table 5.12 View Object for SENSOR Transducer
Parameter Mnemonic Block
Index 1 2 3 3_2 4 4_2
FD_EXTENDED Relative Parameter VIEW
96 4 Index Mnemonic 1 2 3_1 3_2 3_3 4_1 4_2 4_3 4_4 4_5
_ACTIVE_8
FD_EXTENDED_ 1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
97 4 2 TAG_DESC
MAP_1
FD_EXTENDED_ 3 STRATEGY 2
98 4 4 ALERT_KEY 1
MAP_2
FD_EXTENDED_ 5 MODE_BLK 4 4
99 4 6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2
MAP_3
7 UPDATE_EVT
FD_EXTENDED_
100 4 8 BLOCK_ALM
MAP_4
TRANSDUCER_
FD_EXTENDED_ 9
101 4 DIRECTORY
MAP_5
TRANSDUCER
FD_EXTENDED_ 10 2 2 2 2
102 4 _TYPE
MAP_6 11 XD_ERROR 1 1
FD_EXTENDED_ COLLECTION_
103 4 12
MAP_7 DIRECTORY
FD_EXTENDED_ PRIMARY_
104 4 13 2
MAP_8 VALUE_TYPE
105 PRIVATE_1 14 PRIMARY_VALUE 5 5
PRIMARY_
106 PRIVATE_2 15 11
VALUE_RANGE
107 PRIVATE_3 16 CAL_POINT_HI 4
108 PRIVATE_4 17 CAL_POINT_LO 4
109 PRIVATE_5 18 CAL_MIN_SPAN 4
110 PRIVATE_6 19 CAL_UNIT 2
111 PRIVATE_7 20 SENSOR_TYPE 2
112 PRIVATE_8 SENSOR_
21 11
RANGE
113 PRIVATE_9
22 SENSOR_SN 32
114 PRIVATE_10
SENSOR_CAL_
115 PRIVATE_11 23 1
METHOD
DEVICE_CONDITION_ SENSOR_
116 4 24 32
ACTIVE_1 CAL_LOC
DEVICE_CONDITION_ SENSOR_CAL_
117 4 25 7
ACTIVE_2 DATE
DEVICE_CONDITION_ SENSOR_CAL_
118 4 26 32
WHO
ACTIVE_3
SENSOR_
DEVICE_CONDITION_ 27 2
119 4 ISOLATOR_MTL
ACTIVE_4 SENSOR_FILL_
DEVICE_CONDITION_ 28 2
120 4 FLUID
ACTIVE_5 SECONDARY_
29 5 5
DEVICE_CONDITION_ VALUE
121 4
ACTIVE_6 SECONDARY_
30 2
DEVICE_CONDITION_ VALUE_UNIT
122 4 CAL_DEVIATION
ACTIVE_7 31 4
_HI
DEVICE_CONDITION_
123 4 CAL_DEVIATION
ACTIVE_8 32 4
_LO
EXTERNAL_
33 1
Totals (# bytes) 40 32 77 61 72 66 ZERO_TRIM
PRIMARY_
34 4
VALUE_FTIME
TERTIARY_
35 5 5
VALUE
36 SP_VALUE_TYPE 2
SP_VALUE_
37 11
RANGE
CAL_SP_
38 4
POINT_HI
CAL_SP_POINT_
39 4
LO
CAL_SP_MIN_
40 4
SPAN
41 CAL_SP_UNIT 2
IM 01C25T02-01E
Relative Parameter VIEW Relative Parameter VIEW
Index Mnemonic 1 2 3_1 3_2 3_3 4_1 4_2 4_3 4_4 4_5 Index Mnemonic 1 2 3_1 3_2 3_3 4_1 4_2 4_3 4_4 4_5
CAL_SP_ 89 VALUE_BLKF 5
42 4
DEVIATION_HI 90 VALUE_DPAVG 5
CAL_SP_ 91 RATIO_FDP 5
43 4 92 RATIO_FSPL 5
DEVIATION_LO
SP_VALUE_ 93 RATIO_FSPH 5
44 4 94 CRATIO_FDP 5
FTIME
45 ATM_PRESS 4 95 NRATIO_FDP 5
46 CLEAR_CAL DIAG_
96 2
APPLICABLE
47 CAP_TEMP_VAL 5 5
97 FLG_TEMP_VAL 5
CAP_TEMP_ FLG_TEMP_
48 11
RANGE 98 11
RANGE
49 AMP_TEMP_VAL 5 5 FLG_TEMP_
AMP_TEMP_ 99 4
50 11 COEF
RANGE 100 FLG_TEMP_PRI 1
51 MODEL 16 FLG_TEMP_H_
SPECIAL_ 101 4
52 32 LIM
ORDER_ID FLG_TEMP_L_
53 MANUFAC_DATE 7 102 4
LIM
CAP_GASKET_ 103 FLG_TEMP_ALM 13
54 1
MTL 104 TEST_KEY1
55 FLANGE_MTL 1 105 TEST_KEY2
56 D_VENT_PLUG 1 106 TEST_KEY3
57 FLANGE_TYPE 1 107 TEST_1
REM_SEAL_ 108 TEST_2
58 1 109 TEST_3
ISOL_MTL
110 TEST_4
59 FLANGE_SIZE 1
111 TEST_5
60 REM_SEAL_NUM 1 112 TEST_6 2
REM_SEAL_ 113 TEST_7 2
61 1
FILL_FLUID 114 TEST_8 1
REM_SEAL_ 115 TEST_9 1
62 1
TYPE 116 TEST_10 1
63 ALARM_SUM 8 8 117 TEST_11 2
AUTO_ 118 TEST_12 2
64 1
RECOVERY 119 TEST_13 15
65 MS_CODE 120 TEST_14 38
66 DIAG_MODE 1 121 TEST_15 30
67 DIAG_PERIOD 2 122 TEST_16 33
123 TEST_17
68 DIAG_PRI 1
124 TEST_18
69 DIAG_ERR 2 125 TEST_19
70 DIAG_H_ALM 13 126 TEST_20
71 DIAG_L_ALM 13 127 TEST_21
72 DIAG_OPTION 2 128 TEST_22
REF_LIM_ 129 TEST_23
73 4 130 TEST_24
FDPMIN
74 4 132 TEST_26
FSPMIN
75 4 134 TEST_28
BLKFMAX
76 COMP_FLAG 1 135 TEST_29
77 DIAG_LIM 40 136 TEST_30
78 DIAG_COUNT 1 137 TEST_31
REFERENCE_
79 8 Totals (# bytes) 44 54 44 62 85 82 106 77 95 35
TIME
REFERENCE_
80 5
FDP
REFERENCE_
81 5
FSPL
REFERENCE_
82 5
FSPH
REFERENCE_
83 5
BLKF
REFERENCE_
84 5
DPAVG
85 VALUE_TIME 8
86 VALUE_FDP 5
87 VALUE_FSPL 5
88 VALUE_FSPH 5
IM 01C25T02-01E
Table 5.13 View Object for LCD Transducer Block Table 5.14 View Object for AI Function Block
Relative VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW Relative VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW
Parameter Mnemonic Parameter Mnemonic
Index 1 2 3 4 Index 1 2 3 4
1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2 1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2
2 TAG_DESC 2 TAG_DESC
3 STRATEGY 2 3 STRATEGY 2
4 ALERT_KEY 1 4 ALERT_KEY 1
5 MODE_BLK 4 4 5 MODE_BLK 4 4
6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2
6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2
7 PV 5 5
7 UPDATE_EVT
8 OUT 5 5
8 BLOCK_ALM
9 SIMULATE
TRANSDUCER_
9 10 XD_SCALE 11
DIRECTORY
11 OUT_SCALE 11
TRANSDUCER_
10 2 2 2 2 12 GRANT_DENY 2
TYPE
11 XD_ERROR 1 1 13 IO_OPTS 2
14 STATUS_OPTS 2
COLLECTION_
12 15 CHANNEL 2
DIRECTORY
13 DISPLAY_SEL 1 16 L_TYPE 1
14 INFO_SEL 1 17 LOW_CUT 4
18 PV_FTIME 4
15 BLOCK_TAG1 32
19 FIELD_VAL 5 5
16 PARAMETER_SEL1 2
20 UPDATE_EVT
17 DISPLAY_TAG1 8
21 BLOCK_ALM
18 UNIT_SEL1 1
22 ALARM_SUM 8 8
19 DISPLAY_UNIT1 8
23 ACK_OPTION 2
20 EXP_MODE1 1
24 ALARM_HYS 4
21 BLOCK_TAG2 32 25 HI_HI_PRI 1
22 PARAMETER_SEL2 2 26 HI_HI_LIM 4
23 DISPLAY_TAG2 8 27 HI_PRI 1
24 UNIT_SEL2 1 28 HI_LIM 4
25 DISPLAY_UNIT2 8 29 LO_PRI 1
26 EXP_MODE2 1 30 LO_LIM 4
27 BLOCK_TAG3 32 31 LO_LO_PRI 1
28 PARAMETER_SEL3 2 32 LO_LO_LIM 4
29 DISPLAY_TAG3 8 33 HI_HI_ALM
34 HI_ALM
30 UNIT_SEL3 1
35 LO_ALM
31 DISPLAY_UNIT3 8
36 LO_LO_ALM
32 EXP_MODE3 1
37 OUT_D_SEL 2
33 BLOCK_TAG4 32
38 OUT_D 2
34 PARAMETER_SEL4 2
35 DISPLAY_TAG4 8
Totals (# bytes) 31 26 33 48
36 UNIT_SEL4 1
37 DISPLAY_UNIT4 8
38 EXP_MODE4 1
BAR_GRAPH_
39 1
SELECT
40 DISPLAY_CYCLE 1
41 POWER_ON_INFO 1
42 TEST_40 1
Totals (# bytes) 11 111 11 114
IM 01C25T02-01E
Table 5.15 Indexes of View for Each Block
VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW
1 2 3 4
Resourse Block 40102 40104
40100 40101 to to
40103 40105
SENSOR Transducer 40202 40205
Block 40200 40201 to to
40204 40209
LCD Transducer Block 40250 40251 40252 40253
AI1 Function Block 40400 40401 40402 40403
PID Function Block 40800 40801 40802 40803
SC Function Block 41450 41451 41452 41453
IT Function Block 41600 41601 41602 41603
IS Function Block 41700 41701 41702 41703
AR Function Block 41750 41751 41752 41753
5.6.4 Function Block Parameters

Function block parameters can be read from the
host or can be set. For a list of the parameters of
blocks held by the transmitter, refer to “9. Parameter
Lists”. For the function blocks other than AI block,
LM function, software download function and
Advanced Diagnostics, refer to Appendix 1 to 8.
IM 01C25T02-01E
<6. Explanation of Basic Items> 6-1
6. Explanation of Basic Items

6.1 Outline (1) Target (Target mode):
Sets the operating condition of the block.
This chapter describes the SENSOR transducer (2) Actual (Actual mode):
block, the LCD transducer block, and the AI function Indicates the current operating condition.
block and explains basic parameter settings. (3) Permitted (Permitted mode):
Refer to Appendixes for other function blocks, Indicates the operating condition that the
LM function, software download function, and block is allowed to take.
advanced diagnostics. (4) Normal (Normal mode):
Indicates the operating condition that the
6.2 Setting and Changing block will usually take.
Parameters for the Whole 6.3 SENSOR Transducer Block

Process
The SENSOR transducer block is in between the
sensor and the AI function blocks. It calculates
IMPORTANT
pressure/differential pressure, static pressure,
Do not turn off the power immediately after and capsule temperature from sensor signals.
setting. When the parameters are saved to the Then it performs damping and range checks for
EEPROM, the redundant processing is executed the measured values of these three variables and
for an improvement of reliability. If the power sends signals to the AI function block.
is turned off within 60 seconds after setting is
made, the modified parameters are not saved 6.3.1 Functional Block
and the settings may return to the original values. Figure 6.1 presents the functional block of the
SENSOR transducer. The calculated values
Block mode of pressure/differential pressure, H-side static
pressure, L-side static pressure, and capsule
Many parameters require a change of the block temperature are assigned to PRIMARY_VALUE,
mode of the function block to O/S (Out of Service) SECONDARY_VALUE, TERTIARY_VALUE, CAP_
when their data is changed. To change the block TEMP_VAL, AMP_TEMP_VAL, and FLG_TEMP_
mode of the function block, its MODE_BLK needs VAL (option code: /DG1) respectively. Measured
to be changed. The MODE_BLK is comprised of values output to the AI function blocks are selected
the four sub-parameters below: by the Channel parameter of those blocks.
Pressure Damping Range Adjust- Unit

/differential processing check ment Check
PRIMARY_VALUE
pressure (Channel1)
calculation H-side
Sensor static SECONDARY_VALUE
pressure
signals Static Damping Range Adjust- Unit (Channel2)
pressure processing check ment Check
calculation L-side
static TERTIARY_VALUE
pressure (Channel3)
Capsule Range Unit
temperature
Check
CAP_TEMP_VAL
check
calculation (Channel4)
Amplifier Range Unit
temperature
Check
AMP_TEMP_VAL
check
Flange Range Unit
temperature
Check
FLG_TEMP_VAL
check
Historical Equipment
records information
F0601.ai
Figure 6.1 SENSOR Transducer Functional Block
IM 01C25T02-01E
6.3.2 Block Mode Adjustment of pressure/differential pressure
signal:
The Block modes permitted for the SENSOR
transducer block are Automatic (Auto) and Out of EJX Series Pressure/Differential Pressure
Service (O/S). The mode must be set to Auto under Transmitters have been accurately adjusted
normal operating conditions, and to O/S when according to the specifications at factory setting.
making changes to an important parameter. For Minimal errors can occur due to the environment
parameters that can only be changed in the Auto where the transmitter is installed and the mounting
and O/S modes, refer to the parameter list for the position. To fine-tune any errors, three zero/span
SENSOR Transducer block in Chapter 9. adjustment functions can be used: automatic and
manual zero/span adjustment by communication
6.3.3 Functions Relating to Pressure/ terminals, and zero-point adjustment by means of
Differential Pressure the external adjustment screw on the transmitter.
Reference to pressure/differential pressure Automatic adjustment

value: The value of the pressure exerted on the point
where the adjustment is to be made is assigned
By accessing PRIMARY_VALUE, it is possible to to parameters (CAL_POINT_LO, CAL_POINT_
refer to the pressure/differential pressure value HI). After this assignment is set, the amount of
and status. The update period of this value is 100 adjustment is calculated by the transmitter and
mseconds. The pressure unit is selected by XD_ automatically updated.
SCALE.unit of the AI block, in which PRIMARY_
VALUE is selected. The status is normally Good- Manual adjustment
Non Specific. However, in the case of a sensor From the exerted pressure and the output of the
failure or out of measurement range, it turns to Bad transmitter, calculate the amount of zero/span
or Uncertain. For details, refer to Table 8.9. adjustment manually, and assign the calculated
value to parameters (CAL_DEVIATION_LO,
Setting of signal damping for pressure/ CAL_DEVIATION_HI).
differential pressure: Zero-point adjustment by the external screw.
When the pressure/differential pressure signal With pressure being exerted on the point where
fluctuates greatly, the fluctuation can be reduced the adjustment is to be made, zero adjustment
by increasing the time constant for signal damping. needs to be performed. To do this, adjust the
PRIMARY_VALUE_FTIME is the parameter for calculated value by turning the external Zero-point
setting the signal damping for pressure/differential adjustment screw, so that it agrees with the actual
pressure. The unit of signal damping is second. input pressure (true value). The output value
increases when the screw is rotated to the right. It
Determination of the range limit of pressure/ decreases when the screw is rotated to the left. The
differential pressure signal: adjustment width is small when the rotation speed
is low and large when fast.
When the pressure/differential pressure signal
deviates more than 10% from the capsule When performing zero-point adjustment by the
measurement range shown in PRIMARY_VALUE_ external screw, EXTERNAL_ZERO_TRIM needs to
RANGE, set the status of PRIMARY_VALUE to be set to “Enable.”
Uncertain-Sensor Conversion not Accurate.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Procedure for automatic adjustment Diagnosis of adjustment results:
The procedure for automatic adjustment is as
When the amount of zero adjustment or span
follows:
adjustment exceeds any of the following adjustment
(1) Change the Block mode
limits, “AL-50: Adjustment range error for pressure/
Set MODE_BLK to O/S. differential pressure” is displayed.
The conditions for zero/span adjustment are as
(2) Enter zero% pressure follows:
Apply the actual zero% pressure to EJX.
<1> The point of zero adjustment is within
±10% of the capsule range.
(3) Perform zero adjustment <2> The amount of zero adjustment is within
When the value of the applied pressure is written to ±10% of the capsule range.
CAL_POINT_LO, EJX calculates the amount of <3> The point of span adjustment is within the
adjustment for zero adjustment. The calculated amount capsule range.
of adjustment is incorporated into CAL_DEVIATION_LO. <4> The input and output gradients after span
adjustment are within ±10% of the gradient at
(4) Input pressure for span adjustment factory setting.
For span adjustment, apply the actual 100% pressure to
6.3.4 Functions Relating to Static
EJX.
Pressure
(5) Performance of span adjustment

The static pressure measurement function is unique
When the value of the applied pressure is written to to differential pressure transmitters. The pressure
CAL_POINT_HI, EJX calculates the amount of transmitter does not have this function.
adjustment for span adjustment. The calculated amount
of adjustment is incorporated into CAL_DEVIATION_HI. Reference to static pressure value:
In SECONDARY_VALUE and TERTIARY_VALUE,
(6) Change the operation mode it is possible to refer to the H-side static pressure
Set MODE_BLK to AUTO for normal operation. value and the L-side static pressure value,
F0602.ai respectively. The update period of these values is
Calculated Value Calculated Value 100 msec. The pressure unit is selected by XD_
After zero adjustment
Span adjustment SCALE.unit in the AI block, in which SECONDARY_
point
VALUE and TERTIARY_VALUE are selected. The
After zero status is normally Good-Non Specific. However, in
adjustment
0 0 the case of a sensor failure or out of measurement
Input pressure Input pressure
range, it turns to Bad or Uncertain. For specifics,
Before zero
adjustment After zero/span refer to Table 8.9.
adjustment
F0603.ai
Setting of signal damping for static pressure:
SP_VALUE_FTIME is parameter that set signal
CAUTION damping for static pressure signals. The unit of the
Span adjustment is a function for adjusting signal damping is second.
the gradient with respect to the point of zero
adjustment. If that point is not zero, the gradient
of input and output values cannot be accurately
adjusted. Perform span adjustment after zero
adjustment is completed.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Determination of the range limit of static 6.3.5 Functions Relating to Capsule and
pressure signal: Amplifier Temperature
When the static pressure signal exceeds the
Reference to capsule and amplifier temperature
maximum working pressure (MWP) of the capsule,
value:
set the status of PRIMARY_VALUE to Uncertain-
Subnormal. Also, set the status of SECONDARY_ In CAP_TEMP_VAL and AMP_TEMP_VAL, it
VALUE and TERTIARY_VALUE to Uncertain- is possible to refer to the capsule and amplifier
Sensor Conversion not Accurate. The status under temperature value and status. The update period
normal conditions is Good-Non Specific. of this value is about 1 second. The temperature
unit is selected by XD_SCALE.unit of the AI block,
Adjustment of static pressure signal: in which CAP_TEMP_VAL is selected. The status
The zero/span adjustment function can be used is normally Good-Non Specific. However, in the
for static signals, as in the case of pressure case of sensor failure or out of measurement range,
/differential pressure signals. However, the zero- it turns to Bad or Uncertain. For specifics, refer to
point adjustment by the external screw function is Table 8.9.
not supported for static pressure signal.
Determination of the range limit of capsule
Automatic adjustment temperature:
The value of the static pressure exerted on the
The range of capsule temperature is from –40 to
point where adjustment is to be made is assigned
120°C. When the measured capsule temperature
to parameters (CAL_SP_POINT_LO, CAL_SP_
deviates from –50 to 130°C range, set the status of
POINT_HI). After this assignment is set, the amount
CAP_TEMP_VAL to Uncertain-Sensor Conversion
of adjustment is calculated by the transmitter and
not Accurate. The status under normal conditions
automatically updated. The procedure for adjusting
is Good-Non Specific. Also, set the status of
the static pressure signal is the same as that of
PRIMARY_VALUE, SECONDARY_VALUE and
pressure/differential pressure signal.
TERTIARY_VALUE TO Uncertain-Subnormal.
Manual adjustment
From the exerted pressure and the output of the Determination of the range limit of amplifier
transmitter, calculate the amount of zero/span temperature:
adjustment manually and assign the calculated The range of amplifier temperature is from –40 to
value to parameters (CAL_SP_DEVIATION_LO, 120°C. When the measured amplifier temperature
CAL_SP_DEVIATION_HI). deviates from –50 to 95°C range, set the status of
AMP_TEMP_VAL to Uncertain-Sensor Conversion
Selection of static pressure signal type:
not Accurate. The status under normal conditions is
Differential pressure transmitters measure the Good-Non Specific.
absolute static pressure. Based on the assumption
that atmospheric pressure is constant, these
transmitters can output signal equivalent to gauge
pressure calculated by deducting the atmospheric
pressure (fixed value) from the measured absolute
pressure. The type of static pressure signal output
to SECONDARY_VALUE and TERTIARY_VALUE
is selected in SP_VALUE_TYPE. SP_VALUE_
TYPE allows selection of gauge pressure or
absolute pressure. When selecting gauge pressure,
set the value of the atmospheric pressure (fixed
value) to ATM_PRESS. The default value of
ATM_PRESS is equal to the value of standard
atmospheric pressure (101.325 kPa).
IM 01C25T02-01E
6.3.6 BLOCK_ERR 6.4.3 Display Contents of the Integral
Indicator
BLOCK_ERR presents the cause of an error in the
block. The SENSOR transducer block checks the The components of the integral indicator are the bar
following causes and sets the relevant bits. graph, the title field, the center field for numerical
values, the lower text field, and auxiliary characters.
BLOCK_ERR
The contents and meanings of these components
Bit Error Cause are as follows:
0 other Pressure sensor failure,
Temperature sensor failure, 40.000
Electronic circuit failure,
Differential pressure adjusted
by zero/span adjustment out
of measurement range, Static
pressure adjusted by zero/span
adjustment out of measurement
37.000
range
15 Out-of-Service MODE_BLK.Target is O/S
6.3.7 XD_ERROR
F0604.ai
XD_ERROR is a parameter that contains codes
Figure 6.2 Screen Display of the integral indicator
for the most significant errors that can occur in
the SENSOR transducer block. The errors of XD_
Component
ERROR supported by transmitter and their causes name
Contents
are presented in the table below. When multiple Bar graph Shows the value displayed in the center
errors occur and their error codes are different, the field for numerical values scaled in terms
error of greater importance is stored and shown of percentage.
first. Center field Presents values of inputs and outputs.
for numerical While the alarm is on, the alarm number
values alternates with the displayed value here.
XD_ERROR (order of importance) Lower text Displays tag, parameter name, unit, and
field signal status. While the alarm is on, the
Bit Error Cause
alarm contents alternate.
22 I/O Failure An I/O failure has occurred. Title field Depicts the type of the value displayed
20 Electronics An electronic component has on the center field for numerical value.
Failure failed. P Flashes when pressure/
15 Out of Service Sensor TB is in O/S mode. differential pressure is
18 Calibration An error occurred during displayed.
error calibration or a calibration error SP Flashes when static pressure is
has been detected. displayed.
T Flashes when temperature is
displayed.
6.4 LCD Transducer Block Auxiliary % Flashes when the center field
characters for numerical values displays a
% value.
6.4.1 Outline of the Functions
Flashes when square root
The LCD transducer block controls alarms and display is selected.
measured values that are displayed on the integral Key Flashes when Write Protect is
mark selected.
indicator. It displays not only OUT signals from the
×10, Used when the calculated value
AI blocks, but also I/O signals of the Installed blocks ×100, displayed in the center field for
on the integral indicator. ×1000 numerical values is rounded.
6.4.2 Block Mode

The Block modes permitted for the LCD transducer
block are Automatic (Auto) and Out of Service (O/
S). Settings can be changed in the AUTO mode for
this block, except the Block tag parameter.
IM 01C25T02-01E
6.4.4 Example Displays of the Integral Indicator
Example display of AI1 OUT and PID FF_VAL, respectively
Display of
AI1 OUT
(1) Pressure Value (2) Pressure Value (3) Pressure Value (4) Pressure Value
Block tag Parameter name Unit Status
Display of
PID FF_VAL
(5) Pressure Value (6) Pressure Value (7) Pressure Value (8) Pressure Value
Block tag Parameter name Unit Status
F0605.ai
Example display during mechanical failure alarm
Alarm number and

Error Massage (Capsule error) F0606.ai
IM 01C25T02-01E
6.4.5 Procedure to Set the Built-in Display
Select from Parameter Displays (1-4) Specify whether DISPLAY1, DISPLAY2,

(DISPLAY_SEL) DISPLAY3, or DISPLAY4 should be displayed.
Select items to be displayed in the lower Specify whether tag, parameter, unit, or status
text field (INFO_SEL) should be displayed.
Specify parameters to be displayed Select parameters to be displayed from

(PARAMETER_SEL) PARAMETER_SEL listed in Table 6.1.
Set the display contents for the block tag to be

displayed in the lower text field Written as by 6 characters or 6 characters plus “/”,“.”.(*1)
(DISPLAY_TAG)
Select whether the unit to be displayed in the The display selected by

lower text field should be set to DISPLAY_SEL needs to
automatic or on a customized basis be set
(UNIT_SEL)
CUSTOM is
selected
Set the display contents
AUTO is
of the unit Written as by 6 characters or 6 characters plus “/”,“.”.(*1)
selected (DISPLAY_UNIT)
Example display of exponent setting:
The LCD value for exponent setting when the actual pressure
value is 23.4568 kPa and the decimal point selected is 2.
Set an exponent (EXP_MODE)
Corresponding Exponent LCD value
decimal point (kPa)
2 Engineering Unit 23.46
Perform ON/OFF setting of the bar graph 2 Eng. Unit @ 1/10 2.35
(BAR_GRAPH_SELECT) 2 Eng. Unit @ 1/100 0.23
2 Eng. Unit @ 1/1000 0.02
Set the display period Time unit: 400ms; When the valve set is “7”, the same
(DISPLAY_CYCLE) display continues for about 2.8 seconds.
F0607.ai
Figure 6.3 Procedures to Set the Built-in Display
*1: Combination of up to 6 characters of alphanumeric and the symbols of [/], [.] and [ ] (space) are available.
If the other characters are specified, space will be displayed.
The symbols of [/] and [.] cannot be specified on the head of a string.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Table 6.1 Parameters to be displayed on LCD
Block Name Parameter PARAMETER_SEL Display
SENSOR TRANSDUCER PRIMARY_VALUE PRIMARY VALUE PV
SECONDARY_VALUE SECONDARY VALUE SP.HI
TERTIARY_VALUE TERTIARY VALUE SP.LO
CAP_TEMP_VAL CAP TEMP VALUE CAP.TMP
AMP_TEMP_VAL AMP TEMP VALUE AMP.TMP
FLG_TEMP_VAL* FLG TEMP VALUE FLG.TMP
AI1 PV AI1 PV PV
OUT AI1 OUT OUT
FIELD_VAL AI1 FIELD VAL FLD.VAL
AI2 PV AI2 PV PV
OUT AI2 OUT OUT
AI3 PV AI3 PV PV
OUT AI3 OUT OUT
PID SP PID SP SP
PV PID PV PV
OUT PID OUT OUT
IN PID IN IN
CAS_IN PID CAS IN CAS.IN
BKCAL_IN PID BKCAL IN BKC.IN
BKCAL_OUT PID BKCAL OUT BKC.OUT
RCAS_IN PID RCAS IN RCAS.IN
ROUT_IN PID ROUT IN ROUT.IN
RCAS_OUT PID RCAS OUT RCA.OUT
ROUT_OUT PID ROUT OUT ROU.OUT
FF_VAL PID FF VAL FF.VAL
TRK_VAL PID TRK VAL TRK.VAL
AR OUT AR OUT OUT
IN AR IN IN
IN.LO AR IN LO IN.LO
IN1 AR IN 1 IN1
IN2 AR IN 2 IN2
IN3 AR IN 3 IN3
IT OUT IT OUT OUT
IN1 IT IN 1 IN1
IN2 IT IN 2 IN2
SC OUT_1 SC OUT 1 OUT_1
OUT_2 SC OUT 2 OUT_2
IN_1 SC IN 1 IN1
IN_2 SC IN 2 IN2
IS OUT IS OUT OUT
IN_1 IS IN 1 IN1
IN_2 IS IN 2 IN2
IN_3 IS IN 3 IN3
IN_4 IS IN 4 IN4
IN_5 IS IN 5 IN5
IN_6 IS IN 6 IN6
IN_7 IS IN 7 IN7
IN_8 IS IN 8 IN8
*: The flange temperature is not calculated without option code /DG1, so 0 is displayed.
IM 01C25T02-01E
6.4.6 Units That Can Be Displayed on the Index Unit Display
LCD by the Automatic Link Function 1140 atm atm
1141 psi psi
Index Unit Display
1142 psia psia
1000 K Kelvin
1143 psig psig
1001 °C degC
1002 °F degF 1144 g/cm2 g/cm2
1010* m m 1145 kg/cm2 kg/cm2
1011* km km 1146 inH2O inH2O
1012* cm cm 1147 inH2O (4°C) inH2O
1013* mm mm 1148 inH2O (68°F) inH2O
1018* ft ft 1149 mmH2O mmH2O
1019* in in 1150 mmH2O (4°C) mmH2O
1020* yd yd 1151 mmH2O (68°F) mmH2O
1034* m3 m3 1152 ftH2O ftH2O
1035* dm3 dm3 1153 ftH2O (4°C) ftH2O
1036* cm3 cm3 1154 ftH2O (68°F) ftH2O
1037* mm3 mm3 1155 inHg inHg
1038* L L 1156 inHg (0°C) inHg
1039* cl cl 1157 mmHg mmHg
1040* ml ml 1158 mmHg (0°C) mmHg
1041* hl hl 1318* g/s g/s
1042* in3 in3 1319* g/min g/min
1043* ft3 ft3 1320* g/h g/h
1044* yd3 yd3 1321* g/d g/d
1045* mile3 mile3 1322* kg/s kg/s
1046* pint pint 1323* kg/min kg/min
1047* quart quart 1324* kg/h kg/h
1048* gallon gallon 1325* kg/d kg/d
1049* ImpGal ImpGal 1326* t/s t/s
1050* bushel bushel 1327* t/min t/min
1051* bbl bbl 1328* t/h t/h
1052* bbl(liq) bblliq 1329* t/d t/d
1088* kg kg 1330* lb/s lb/s
1089* g g 1331* lb/min lb/min
1090* mg mg 1332* lb/h lb/h
1091* Mg Mg 1333* lb/d lb/d
1092* t t 1334* STon/s STon/s
1094* lb lb 1335* STon/min STon/mi
1097* kg/cm3 kg/cm3 1336* STon/h STon/h
1100* g/cm3 g/cm3 1337* STon/d STon/d
1101* g/m3 g/m3 1338* LTon/s LTon/s
1103* kg/L kg/L 1339* LTon/min LTon/mi
1104* g/ml g/ml 1340* LTon/h LTon/h
1105* g/L g/L 1341* LTon/d LTon/d
1130 Pa Pa 1342 % %
1131 GPa GPa 1347* m3/s m3/s
1132 MPa MPa 1348* m3/min m3/min
1133 kPa kPa 1349* m3/h m3/h
1134 mPa mPa 1350* m3/d m3/d
1135 µPa uPa 1351* L/s L/s
1136 hPa hPa 1352* L/min L/min
1137 bar bar 1353* L/h L/h
1138 mbar mbar 1354* L/d L/d
1139 torr torr 1355* ML/d ML/d
*: Available for software revision (SOFT_REV) R5.05 or later. 1356* CFS CFS
*: Available for software revision (SOFT_REV) R5.05 or later.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Index Unit Display Index Unit Display
1357* CFM CFM 1504* mm3/h mm3/h
1358* CFH CFH 1505* km3/h km3/h
1359* ft3/d ft3/d 1506* Mm3/h Mm3/h
1360* SCFM SCFM 1507* µm3/d um3/d
1361* SCFH SCFH 1508* mm3/d mm3/d
1362* gal/s gal/s 1509* km3/d km3/d
1363* GPM GPM 1510* Mm3/d Mm3/d
1364* gal/h gal/h 1511* cm3/s cm3/s
1365* gal/d gal/d 1512* cm3/min cm3/min
1366* Mgal/d Mgal/d 1513* cm3/h cm3/h
1371* bbl/s bbl/s 1514* cm3/d cm3/d
1372* bbl/min bbl/min 1517* kL kL
1373* bbl/h bbl/h 1518* kL/min kL/min
1374* bbl/d bbl/d 1519* kL/h kL/h
1448* µgal/s ugal/s 1520* kL/d kL/d
1449* mgal/s mgal/s 1522* Nm3/s Nm3/s
1450* kgal/s kgal/s 1523* Nm3/min Nm3/min
1451* Mgal/s Mgal/s 1524* Nm3/h Nm3/h
1452* µgal/min ugal/mi 1525* Nm3/d Nm3/d
1453* mgal/min mgal/mi 1527* Sm3/s Sm3/s
1454* kgal/min kgal/mi 1528* Sm3/min Sm3/min
1455* Mgal/min Mgal/mi 1529* Sm3/h Sm3/h
1456* μgal/h ugal/h 1530* Sm3/d Sm3/d
1457* mgal/h mgal/h 1532* NL/s NL/s
1458* kgal/h kgal/h 1533* NL/min NL/min
1459* Mgal/h Mgal/h 1534* NL/h NL/h
1460* µgal/d ugal/d 1535* NL/d NL/d
1461* mgal/d mgal/d 1537* SL/s SL/s
1462* kgal/d kgal/d 1538* SL/min SL/min
1479* µbbl/s ubbl/s 1539* SL/h SL/h
1480* mbbl/s mbbl/s 1540* SL/d SL/d
1481* kbbl/s kbbl/s 1541 Paa Paa
1482* Mbbl/s Mbbl/s 1542 Pag Pag
1483* µbbl/min ubbl/mi 1543 GPaa GPaa
1484* mbbl/min mbbl/mi 1544 GPag GPag
1485* kbbl/min kbbl/mi 1545 MPaa MPaa
1486* Mbbl/min Mbbl/mi 1546 MPag MPag
1487* µbbl/h ubbl/h 1547 kPaa kPaa
1488* mbbl/h mbbl/h 1548 kPag kPag
1489* kbbl/h kbbl/h 1549 mPaa mPaa
1490* Mbbl/h Mbbl/h 1550 mPag mPag
1491* µbbl/d ubbl/d 1551 µPaa uPaa
1492* mbbl/d mbbl/d 1552 µPag uPag
1493* kbbl/d kbbl/d 1553 hPaa hPaa
1494* Mbbl/d Mbbl/d 1554 hPag hPag
1495* µm3/s um3/s 1555 g/cm2a g/cm2a
1496* mm3/s mm3/s 1556 g/cm2g g/cm2g
1497* km3/s km3/s 1557 kg/cm2a kg/cm2a
1498* Mm3/s Mm3/s 1558 kg/cm2g kg/cm2g
1499* µm3/min um3/min 1559 inH2Oa inH2Oa
1500* mm3/min mm3/min 1560 inH2Og inH2Og
1501* km3/min km3/min 1561 inH2Oa(4°C) inH2Oa
1502* Mm3/min Mm3/min 1562 inH2Og(4°C) inH2Og
1503* µm3/h um3/h 1563 inH2Oa(68°F) inH2Oa
*: Available for software revision (SOFT_REV) R5.05 or later. *: Available for software revision (SOFT_REV) R5.05 or later.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Index Unit Display
1564 inH2Og(68°F) inH2Og
1565 mmH2Oa mmH2Oa
1566 mmH2Og mmH2Og
1567 mmH2Oa(4°C) mmH2Oa
1568 mmH2Og(4°C) mmH2Og
1569 mmH2Oa(68°F) mmH2Oa
1570 mmH2Og(68°F) mmH2Og
1571 ftH2Oa ftH2Oa
1572 ftH2Og ftH2Og
1573 ftH2Oa(4°C) ftH2Oa
1574 ftH2Og(4°C) ftH2Og
1575 ftH2Oa(68°F) ftH2Oa
1576 ftH2Og(68°F) ftH2Og
1577 inHga inHga
1578 inHgg inHgg
1579 inHga(0°C) inHga
1580 inHgg(0°C) inHgg
1581 mmHga mmHga
1582 mmHgg mmHgg
1583 mmHga(0°C) mmHga
1584 mmHgg(0°C) mmHgg
1588 No unit
1589 ml/min ml/min
1590 Barg Barg
1591 mBarg mBarg
1597 Bara Bara
1598* MSCFD MSCFD
1599* MMSCFD MMSCFD
1600* MLB/H MLB/H
1617* Ml/h Ml/h
1618* Ml/min Ml/min
1619* kL/s kL/s
1620* kft3/d kft3/d
1621* kCFH kCFH
1622* kCFM kCFM
1623* kCFS kCFS
1624* mft3/d mft3/d
1625* mCFH mCFH
1626* mCFM mCFM
1627* mCFS mCFS
1645* Ml Ml
1646* mBara mBara
*: Available for software revision (SOFT_REV) R5.05 or later.
IM 01C25T02-01E
6.5 AI Function Block 6.5.3 IO_OPTS
The AI function block is a unit of the software and IO_OPTS is a parameter used to select whether
executed according to the system schedule. During options regarding input and output signals should
execution, it incorporates data from the SENSOR be enabled or disabled. In the case of the AI
transducer block. After execution, it updates analog function block, the only available option is “Low
outputs and processes newly generated alarms. AI cutoff”. When enabling the low cut function for
function blocks can provide a discrete output which outputs, set this option.
shows the status of LO, LO_LO, HI, or HI_HI. In
terms of function, there is no difference between the 6.5.4 STATUS_OPTS
three AI function blocks provided in EJX. STATUS_OPTS is a parameter to select options
regarding the status of signals. The AI function
6.5.1 Function Blocks block offers four options: Propagate Fault Forward,
The AI function block, via the Channel, incorporates Uncertain if Limited, BAD if Limited, and Uncertain if
analog signals from the transducer block, performs Man mode.
scaling processing, filtering, low-cut, and alarm Propagate Fault Forward
processing before outputting. It has the function to If the status from the sensor is Bad, Device failure
generate a discrete output. Figure 6.4 presents the or Bad, Sensor failure, propagate it to OUT without
AI function block. generating an alarm. The use of these sub-statuses
in OUT is determined by this option. Through this
6.5.2 Block Mode option, the user may determine whether alarming
The Block modes permitted for the AI function (sending of an alert) will be done by the block or
block are Automatic (Auto), Manual (Man), and propagated downstream for alarming
Out of Service (O/S). When the Block mode of RB
Uncertain if Man mode
(Resource Block) is Out of Service (O/S), Actual
When the “Uncertain if Man” is enabled and the
is Out of Service (O/S) even if Automatic (Auto) or
Actual mode is Man, the OUT signal status should
Manual (Man) is written to Target.
be “Uncertain”.
OUT_D_SEL
Simulate Simulate
Alarms
SIMULATE. SIMULATE.
LO, LO_LO OUT_D
Transducer Value Simulate Value
IO_OPTS.Low cutoff HI, HI_HI
Disable Enable
SIMULATE.Enable
L_TYPE PV.Value
FIELD_VAL.Value
Ind.Sqr Root =1(Enable) Auto
Scaling /100 Cutoff OUT

Scaling Filter
XD_SCALE /100 OUT_SCALE PV_FTIME LOW_CUT
Indirect
Direct
=0(Disable)
MODE_BLK.Actual
F0608.ai
Figure 6.4 Diagram of the AI Functional Block
IM 01C25T02-01E
6.5.5 OUT_D
OUT_D.value is “1” when the alarms selected by OUT_D_SEL occur.
OUT_D.status is linked OUT.status. OUT_D.value can be written the value form 0 to 15 when block mode is
O/S or MAN mode. The OUT_D_SEL options are shown below.
High High Alarm (1):
OUT_D.value will be “1” when HI_HI alarm occurs.
High Alarm (2):
OUT_D.value will be “1” when HI alarm occurs.
Low Low Alarm (4):
OUT_D.value will be “1” when LO_LO alarm occurs.
Low Alarm (8):
OUT_D.value will be “1” when LO alarm occurs.
ALARM_OPTS=HI_HI | HI | LO_LO
(A case of HI_HI, HI and LO_LO options are selected)
HI_HI_LIM
HI_LIM
OUT_D.value = 0
LO_LO_
LIM
OUT_D.value = 1 OUT_D.value = 1 OUT_D.value = 1 OUT_D.value = 1
F0609.ai
Figure 6.5 An Example of OUT_D.value
6.5.6 Basic Parameters of the AI Block.

Parameter Outline
OUT Shows output value and status. When the Block mode is Man and O/S, the value is held.
SIMULATE Used for simulation. It sets the value and status arbitrarily from the transducer. Use this parameter for
loop checking. Refer to 7.3 Simulation Function.
XD_SCALE Sets the range of inputs from the transducer block that corresponds to 0% and 100% in the AI function
block. Also sets the unit of the range, inputs values that correspond to 0% and 100%, and four decimal
values.
OUT_SCALE Sets the range, unit, and digit of the output scale.
CHANNEL Selects the signal which is calculated in SENSOR Transducer Block. The relation between the signals
and channels are shown below;
Channel 1: PRIMARY_VALUE (pressure/differential pressure)
Channel 2: SECONDARY_VALUE (H-side static pressure)
Channel 3: TERTIARY_VALUE (L-side static pressure)
Channel 4: CAP_TEMP_VAL (capsule temperature)
Channel 5: AMP_TEMP_VAL (amplifier temperature)
Channel 6: FLG_TEMP_VAL (flange temperature for Heat trace monitoring)
L_TYPE The operation function of the AI function block can be selected from Direct, Indirect Linear, or Indirect
SQRT:
Direct: The Signal from the transducer block is directly output by filtering only, but without scaling or
square root extraction.
Indirect Linear: Values scaled according to the range settings of XD_SCALE and OUT_SCALE are
output.
Indirect SQRT: Values are scaled according to the range settings of XD_SCALE, square root extraction
is performed for them, and then the values are scaled according to the range setting of OUT_SCALE
before being output.
LOW_CUT As for low-cut settings of the output signal (LOW_CUT), the output is made to 0 if the output goes below
the low-cut setpoint.
To enable the low-cut function, the “Low cutoff” option should be enabled with IO_OPTS.
However, when the status returns from the low-cut state to the normal state, hysteresis is waited.
When the L_TYPE setting of the output mode is direct, the hysteresis width is 1% of XD_SCALE, and
otherwise, the width is 1% of OUT_SCALE.
IM 01C25T02-01E
<7. In-Process Operation> 7-1
7. In-Process Operation
This chapter describes the procedure performed 7.2.2 Alarms and Events
when changing the operation of the function block
The following alarms or events can be reported by
of the transmitter in process.
the transmitter if Link object and VCR static entry
are set.
7.1 Mode Transition Analog Alerts (Generated when a process value
When the function block mode is changed to exceeds threshold)
Out_Of_Service, the function block pauses and a By AI Block Hi-Hi, Hi, Low, and Low-Low
block alarm is issued. Alarm
By PID Block Hi-Hi, Hi, Low, Low-Low,
When the function block mode is changed to Deviation-Hi, and Deviation-Low Alarm
Manual, the function block suspends updating of Discret Alerts (Generated when an abnormal
output values. In this case alone, it is possible to condition is detected)
write a value to the OUT parameter of the block By Resource Block Block Alarm, Write Alarm
for output. Note that no parameter status can be By Transducer Block Block Alarm
changed. Diagnostic Alarm (when /DG1 is specified)
By AI, SC, IT, IS, AR and PID Blocks
7.2 Generation of Alarm Block Alarm
Update Alerts (Generated when an important
7.2.1 Indication of Alarm (restorable) parameter is updated)
By Resource Block Update Event
When the self-diagnostics function indicates that a By Transducer Block Update Event
device is faulty, an alarm (device alarm) is issued By AI, SC, IT, IS, AR and PID Blocks
from the resource block. When an error (block Update Event
error) is detected in each function block or an error Field Diagnostic Alerts (Generated when an
in the process value (process alarm) is detected, an abnormal condition in field device is detected)
alarm is issued from each block. If an LCD indicator By Resource Block Check Alarm, Failure
is installed, the error number is displayed as AL.XX. Alarm, Maintenance Alarm, and off
If two or more alarms are issued, multiple error specification Alarm.
numbers are displayed.
For details of ALARM, refer to Section 8.2. An alert has following structure:
F0701.ai
Figure 7.1 Error Identification on Indicator
IM 01C25T02-01E
Table 7.1 Alert Object 7.2.3 Standard categories for NAMUR NE-
Subindex 107 instrument diagnostics alarms
Diagnostic Alert
Discrete Alert
The following standard categories of instrument
Analog Alert
Update Alert
Parameter
Explanation diagnostics are defined for the NAMUR NE-107.
Name
Field
F (Failed):
An alarm category that indicates a failure has
1 1 1 1 Block Index of block from
Index which alert is generated occurred in the instrument or in its peripheral
2 2 2 2 Alert Key Alert Key copied from devices.
the block C (Check Function):
3 3 3 3 Standard Type of the alert An alarm category that indicates that a detected
Type failure is a temporary event.
4 4 4 4 Mfr Type Alert Name identified by
S (Off Specification):
manufacturer specific
DD An alarm category that indicates that the
5 5 5 5 Message Reason of alert detected failure was caused by the
Type notification instrument being used outside of its range
6 6 6 6 Priority Priority of the alarm or because a discrepancy has occurred
7 7 7 7 Time Time when this alert is between the set value and measured
Stamp first detected
value. The alarm was caused either by the
8 8 8 Subcode Enumerated cause of
this alert instrument or process state.
9 9 9 Value Value of referenced data M (Maintenance):
10 10 10 Relative Relative index of An alarm category for a detected failure that
Index referenced data has a low level of urgency but is a failure
8 Static Value of static revision that could develop into a problem causing
Revision (ST_REV) of the block
restrictions in instrument functionality in
11 11 9 Unit Index Unit code of referenced
data some environments.
11 Source Index of the block that
Block triggered the alert Alarms displayed by DEVICE_STATUS_1 to
Index DEVICE_STATUS_8 resource block parameters in
their default setting are categorized as described
in “NAMUR NE-107 Alarm Categories” in the
DEVICE_STATUS table in section 8.1. When an
alarm occurs, a character string that corresponds
to an alarm category is assigned to FD_*_ACTIVE
(index 1067 to 1070) [* indicates FAIL, OFF SPEC,
MAINT or CHECK]. (For example, an F category
alarm is assigned to FD_FAIL_ACTIVE) Similarly,
procedures for processing alarms are assigned
to FD_RECOMMEN_ACT. For details on alarm
displays and how to deal with them, refer to Table
7.2.
The DTM-based “Field Diagnostics” function on
FieldMate R2.06 or later makes configuration or
checking of alarm classified on NE-107 easier.
For the detailed usage of “Field Diagnostics”
function, refer to FieldMate user’s manual: IM
01R01A15-01EN.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Table7.2 Field Diagnostic Alert
Indication of FD_*_ACTIVE Indication of FD_RECOMMEN_ACT Solution
Electronics failure Repair electronics Replace electrical parts e.g. amplifier.
Or contact sales office or service center.
Sensor/Actuator failure Repair Sensor/Actuator Replace mechanics e.g. sensor or
actuator. Or contact sales office or service
center.
Potential failure Investigate failure Perform reconfiguration, cleaning, wiring/
connector or electrical board check.
If alarm still persists, contact sales office or
service center.
Backup function in operation Repair primary side Repair primary sensor before backup
sensor fails.
Firmware update error Retry updating firmware Retry firmware update. Check cause of the
failure if alarm persists.
Communication configuration error Configure communication correctly Correct configuration of communication.
Non-operating-state Wait for a while Wait for a while. Check cause of the failure
if alarm persists.
Calibration warning Check calibration Investigate cause of failure and recalibrate
device.
Device configuration error Configure device correctly Correct configuration relating to sensor or
actuator.
Function restricted Confirm the state Check if this is right state.
Simulation mode Confirm the state Check if this is right state.
Manual mode Confirm the state Check if this is right state.
Function Block notice Check Function Block status Check conditions of function blocks. In
order to avoid alarm from unused function
blocks, configure RESOURCE2.FD_
EXTENDC_MAP_n (n: 1 to 3) parameter.
Sensor/Actuator out of range Check specification Check specification of sensor and
actuator. Or process conditions may be
temporarily non-conforming.
Out of operating limit Check environment Check environment specification of sensor
and actuator. Or process environment may
be temporarily non-conforming.
Temporal decrease of value quality Check process or peripherals Check process and peripherals conditions.
Deterioration estimated by Time Check deterioration Check if maintenance is required.
Based Maintenance
Deterioration estimated by Check deterioration Check if maintenance is required.
Condition Based Maintenance
Impulse Line Blockage Detected Check process and impulse line 1.Check process and impulse line
condition condition.
2.If there are large flow change or the
change of fluid under the measured
process conditions, obtain the
reference value again.(Please follow
the operation procedure in User
Manual)
Heat Trace Warning Detected Check the heater failure 1.Check the heater failure.
2.Check the capsule temp. and Amplifier
temp.
3.Adjust Flg Temp Coef(STB.FLG_
TEMP_COEF).
Optional function configuration error Check optional configuration Check configuration of optional functions.
Alarm related information Confirm information Check the alarm related information.
Process alarm Check process Check process conditions.
CHECK CHECK Check both modes for the SENSOR and
LCD transducer blocks are AUTO.
IM 01C25T02-01E
7.3 Simulation Function The FD_SIMULATE parameter of Resource block
consists of the elements listed in Table 7.4 below.
The simulation function simulates the input of a
function block and lets it operate as if the data was Table 7.4 FD_SIMULATE parameter
received from the transducer block. It is possible to
Subindex Parameters Description
conduct testing for the downstream function blocks
1 Diagnostic Sets the alarm bit to be
or alarm processes. Simulate Value simulated.
When the Sub-index3:
A SIMULATE_ENABLE switch is mounted in
Enable is being Disable,
the transmitter amplifier. This is to prevent the the value of Sub-index2:
accidental operation of this function. When this is Diagnostic Value is
switched on, simulation is enabled. (See Figure shown here.
7.2.) To initiate the same action from a remote 2 Diagnostic Value This parameter always
shows the actual
terminal, if REMOTE LOOP TEST SWITCH is diagnostic status of the
written to the SIM_ENABLE_MSG parameter device instead of the
(index 1044) of the resource block, the resulting simulated diagnostic
alarm.
action is the same as is taken when the above
3 Simulate En/ Control the simulation
switch is on. In simulation enabled status, an alarm Disable function.
is generated from the resource block, and other 1: Disable simulation
device alarms will be masked; for this reason the (default setting)
2. Enable simulation
simulation must be disabled immediately after using
this function. When setting “2” to Simulate En/Disable parameter
(as of Table 7.4) while the simulation function is
The SIMULATE parameter of AI block consists of
enabled by SIMULATE_ENABLE switch or using
the elements listed in Table 7.3 below.
SIM_ENABLE_MSG of Resource Block, an alarm
bit set in the Diagnostic Simulate Value parameter
Table 7.3 SIMULATE Parameter
is generated. With using this function, it is possible
Subindex Parameters Description to confirm if a diagnostic alarm from the device is
1 Simulate Status Sets the data status to
generated as intended.
be simulated.
2 Simulate Value Sets the value of the
data to be simulated. Amplifier Assembly
3 Transducer Status Displays the data status
from the transducer
block. It cannot be
changed.
4 Transducer Value Displays the data value
from the transducer
block.It cannot be
changed.
5 Simulate Controls the simulation
En/Disable function of this block.
1: Simulation disabled
(standard) SIMULATE_ENABLE
2: Simulation started
1 O "OFF" during operation
N
When Simulate En/Disable in Table 7.3 above is 2 Write lock switch
F0702.ai
set to 2, the applicable function block uses the
Figure 7.2 SIMULATE_ENABLE Switch Position
simulation value set in this parameter instead of
the data from the transducer block. This setting can
be used for propagation of the status to the trailing
blocks, generation of a process alarm, and as an
operation test for trailing blocks.
IM 01C25T02-01E
7.4 Write lock (Write-protect) Table 7.6 FEATURE_SEL, write lock switch and
WRITE_LOCK parameter relationship
function FEATURE_SEL
The transmitter is provided with a write lock (write- (index 1018)
Write
protect) function to restrict write operations to Hard Soft WRITE_LOCK
lock
W W (index 1034)
blocks and prevent inadvertent writing of parameter switch
Lock Lock
data. To enable this function, use the write lock (bit4) (bit3)
switch (Hard W Lock) or the WRITE_LOCK (index
Unavailable
1034) (Soft W Lock). 0
(OFF) (“1” (Write lock
The CPU assembly of the transmitter is provided
0 disabled))
with a write lock switch (switch 2 in Figure 7.3). Disabled
(OFF) 1 (Write lock disabled)
Setting switch 2 to On activates the write lock
1 (ON) (Factory default)
function, to prevent changes to block parameters
of WRITE_LOCK_LEVEL (index 1064). Table 7.5 2 (Write lock enabled)
shows how WRITE_LOCK_LEVEL relates to the Unavailable
0
block targeted by write lock. In the factory default 1 (ON)
(OFF)
Enabled (depends on write lock
setting, WRITE_LOCK_LEVEL is “2” (preventing switch)
writing to the transducer block, resource block and
* When “Hard W Lock” and “Soft W Lock” are both 1 (On), the
function block). To enable the switch lock function, “Hard W Lock” setting takes precedence and “Soft W Lock” is
set "Hard W Lock” (bit 4) of FEATURE_SEL (index automatically set to 0 (Off).
1018) to “1” (On). (The factory default for “Hard W
Lock” (bit 4) is “0” (Off).
Amplifier Assembly
Table 7.5 Relationship between WRITE_LOCK_

LEVEL and block targeted by write lock
WRITE_LOCK_
LEVEL Block targeted by Write lock
(index 1064)
All parameters for the transducer
block and FEATURE_SEL
0 and WRITE_LOCK_LEVEL
parameter settings for
FEATURE_SEL
1 All parameters for the transducer 1 O SIMULATE_ENABLE switch

block and resource block N
2 O "ON" : Write lock enable
All function block parameters N
2 (Factory default) in addition to WRITE_LOCK_ WRITE LOCK
F0703.ai
LEVEL “1”
Figure 7.3 Write lock Switch
3 MIB and VCR in addition to
WRITE_LOCK_LEVEL “2”
When the write lock switch is disabled, set 2

(enabled) for WRITE_LOCK (index 1034) of the
resource block to enable the write lock function. To
enable the write lock function using the WRITE_
LOCK setting, FEATURE_SEL (index 1018) of
the resource block must be returned to its factory
default. (In the factory default setting, “Hard W
Lock” (bit 4) is “0” (Off) and “Soft W Lock” (bit 3) is
“1” (On).
IM 01C25T02-01E
<8. Device Information> 8-1
8. Device Information
8.1 DEVICE STATUS Display
NAMUR
Hexadecimal Description NE-107
through DD
Device status for the transmitter are indicated by category
using parameter DEVICE_STATUS_1 to DEVICE_ 0x00000200 Link Obj. Link object 7, 23 or
7/23/39 Not 39 is not open C
STATUS_8 (index 1045 to 1052) in Resource Block. Open
0x00000100 Link Obj. Link object 8, 24 or
Table 8.1 Contents of DEVICE_STATUS_1 8/24/40 Not 40 is not open C
(index 1045) Open
NAMUR 0x00000080 Link Obj. 9/25 Link object 9 or 25
Display C
Hexadecimal Description NE-107 Not Open is not open
through DD
category 0x00000040 Link Obj. Link object 10 or 26
0x40000000 Write Writing to 10/26 Not is not open C
Unlocked parameters is — Open
Unlocked. 0x00000020 Link Obj. Link object 11 or 27
0x20000000 Hard Write Hardware write lock 11/27 Not is not open C
Lock SW switch is OFF. — Open
OFF 0x00000010 Link Obj. Link object 12 or 28
0x10000000 Write Locked Writing to 12/28 Not is not open C
parameters is — Open
locked. 0x00000008 Link Obj. Link object 13 or 29
0x08000000 Hard Write Hardware write lock 13/29 Not is not open C
— Open
Lock SW ON switch is ON.
0x04000000 Abnormal Abnormal boot 0x00000004 Link Obj. Link object 14 or 30
Boot Process processing was 14/30 Not is not open C
F Open
detected at the
starting. 0x00000002 Link Obj. Link object 15 or 31
0x02000000 SoftDL Software download 15/31 Not is not open C
C Open
Failure has failed.
0x01000000 SoftDL Software download 0x00000001 Link Obj. Link object 16 or 32
C 16/32 Not is not open C
Incomplete is incomplete.
Open
0x00800000 Simulation Software or
Switch ON hardware
—
simulation switch Table 8.2 Contents of DEVICE_STATUS_2
is ON. (index 1046)
0x00400000 RB in O/S Resource Block is
— NAMUR
mode (AL-40) in O/S mode. Display
0x00200000 Simulation Software or Hexadecimal Description NE-107
through DD
Switch OFF hardware category
— 0x80000000 Pressure
simulation switch Pressure sensor
is OFF. Sensor failed 1. F
0x00080000 Amp Amplifier EEPROM Failure 1
EEPROM failed. (AL-01)
F 0x40000000 Pressure
Failure (AL- Pressure sensor
02) Sensor failed 2. F
0x00008000 Link Obj. Link object 1, 17 or Failure 2
1/17/33 Not 33 is not open C (AL-01)
Open 0x20000000 Pressure Pressure sensor
0x00004000 Link Obj. Link object 2, 18 or Sensor failed 3. F
2/18/34 Not 34 is not open C Failure 3
Open (AL-01)
0x00002000 Link Obj. Link object 3, 19 or 0x10000000 Pressure Pressure sensor
3/19/35 Not 35 is not open C Sensor failed 4. F
Open Failure 4
(AL-01)
0x00001000 Link Obj. Link object 4, 20 or
4/20/36 Not 36 is not open C 0x08000000 Capsule Capsule temp
Open Temp Sensor sensor failed. F
Failure (AL-
0x00000800 Link Obj. Link object 5, 21 or 01)
5/21/37 Not 37 is not open C
Open 0x04000000 Capsule Capsule EEPROM
EEPROM failed 1.
0x00000400 Link Obj. Link object 6, 22 or F
Failure 1
6/22/38 Not 38 is not open C (AL-01)
Open
IM 01C25T02-01E
NAMUR Table 8.4 Contents of DEVICE_STATUS_4
Display (index 1048)
through DD
category
Display NAMUR
0x02000000 Capsule Capsule EEPROM Hexadecimal Description NE-107
EEPROM failed 2. through DD
F category
Failure 2
(AL-01) 0x80000000 AI1 Hi Hi Hi_Hi Alarm occurs
Alarm (AL- in AI1 Function —
0x00800000 Amp Temp Amplifier Temp block
30)
Sensor Sensor failed. F 0x40000000 Lo_Lo Alarm
Failure (AL- AI1 Lo Lo
02) Alarm (AL- occurs in AI1 —
0x00400000 Amp 30) Function block
Amplifier
EEPROM EEPROM failed 1. 0x20000000 AI2 Hi Hi Hi_Hi Alarm occurs
F
Failure 1 Alarm (AL- in AI2 Function —
(AL-02) 31) block
0x00200000 Amp Amplifier 0x10000000 Lo_Lo Alarm
AI2 Lo Lo
EEPROM EEPROM failed 2. occurs in AI2
F Alarm (AL- —
Failure 2 Function block
31)
(AL-02)
0x00100000 CPU Board 0x08000000 AI3 Hi Hi Hi_Hi Alarm occurs
CPU board failed
Failure 1 F Alarm (AL- in AI3 Function —
1.
(AL-02) 32) block
0x00080000 CPU Board CPU board failed 0x04000000 AI3 Lo Lo Lo_Lo Alarm
Failure 2 2. F Alarm (AL- occurs in AI3 —
(AL-02) 32) Function block
0x00040000 CPU Board CPU board failed 0x02000000 PID Hi Hi Hi_Hi Alarm occurs
Failure 3 3. F Alarm (AL- in PID Function —
(AL-02) 33) block
0x00020000 CPU Board CPU board failed 0x01000000 Lo_Lo Alarm
PID Lo Lo
Failure 4 4. F occurs in PID
Alarm (AL- —
(AL-02) Function block
33)
0x00010000 No Device ID No Device ID. F
0x00008000 RB in O/S Resource Block is
0x00008000 CPU Board CPU board failed Mode (AL- in O/S mode —
Failure 5 5. F 40)
(AL-02)
0x00004000 Sensor TB Sensor Transducer
in O/S Mode Block is in O/S C
(AL-41) mode.
Table 8.3 Contents of DEVICE_STATUS_3
0x00002000 LCD TB in LCD Transducer
(index 1047) Block is in O/S C
O/S Mode
NAMUR mode.
Display
Hexadecimal Description NE-107 0x00000800 AI1 in O/S AI1 block is in O/S
through DD
category Mode (AL- mode C
0x80000000 Diff Pressure Input Pressure 43)
outside is outside 0x00000400 AI2 in O/S AI2 block is in O/S
Range Limit measurement S Mode (AL- mode C
(AL-10) range limit of 44)
capsule
0x00000200 AI3 in O/S AI3 block is in O/S
0x40000000 Static Static Pressure mode
Pressure exceeds limit Mode (AL- C
outside S 45)
Range Limit 0x00000100 AI1 Not AI1 block is not
(AL-11) Scheduled scheduled C
0x20000000 Capsule Capsule (AL-46)
Temp outside Temperature is out 0x00000080 AI2 Not AI2 block is not
S
Range Limit of range Scheduled scheduled C
(AL-12) (AL-47)
0x10000000 Amp Temp Amplifier
0x00000040 AI3 Not AI3 block is not
outside Temperature is out
S Scheduled scheduled C
Range Limit of range
(AL-13) (AL-48)
0x00008000 No FB No Function Block
Scheduled is scheduled. C
(AL-20)
IM 01C25T02-01E
Table 8.5 Contents of DEVICE_STATUS_5 NAMUR
(index 1049) Display
through DD
category
Display NAMUR
Hexadecimal Description NE-107 0x00040000 IS Not IS block is not
through DD Scheduled scheduled C
category
0x80000000 Diff Pressure Trimming range (AL-73)
Span Trim error for differential 0x00020000 AR in O/S AR block is in O/S
C
Error pressure span Mode (AL- mode C
(AL-50) 74)
0x40000000 Diff Pressure Trimming range 0x00010000 AR in MAN AR block is in MAN
Zero Trim error for differential Mode (AL- mode C
C
Error pressure zero 74)
(AL-50)
0x00008000 AR Not AR block is not
0x20000000 Static Trimming range
Scheduled scheduled C
Pressure error for static
Span Trim pressure span C (AL-74)
Error 0x00000004 IT Total IT Total Backup
(AL-51) Backup Err has failed. Last IT
0x10000000 Static Trimming range (AL-78) Output Value (IT. F
Pressure error for static LAST.VALUE) is
Zero Trim pressure zero C not saved.
Error 0x00000002 LCD Display Displayed value
(AL-51) Outside exceeds limit
C
Range Limit
(AL-79)
Table 8.6 Contents of DEVICE_STATUS_6
0x00000001 LCD Display Specified settings
(index 1050)
Config Error for Display do not C
NAMUR (AL-79) meet the conditions
Display
through DD
category
0x80000000 PID in O/S PID block is in O/S Table 8.7 Contents of DEVICE_STATUS_7
Mode (AL- mode C (index 1051) (Applicable for option
70) code "DG1".)
0x40000000 PID in MAN PID block is in MAN NAMUR
Display
Mode (AL- mode C Hexadecimal Description NE-107
through DD
70) category
0x20000000 PID Not PID block is not 0x00004000 Flg Temp Flange
Scheduled Scheduled C High Alarm Temperature High M
(AL-70) (AL-87) Alarm occurs.
PID Block is in 0x00002000 Flg Temp Flange
0x10000000 PID in
Bypass Bypass mode. C Low Alarm Temperature Low M
Mode (AL-87) Alarm occurs.
SC block is in O/S 0x00001000 Outside Outside Diagnosis

0x08000000 SC in O/S
Mode (AL- mode C Diagnosis Range.
—
71) Range (AL-
89)
0x04000000 SC in MAN SC block is in MAN
mode 0x00000800 Invalid Ref VALUE_FDP
Mode (AL- C
71) fDP (AL-88) under normal
conditions is not
0x02000000 SC Not SC block is not up to the reference
Scheduled scheduled C C
fluctuation
(AL-71) level required
IT block is in O/S to blockage
0x01000000 IT in O/S
mode detection.
Mode (AL- C
72) 0x00000400 Invalid Ref VALUE_FSPL
IT block is in MAN fSPl (AL-88) under normal
0x00800000 IT in MAN
mode conditions is not
Mode (AL- C
up to the reference
72) C
fluctuation
0x00400000 IT Not IT block is not level required
Scheduled scheduled C to blockage
(AL-72) detection.
0x00100000 IS in O/S IS block is in O/S
Mode (AL- mode C
73)
0x00080000 IS in MAN IS block is in MAN
Mode (AL- mode C
73)
IM 01C25T02-01E
NAMUR Table 8.8 Contents of DEVICE_STATUS_8
Display (index 1052)
through DD
category
Display NAMUR
0x00000200 Invalid Ref VALUE_FSPH Hexadecimal Description NE-107
fSPh (AL-88) under normal through DD
category
conditions is not 0x80000000 AI1 Simulate AI1 Block is in
up to the reference Active (AL- simulation mode. C
C
fluctuation 90)
level required
to blockage 0x40000000 AI2 Simulate AI2 Block is in
detection. Active (AL- simulation mode. C
91)
0x00000100 Invalid Ref VALUE_BLKF
0x20000000 AI3 Simulate AI3 Block is in
BlkF (AL-88) under normal
Active (AL- simulation mode. C
conditions is not
92)
up to the reference
C 0x10000000 AI1 in MAN AI1 Block is in Man
fluctuation C
level required Mode (AL-93) mode.
to blockage 0x08000000 AI2 in MAN AI2 Block is in Man
C
detection. Mode (AL-94) mode.
0x00000080 B Blocking B Blocking (both- 0x04000000 AI3 in MAN AI3 Block is in Man
C
(AL-89) side blockage) is M Mode (AL-95) mode.
detected
0x00000040 High Side High-pressure-
Blocking side blockage is M
(AL-89) detected
0x00000020 Low Side Low-pressure-
Blocking side blockage is M
(AL-89) detected
0x00000010 Large Pressure
Fluctuation fluctuation
of High Side amplitude of M
(AL-89) highpressure side
is large
0x00000008 Large Pressure
Fluctuation fluctuation
of Low Side amplitude of M
(AL-89) lowpressure side
is large
0x00000004 A Blocking A Blocking (single-
(AL-89) side blockage) is M
detected
IM 01C25T02-01E
8.2 Status of Each Parameter in Failure Mode
Following tables summarize the value of EJX parameters when LCD display indicates an Alaram.
Table 8.9 Action of each parameters in failure mode related Resource block and Sensor Transducer block
Resource
SENSOR Transducer block*
ALARM block
Cause of Alarm
Display SV.STATUS CAP_TEMP_ AMP_TEMP_
BLOCK_ERR BLOCK_ERR XD_ERROR PV.STATUS
TV.STATUS VAL.STATUS VAL.STATUS
AL.01 Pressure — other I/O Failure BAD:Sensor BAD:Sensor BAD:Sensor BAD:Sensor
CAP.ERR Sensor problem Failure Failure Failure Failure
Capsule — other I/O Failure BAD:Sensor BAD:Sensor BAD:Sensor BAD:Sensor
Temperature Failure Failure Failure Failure
Sensor problem
Capsule Lost NV Data other I/O Failure BAD:Device BAD:Device BAD:Device BAD:Device
memory Failure Failure Failure Failure
problem
AL.02 Amplifier — other Electronics BAD:Sensor BAD:Sensor BAD:Sensor BAD:Sensor
AMP.ERR Temperature Failure Failure Failure Failure Failure
Sensor problem
Amplifier Lost Static other Electronics BAD:Device BAD:Device BAD:Device BAD:Device
memory Data Failure Failure Failure Failure Failure
problem Device Needs
Maintenance
Now
Amplifier — other Electronics BAD:Device BAD:Device BAD:Device BAD:Device
problem Failure Failure Failure Failure Failure
AL.10 Input Pressure — — — UNCERTAIN: UNCERTAIN — —
PRESS is outside Sensor Subnormal
measurement Conversion
range limit of not Accurate
capsule
AL.11 Static Pressure — — — UNCERTAIN UNCERTAIN: — —
ST.PRSS exceeds limit Subnormal Sensor
Conversion
not Accurate
AL.12 Capsule — — — UNCERTAIN UNCERTAIN UNCERTAIN: —
CAP.TMP Temperature is Subnormal Subnormal Sensor
out of range Conversion
not Accurate
AL.13 Amplifier — — — — — — UNCERTAIN:
AMP.TMP Temperature is Sensor
out of range Conversion
not Accurate
AL.20 No — — — — — — —
NOT.RDY communication
is found with
LAS.
AL.40 Resource Block Out of — — BAD: BAD: BAD: BAD:
RS O/S is in O/S mode Service Non-specific Non-specific Non-specific Non-specific
AL.41 Sensor TB is in — Out of Out of BAD:Out of BAD:Out of BAD:Out of BAD:Out of
TB O/S O/S mode Service Service Service Service Service Service
AL.50 Trimming — other Calibration UNCERTAIN: — — —
P.SDEV range error error Engineering
P.ZDEV for differential Unit Range
pressure span Violation
AL.51 Trimming range — other Calibration — UNCERTAIN: — —
SP.SDEV error for static error Engineering
SP.ZDEV pressure span Unit Range
Violation
*: For FLG_TEMP_VAL.STATUS, refer to A8.3.5.
Table 8.10 Action of each parameters in failure mode related LCD display
ALARM LCD TB
Cause of Alarm
Display BLOCK_ERR XD_ERROR
AL.79 Displayed value exceeds limit or LCD configuration error — —
LCD.RNG
IM 01C25T02-01E
Table 8.11 Action of each parameters in failure mode related Function block
ALARM Object
Cause of Alarm BLOCK_ERR OUT.STATUS
Display block
AL.30 Hi_Hi or Lo_Lo Alarm occurs in AI1 AI1 — Depends on specified High High(Lo Lo)
HI.HI Function block Priority (*1)
LO.LO
LO.LO
LO.LO
AL.33 Hi_Hi or Lo_Lo Alarm occurs in PID PID — —
HI.HI Function block
LO.LO
AL.43 AI1 block is O/S mode AI1 Out-of-Service BAD-Out of Service
AI O/S
AL.44 AI2 block is O/S mode AI2
AI O/S
AL.45 AI3 block is O/S mode AI3
AI O/S
AL.46 AI1 block is not scheduled AI1 HOLD HOLD
NO.SCHD
AL.47 AI2 block is not scheduled AI2
NO.SCHD
AL.48 AI3 block is not scheduled AI3
NO.SCHD
AL.70 PID block is in O/S mode, MAN mode, PID Depends on cause of Alarm Depends on cause of Alarm
PID O/S “not scheduled”, or Bypass mode.
PID.MAN
NO.SCHD
PID.BYP
AL.71 SC block is in O/S mode, MAN mode SC Depends on cause of Alarm Depends on cause of Alarm
SC O/S or “not scheduled”.
SC MAN
NO.SCHD
AL.72 IT block is in O/S mode, MAN mode IT Depends on cause of Alarm Depends on cause of Alarm
IT O/S or “not scheduled”.
IT MAN
NO.SCHD
AL.73 IS block is in O/S mode, MAN mode IS Depends on cause of Alarm Depends on cause of Alarm
IS O/S or “not scheduled”.
IS MAN
NO.SCHD
AL.74 AR block is in O/S mode, MAN mode AR Depends on cause of Alarm Depends on cause of Alarm
AR O/S or “not scheduled”.
AR MAN
NO.SCHD
AL.90 Simulation function of AI1 block is AI1 Simulate Active Specified Status
AI SIM active
AI SIM active
AI SIM active
AL.93 AI1 block is MAN mode AI1 — Depends on setting condition of
AI MAN STATUS_OPTS. Limit Status:Constant
(*1) Priority:
0 = the associated alert will never occur.
1 = the associated alert is not sent as a notification. If the priority is above 1, then the alert must be reported.
2 = Block alarm and update event have a fixed priority of 2.
3-7 = advisory alarms (PV.STATUS = Active Advisory Alarm)
8-15 = critical alarms (PV.STATUS = Active Critical Alarm)
IM 01C25T02-01E
Table 8.12 Action of each parameters in failure mode related Advanced Diagnostic (option code: /DG1)
SENSOR Transducer block
ALARM DIAG_ERR PV.STATUS
Cause of Alarm SV.STATUS
Display
Hexadecimal Display through DD TV.STATUS
(*1)
AL.87 Flange Temperature High Alarm occurs. 0x4000 Flg Temp High Alarm
FLG.HI
AL.87 Flange Temperature Low Alarm occurs. 0x2000 Flg Temp Low Alarm
FLG.LO
AL.88 Reference fDP value is invalid. 0x0800 Invalid Ref fDP
INVR.DP
AL.88 Reference fSPl value is invalid. 0x0400 Invalid Ref fSPl
INVR.SL
AL.88 Reference fSPh value is invalid. 0x0200 Invalid Ref fSPh
INVR.SH
AL.88 Reference BlkF value is invalid. 0x0100 Invalid Ref BlkF
INVR.F
AL.89 B Blocking is detected. 0x0080 B Blocking UNCERTAIN:Non Specific
B BLK
AL.89 High-pressure-side Blocking is detected. 0x0040 High Side Blocking UNCERTAIN:Non Specific
H BLK
AL.89 Low-pressure-side Blocking is detected. 0x0020 Low Side Blocking UNCERTAIN:Non Specific
L BLK
AL.89 Large Fluctuation of High Side. 0x0010 Large Fluctuation of High Side UNCERTAIN:Non Specific
H LRG
AL.89 Large Fluctuation of Low Side. 0x0008 Large Fluctuation of Low Side UNCERTAIN:Non Specific
L LRG
AL.89 A Blocking is detected. 0x0004 A Blocking UNCERTAIN:Non Specific
A BLK
AL.89 DPavg is outside range. 0x1000 Outside Diagonosis Range
ILBD.OV
(*1): These settings depend on bit 15 in DIAG_OPTION.
IM 01C25T02-01E
<9. Parameter Lists> 9-1
9. Parameter Lists
Note: The Write Mode column contains the modes in which each parameter is write enabled.
O/S: Write enabled in O/S mode.
MAN: Write enabled in Man mode and O/S mode.
AUTO: Write enabled in Auto mode, Man mode, and O/S mode.
9.1 Resource Block

Relative Write
Index Parameter Name Factory Default Explanation
Index Mode
0 1000 Block Header TAG:“RS” Block Information on this block such as Block Tag, DD Revision,
Tag Execution Time etc.
=O/S
1 1001 ST_REV — — The revision level of the static data associated with the
resource block. The revision value is incremented each time a
static parameter value in this block is changed.
2 1002 TAG_DESC Space AUTO The user description of the intended application of the block.
(32 characters)
3 1003 STRATEGY 0 AUTO The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks.
This data is not checked or processed by the block.
4 1004 ALERT_KEY 0 AUTO The identification number of the plant unit. This information
may be used in the host for sorting alarms, etc.
5 1005 MODE_BLK AUTO — The actual, target, permitted, and normal modes of the block.
6 1006 BLOCK_ERR — — This parameter reflects the error status associated with the
hardware or software components associated with a block. It is
a bit string, so that multiple errors may be shown.
7 1007 RS_STATE — — State of the resource block state machine.
8 1008 TEST_RW — AUTO Read/write test parameter-used only for conformance testing
and simulation.
9 1009 DD_RESOURCE Space — String identifying the tag of the resource which contains the
(32 characters) Device Description for this resource.
10 1010 MANUFAC_ID 0x00594543 — Manufacturer identification number-used by an interface device
to locate the DD file for the resource.
11 1011 DEV_TYPE EJX:12 — Manufacturer’s model number associated with the
EJA:17 resourceused by interface devices to locate the DD file for the
resource.
12 1012 DEV_REV EJX:6 — Manufacturer revision number associated with the
EJA:2 resourceused by an interface device to locate the DD file for
the resource.
13 1013 DD_REV 1 — Revision of the DD associated with the resource-used by an
interface device to locate the DD file for the resource.
14 1014 GRANT_DENY 0 AUTO Options for controlling access of host computer and local
control panels to operating, tuning and alarm parameters of the
block.
15 1015 HARD_TYPES Scalar input — The types of hardware available as channel numbers.
bit0: Scalar input
bit1: Scalar output
bit2: Discrete input
bit3: Discrete output
16 1016 RESTART — — Allows a manual restart to be initiated. Several degrees of
restart are possible.
1: Run:Run
2: Resource:Restart resource
3: Defaults:Restart with initial value specified in FF functional
spec.(*1)
4: Processor: Restart processor
*1: FF-891 FoundationTM Specification Function Block
Application Process Part 2.
17 1017 FEATURES Reports — Used to show supported resource block options.
Fault state
Soft W Lock
Hard W Lock
Multi_bit Alarm
support
IM 01C25T02-01E
Relative Write
Index Mode
18 1018 FEATURE_SEL Report AUTO Used to select resource block options defined in FEATURES.
Fault state bit0: Scheduled
Soft W Lock bit1: Event driven
bit2: Manufacturer specified
19 1019 CYCLE_TYPE Scheduled — Identifies the block execution methods available for this
resource.
20 1020 CYCLE_SEL 0x0000 AUTO Used to select the block execution method for this resource.
21 1021 MIN_CYCLE_T 3200 (100 ms) — Time duration of the shortest cycle interval of which the
resource is capable.
22 1022 MEMORY_SIZE 0 — Available configuration memory in the empty resource. To be
checked before attempting a download.
23 1023 NV_CYCLE_T 0 — Interval between writing copies of nonvolatile parameters to
non-volatile memory. Zero means never.
24 1024 FREE_SPACE 0 — Percent of memory available for further configuration. DPharp
has zero which means a preconfigured resource.
25 1025 FREE_TIME 0 — Percent of the block processing time that is free to process
additional blocks. DPharp does not support this.
26 1026 SHED_RCAS 640000 (20 s) AUTO Time duration at which to give up on computer writes to
function block RCas locations. Supported only with PID
function.
27 1027 SHED_ROUT 640000 (20 s) AUTO Time duration at which to give up on computer writes to
function block ROut locations. Supported only with PID
function.
28 1028 FAULT_STATE 1 — Condition set by loss of communication to an output block,
failure promoted to an output block or a physical contact.
When fail-safe condition is set, then output function blocks will
perform their FSAFE actions.
29 1029 SET_FSTATE 1 AUTO Allows the fail-safe condition to be manually initiated by
selecting Set.
30 1030 CLR_FSTATE 1 AUTO Writing a Clear to this parameter will clear the device fail-safe
state if the field condition, if any, has cleared.
31 1031 MAX_NOTIFY 128 — Maximum number of unconfirmed notify messages possible.
32 1032 LIM_NOTIFY 4 AUTO Maximum number of alarm information which transmitter can
transfer at the same time. Setting of this parameter restrict
number of alarm transfer to the HOST and prevent HOST from
overflow.
33 1033 CONFIRM_TIM 640000 (20 s) AUTO The minimum time between retries of alert reports.
34 1034 WRITE_LOCK 1(Not Locked) AUTO If set, no writes from anywhere are allowed, except to clear
WRITE_LOCK. Block inputs will continue to be updated
1: Not Locked
2: Locked
35 1035 UPDATE_EVT — — This alert is generated by any change to the static data.
36 1036 BLOCK_ALM — — The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware,
connection failure or system problems in the block. The cause
of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to
become active will set the Active status in the Status attribute.
As soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the alert
reporting task, another block alert may be reported without
clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed.
37 1037 ALARM_SUM Enable — The current alert status, unacknowledged states, unreported
states, and disabled states of the alarms associated with the
function block.
38 1038 ACK_OPTION 0xFFFF AUTO Selection of whether alarms associated with the block will be
automatically acknowledged.
39 1039 WRITE_PRI 0 AUTO Priority of the alarm generated by clearing the write lock.
40 1040 WRITE_ALM — — This alert is generated if the write lock parameter is cleared.
41 1041 ITK_VER 6 — Version number of interoperability test by Fieldbus Foundation
applied to the transmitter.
42 1042 SOFT_REV — Transmitter software revision number.
43 1043 SOFT_DESC — Internal use
44 1044 SIM_ENABLE_MSG Space AUTO Software switch for simulation function.
(32 characters)
45 1045 DEVICE_STATUS_1 0 — Device status For details, refer to Table 8.1
48 1048 DEVICE_STATUS_4 reserve — Device status For details, refer to Table 8.4
IM 01C25T02-01E
Relative Write
Index Mode
53 1053 SOFTDWN_ 0x01 AUTO Defines whether to accept software downloads.
PROTECT 0x01: Unprotected
0x02: Protected
54 1054 SOFTDWN_FORMAT 0x01 AUTO Selects the software download method.
0x01: Standard
0x02: YOKOGAWA Standard
55 1055 SOFTDWN_COUNT 0 — Indicates the number of times the internal FlashROM was
erased.
56 1056 SOFTDWN_ACT_ 0 — Indicates the ROM number of the currently working FlashROM.
AREA 0: FlashROM #0 working
1: FlashROM #1 working
57 1057 SOFTDWN_MOD_ 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, — Indicates the software module revision.
REV 0, 0
58 1058 SOFTDWN_ERROR 0 — Indicates the error during a software download.
Refer Table A7.4.
59 1059 SOFTDWN_HISTORY — Not used for the transmitter.
60 1060 SOFTDWN_HIST_ 0 AUTO Not used for the transmitter.
INDEX
61 1061 COMPATIBILITY_REV EJX: 6 — Indicates the smallest Rev value compatible with device
EJA: 2 DevRev.
62 1062 CAPABILITY_LEV 0x00 — Indicates the capability level of instrument interior.
63 1063 CAPABILITY_CONFIG 0x0000 — A parameter corresponding to AP_CONF or DEV_OPTIONS
before the addition of parameter CAPABILITY_LEV.
64 1064 WRITE_LOCK_LEVEL 2 AUTO Specifies blocks that activates Write Lock.
65 1065 SI_CONTROL_ 1 — A parameter for switching to make the instrument compatible
CODES with SI units.
66 1066 FD_VER 0 — Indicates value of major version of instrument diagnostics
specifications (FF-912).
67 1067 FD_FAIL_ACTIVE 0x00000000 — A parameter that corresponds to ”Failed” in the NAMUR NE
107 category.
68 1068 FD_OFFSPEC_ 0x00000000 — A parameter that corresponds to ”Off Specification” in the
ACTIVE NAMUR NE 107 category.
69 1069 FD_MAINT_ACTIVE 0x00000000 — A parameter that corresponds to ”Maintenance” in the NAMUR
NE 107 category.
70 1070 FD_CHECK_ACTIVE 0x00000000 — A parameter that corresponds to ”Check Function” in the
NAMUR NE 107 category.
71 1071 FD_FAIL_MAP 0xFC000000 AUTO Specifies the bit assigned to FD_FAIL_ACTIVE, a parameter
for indicating ”Failed,” a 32-bit alarm listed in FD_SIMULATE.
DiagnosticValue.
72 1072 FD_OFFSPEC_MAP 0x00003800 AUTO Specifies the bit assigned to FD_OFFSPEC_ACTIVE, a
parameter for indicating ”Off Specification,” a 32-bit alarm
listedin FD_SIMULATE. DiagnosticValue.
73 1073 FD_MAINT_MAP 0x000003E0 AUTO Specifies the bit assigned to FD_MAINT_ACTIVE, a
parameterfor indicating ”Maintenance,” a 32-bit alarm listed in
FD_SIMULATE. DiagnosticValue.
74 1074 FD_CHECK_MAP 0x01FF8008 AUTO Specifies the bit assigned to FD_CHECK_ACTIVE, a
parameter for indicating ”Check Function,” a 32-bit alarm listed
in FD_SIMULATE. DiagnosticValue.
75 1075 FD_FAIL_MASK 0x00000000 AUTO Specifies the bit that notifies the host of 32-bit ”Failed” alarms
listed in FD_FAIL_ACTIVE.
76 1076 FD_OFFSPEC_MASK 0x00000000 AUTO Specifies the bit that notifies the host of 32-bit ”Off
Specification” alarms listed in FD_OFFSPEC_ACTIVE.
77 1077 FD_MAINT_MASK 0x00000000 AUTO A parameter that specifies the bit that notifies the host of
32-bit ”Maintenance” alarms listed in FD_MAINT_ACTIVE. A
parameter set by the user.
78 1078 FD_CHECK_MASK 0x00000000 AUTO Specifies the bit that notifies the host of 32-bit ”Check
Function”alarms listed in FD_CHECK_ACTIVE.
79 1079 FD_FAIL_ALM AUTO Indicates alarm information for alarms categorized under
”Failed.”
80 1080 FD_OFFSPEC_ALM AUTO Indicates alarm information for alarms categorized under ”Off
Specification.”
IM 01C25T02-01E
Relative Write
Index Mode
81 1081 FD_MAINT_ALM AUTO Indicates alarm information for alarms categorized under
”Maintenance”.
82 1082 FD_CHECK_ALM AUTO Indicates alarm information for alarms categorized under
”Check Function”.
83 1083 FD_FAIL_PRI 0 AUTO Indicates the FD_FAIL_ALM priority for an alarm.
84 1084 FD_OFFSPEC_PRI 0 AUTO Indicates the FD_OFFSPEC_ALM priority for an alarm.
85 1085 FD_MAINT_PRI 0 AUTO Indicates theFD_MAINT_ALM priority for an alarm.
86 1086 FD_CHECK_PRI 0 AUTO Indicates the FD_CHECK_ALM priority for an alarm.
87 1087 FD_SIMULATE AUTO A parameter for simulating an alarm.
88 1088 FD_RECOMMEN_ 0 — Indicates procedures for handling essential alarms.
ACT
89 1089 FD_EXTENDED_ 0x00000000 — A parameter serving as a starting point for alarms handled by
ACTIVE_1 FF-912.
ACTIVE_2 FF-912.
ACTIVE_3 FF-912.
ACTIVE_4 FF-912.
ACTIVE_5 FF-912.
ACTIVE_6 FF-912.
ACTIVE_7 FF-912.
ACTIVE_8 FF-912.
97 1097 FD_EXTENDED_ 0x0708FFFF AUTO A parameter set by the user as a mask from DEVICE_
MAP_1 STATUS_1 to FD_EXTENDED_ACTIVE_1.
98 1098 FD_EXTENDED_ 0xFEFF8000 AUTO A parameter set by the user as a mask from DEVICE_
99 1099 FD_EXTENDED_ 0xF0008000 AUTO A parameter set by the user as a mask from DEVICE_
100 1100 FD_EXTENDED_ 0xFF000000 AUTO A parameter set by the user as a mask from DEVICE_
101 1101 FD_EXTENDED_ 0xF0000000 AUTO A parameter set by the user as a mask from DEVICE_
102 1102 FD_EXTENDED_ 0x00000007 AUTO A parameter set by the user as a mask from DEVICE_
103 1103 FD_EXTENDED_ 0x00007FFC AUTO A parameter set by the user as a mask from DEVICE_
104 1104 FD_EXTENDED_ 0x00000000 AUTO A parameter set by the user as a mask from DEVICE_
105 1105 PRIVATE_1 — Not used for the transmitter.
116 1116 DEVICE_ 0x00000000 — FD_EXTENDED_ACTIVE_1 & FD_EXTENDED_MAP_1
CONDITION_
ACTIVE_1
CONDITION_
ACTIVE_2
CONDITION_
ACTIVE_3
IM 01C25T02-01E
Relative Write
Index Mode
CONDITION_
ACTIVE_4
CONDITION_
ACTIVE_5
CONDITION_
ACTIVE_6
CONDITION_
ACTIVE_7
CONDITION_
ACTIVE_8
9.2 SENSOR Transducer Block

Relative Write
Index Mode
0 2000 Block Header TAG: “STB” Block Information on this block such as Block Tag, DD Revision,
Tag = Execution Time etc.
O/S
1 2001 ST_REV — — The revision level of the static data associated with the function
block. The revision value will be incremented each time a static
parameter value in the block is changed.
2 2002 TAG_DESC Space AUTO The user description of the intended application of the block
(32 characters)
6 2006 BLOCK_ERR — — This parameter reflects the error status associated with
9 2009 TRANSDUCER_ — — A directory that specifies the number and starting indices of the
DIRECTORY transducers.
10 2010 TRANSDUCER_ 100 (Standard — Identifies transducer.
TYPE Pre-ssure with
Calibration)
11 2011 XD_ERROR — — The error code in transducer.
0=No failure
18=Calibration error
20=Electronics failure
22=I/O failure
12 2012 COLLECTION_ — — A directory that specifies the number, starting indices, and DD
DIRECTORY Item Ids of the data collections in each transducer within a
transducer block.
13 2013 PRIMARY_ VALUE_ 107: differential O/S The type of measurement represented by primary value.
TYPE pressure Followings are available for the transmitter:
108: gauge 107=differential pressure
pressure 108=gauge pressure
109: absolute 109=absolute pressure
pressure
14 2014 PRIMARY_ VALUE — — The measured value and status available to the function block.
15 2015 PRIMARY_ VALUE_ Range of capsule — The High and Low range limit values, engineering units code
RANGE and the number of digits to the right of the decimal point to be
used to display the primary value.
16 2016 CAL_POINT_HI Max range O/S The highest calibrated value.
17 2017 CAL_POINT_LO 0 O/S The lowest calibrated value.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Relative Write
Index Mode
18 2018 CAL_MIN_SPAN Minimum span of — The minimum calibration span value allowed.
capsule
19 2019 CAL_UNIT kPa or as — The engineering unit for the calibrated values.
specified upon
ordering
20 2020 SENSOR_TYPE Silicon resonant — The type of sensor.
21 2021 SENSOR_ RANGE Range of capsule — The High and Low range limit values, engineering units code
and the number of digits to the right of the decimal point for the
sensor.
22 2022 SENSOR_SN Serial No. — Serial number.
23 2023 SENSOR_CAL_ 103: factory O/S The method of the last sensor calibration.
METHOD trim standard 100=volumetric
calibration 101=static weight
102=dynamic weight
103=factory trim standard calibration
104=user trim standard calibration
105=factory trim special calibration
106=user trim special calibration
255=Other
24 2024 SENSOR_CAL_LOC — O/S Set/indicate the location of the last sensor calibration.
25 2025 SENSOR_CAL_DATE — O/S Set/indicate the date of the last sensor calibration.
26 2026 SENSOR_CAL_WHO — O/S Set/indicate the name of the person responsible for the last
sensor calibration.
27 2027 SENSOR_ Unkown — Defines the construction material of the isolating diaphragms.
ISOLATOR_MTL
28 2028 SENSOR_FILL_ Unkown — Defines the type of fluid used in the sensor.
FLUID
29 2029 SECONDARY_VALUE — Static pressure (high pressure side) value and status
30 2030 SECONDARY_ 1133 (KPa) — The engineering unit of static pressure (high pressure side).
VALUE_UNIT This unit is linked to XD_SCALE.unit of AI blocks
31 2031 CAL_DEVIATION_HI 0 O/S Deviation value for span adjustment.
32 2032 CAL_DEVIATION_LO 0 O/S Deviation value for zero adjustment.
33 2033 EXTERNAL_ZERO_ 0 O/S Permission of external zero-adjustment
TRIM
34 2034 PRIMARY_VALUE_ 2 O/S Damping time constant for primary value
FTIME
35 2035 TERTIARY_VALUE — Value and status of static pressure at low side
36 2036 SP_VALUE_TYPE 109 (absolute O/S Select the type of measurement for static pressure, absolute
pressure) or gauge
37 2037 SP_VALUE_RANGE Range of capsule — High and low range limit values, engineering units, and decimal
point place for static pressure.
38 2038 CAL_SP_ POINT_HI Maximum range O/S The highest calibrated value for static pressure
value of SP
39 2039 CAL_SP_ POINT_LO 0 O/S The Lowest calibrated value for static pressure
40 2040 CAL_SP_MIN_ SPAN Minimum span — The minimum calibration span allowed for static pressure
of SP
41 2041 CAL_SP_UNIT 1133 (KPa) — The calibrated engineering unit for static pressure. This unit is
linked to XD_SCALE.unit of AI blocks
42 2042 CAL_SP_ 0 O/S Deviation value for span adjustment of static pressure
DEVIATION_HI
43 2043 CAL_SP_ 0 O/S Deviation value for zero adjustment of static pressure
DEVIATION_LO
44 2044 SP_VALUE_FTIME 2 O/S Damping time constant for static pressure
45 2045 ATM_PRESS 101.325 O/S Atmosphere pressure value used to obtain gauge pressure
value from absolute pressure.
46 2046 CLEAR_CAL 0 O/S Reset zero and span adjustment to factory calibrated values for
pressure, static pressure, and or all.
47 2047 CAP_TEMP_VAL — Measured capsule temperature value and status.
48 2048 CAP_TEMP_RANGE -50.0 to 130.0°C — High and low range limit values, engineering units, decimal
point place for capsule temperature.
49 2049 AMP_TEMP_VAL — Measured Amplifier temperature value and status.
50 2050 AMP_TEMP_ RANGE -50.0 to 95.0°C — High and low range limit values, engineering units, decimal
point place for Amplifier temperature.
51 2051 MODEL Model code — The model code.
52 2052 SPECIAL_ ORDER_ Special order — Identification number of special order.
ID number
IM 01C25T02-01E
Relative Write
Index Mode
53 2053 MANUFAC_DATE 0 O/S Date of production
54 2054 CAP_GASKET_MTL Depend on O/S Material of capsule gasket
Specify
55 2055 FLANGE_MTL Depend on O/S Material of flange
Specify
56 2056 D_VENT_PLUG Depend on O/S Material of drain or vent plug
Specify
57 2057 FLANGE_TYPE Depend on O/S Flange type
Specify
58 2058 REM_SEAL_ Depend on O/S Material of isolating diaphragms for remote seal
ISOL_MTL Specify
59 2059 FLANGE_SIZE Depend on O/S Flange size
Specify
60 2060 REM_SEAL_ NUM Depend on O/S Number of remote seal
Specify
61 2061 REM_SEAL_ Depend on O/S Types of fill fluid in remote seals.
FILL_FLUID Specify
62 2062 REM_SEAL_ TYPE Depend on O/S Types of remote seals
Specify
63 2063 ALARM_SUM Alarm Disable — The current alert status, unacknowledged states, unreported
states, and disabled states of the alarms associated with the
function block.
64 2064 AUTO_RECOVERY 1 (ON) O/S Permission of auto recovery from sensor errors
65 2065 MS_CODE — — Model suffix and codes
66 2066 DIAG_MODE Stop (0) — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
67 2067 DIAG_PERIOD 180 (s) — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
68 2068 DIAG_PRI 1 — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
69 2069 DIAG_ERR 0x0000 — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
70 2070 DIAG_H_ALM — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
71 2071 DIAG_L_ALM — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
72 2072 DIAG_OPTION 0x08FC — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
73 2073 REF_LIM_FDPMIN 7E-10 — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
74 2074 REF_LIM_FSPMIN 1E-10 — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
75 2075 REF_LIM_BLKFMAX 0.5 — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
76 2076 COMP_FLAG 0 — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
77 2077 DIAG_LIM Refer to Table — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
A8.2
78 2078 DIAG_COUNT 3 — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
79 2079 REFERENCE_TIME 0x00000000 — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
80 2080 REFERENCE_FDP 0x00, 0 — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
81 2081 REFERENCE_FSPL 0x00, 0 — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
82 2082 REFERENCE_FSPH 0x00, 0 — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
83 2083 REFERENCE_BLKF 0x00, 0 — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
84 2084 REFERENCE_DPAVG 0x00, 0 — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
85 2085 VALUE_TIME — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
86 2086 VALUE_FDP — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
87 2087 VALUE_FSPL — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
88 2088 VALUE_FSPH — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
89 2089 VALUE_BLKF — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
90 2090 VALUE_DPAVG — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
91 2091 RATIO_FDP — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
92 2092 RATIO_FSPL — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
93 2093 RATIO_FSPH — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
94 2094 CRATIO_FDP — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
95 2095 NRATIO_FDP — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
96 2096 DIAG_APPLICABLE — Used for ILBD. Refer to A8.2.12.
97 2097 FLG_TEMP_VAL 0 — Used for Heat trace monitoring. Refer to A8.3.6.
98 2098 FLG_TEMP_RANGE -50.0 to 130.0°C — Used for Heat trace monitoring. Refer to A8.3.6.
99 2099 FLG_TEMP_COEF 0 — Used for Heat trace monitoring. Refer to A8.3.6.
100 2100 FLG_TEMP_PRI 1 — Used for Heat trace monitoring. Refer to A8.3.6.
101 2101 FLG_TEMP_H_LIM 130 — Used for Heat trace monitoring. Refer to A8.3.6.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Relative Write
Index Mode
102 2102 FLG_TEMP_L_LIM -50 — Used for Heat trace monitoring. Refer to A8.3.6.
103 2103 FLG_TEMP_ALM — Used for Heat trace monitoring. Refer to A8.3.6.
104 2104 TEST_KEY1 — Not used for the transmitter.
107 2107 TEST_1 to TEST_31 — Not used for the transmitter.
to to
137 2137
9.3 LCD Transducer Block

Relative Write
Index Mode
0 2500 Block Header TAG: “LTB” Block Information on this block such as Block Tag, DD Revision,
Tag = Execution Time etc.
O/S
1 2501 ST_REV — — The revision level of the static data associated with the function
block. The revision value will be incremented each time a static
parameter value in the block is changed.
2 2502 TAG_DESC Space AUTO The user description of the intended application of the block
(32 characters)
6 2506 BLOCK_ERR — — This parameter reflects the error status associated with
9 2509 TRANSDUCER_ — — A directory that specifies the number and starting indices of the
DIRECTORY transducers.
10 2510 TRANSDUCER_TYPE 65535 (other) — Identifies transducer.
11 2511 XD_ERROR — — The error code in transducer.
0=No failure
19=Configuration error
12 2512 COLLECTION_ — — A directory that specifies the number, starting indices, and DD
DIRECTORY Item Ids of the data collections in each transducer within a
transducer block.
13 2513 DISPLAY_SEL DISPLAY1 ON AUTO Selection of display1 to 4 to be shown on LCD
Bit0=1:DISPLAY1 ON
Bit1=1:DISPLAY2 ON
Bit2=1:DISPLAY3 ON
Bit3=1:DISPLAY4 ON
14 2514 INFO_SEL UNIT ON, AUTO Selection of items to be displayed
PARAMETER ON Bit0=1:TAG ON
Bit1=1:PARAMETER ON
Bit2=1:UNIT ON
Bit3=1:STATUS ON
15 2515 BLOCK_TAG1 AI1 — Block tag which includes a parameter to be displayed on
display1
16 2516 PARAMETER_SEL1 AI OUT AUTO Selection of a parameter to be displayed on display1. Select a
parameter from Table 6.1
17 2517 DISPLAY_TAG1 Space AUTO Name of block tag to be displayed on display1; up to six
(8 characters) alphanumeric plus a slash [/] and a period [.]
18 2518 UNIT_SEL1 0 (Auto) AUTO Selection of unit to be displayed. The unit of the parameter
which is selected at PARAMETER SEL1 will be displayed
when "Auto" is selected; user-specified unit at DISPLAY UNIT1
will be displayed when "Custom" is selected.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Relative Write
Index Mode
19 2519 DISPLAY_UNIT1 Space AUTO User specified unit to be displayed on display1, which will be
(8 characters) available when "Custom" is selected at UNIT SEL1.
20 2520 EXP_MODE1 0 AUTO Selection of the displayed value in exponent such as x1, x10,
x100, and x1000.
21 2521 BLOCK_TAG2 2014 (PRIMARY_ — Block tag which includes a parameter to be displayed on
VALUE) display2
22 2522 PARAMETER_SEL2 0 (PRIMARY_ AUTO Selection of a parameter to be displayed on display2. Select a
VALUE) parameter from Table 6.1
x100, and x1000.
27 2527 BLOCK_TAG3 2029 — Block tag which includes a parameter to be displayed on
(SECONDARY_ display3
VALUE)
28 2528 PARAMETER_SEL3 1 (SECONDARY_ AUTO Selection of a parameter to be displayed on display3. Select a
VALUE) parameter from Table 6.1
x100, and x1000.
33 2533 BLOCK_TAG4 2047 (CAP_ — Block tag which includes a parameter to be displayed on
TEMP_VAL) display4
34 2034 PARAMETER_SEL4 3 (CAP_TEMP_ AUTO Selection of a parameter to be displayed on display4. Select a
VAL) parameter from Table 6.1
x100, and x1000.
39 2039 BAR_GRAPH_ 1 (display) AUTO Selection of bar graph indicator
SELECT
40 2540 DISPLAY_CYCLE 0 (2.8 s) AUTO Duration of display cycle.
0: 2.8 s
1-255: 400 ms x set value
41 2541 POWER_ON_INFO 1 — Display when powering on.
42 2542 TEST 40 0 O/S Not used for the transmitter.
IM 01C25T02-01E
9.4 Al Function Block
Relative Index Index Index Write
Parameter Name Factory Default Explanation
Index AI1 AI2 AI3 Mode
0 4000 4100 4200 Block Header TAG: “AI1” or Block Information on this block such as Block Tag, DD
“AI2” or Tag = Revision, Execution Time etc.
“AI3” O/S
1 4001 4101 4201 ST_REV — — The revision level of the static data associated
with the function block. The revision value will be
incremented each time a static parameter value in
the block is changed.
2 4002 4102 4202 TAG_DESC Space AUTO The user description of the intended application
(32 characters) of the block.
3 4003 4103 4203 STRATEGY 1 AUTO The strategy field can be used to identify grouping
of blocks. This data is not checked or processed
by the block.
4 4004 4104 4204 ALERT_KEY 1 AUTO The identification number of the plant unit. This
information may be used in the host for sorting
alarms, etc.
5 4005 4105 4205 MODE_BLK AUTO — The actual, target, permitted, and normal modes
of the block.
6 4006 4106 4206 BLOCK_ERR — — This parameter reflects the error status
associated with the hardware or software
components associated with a block. It is a bit
string, so that multiple errors may be shown.
7 4007 4107 4207 PV — — Either the primary analog value for use in
executing the function, or a process value
associated with it. May also be calculated from
the READBACK value of an AO block.
8 4008 4108 4208 OUT — Value = The primary analog value calculated as a result of
MAN executing the function.
9 4009 4109 4209 SIMULATE Disable AUTO Allows the transducer analog input or output to
the block to be manually supplied when simulate
is enabled. When simulation is disabled, the
simulate value and status track the actual value
and status.
10 4010 4110 4210 XD_SCALE Specified at the O/S The high and low scale values, engineering units
time of order code, and number of digits to the right of the
decimal point used with the value obtained from
the transducer for a specified channel.
11 4011 4111 4211 OUT_ SCALE Specified at the O/S The high and low scale values, engineering units
time of order code, and number of digits to the right of the
decimal point to be used in displaying the OUT
parameter and parameters which have the same
scaling as OUT.
12 4012 4112 4212 GRANT_DENY 0 AUTO Options for controlling access of host computers
and local control panels to operating, tuning and
alarm parameters of the block.
13 4013 4113 4213 IO_OPTS 0 O/S Options which the user may select to alter input
and output block processing
14 4014 4114 4214 STATUS_OPTS 0 O/S Options which the user may select in the block
processing of status
15 4015 4115 4215 CHANNEL AI1: 1 O/S The number of the logical hardware channel that
AI2: 2 is connected to this I/O block. This information
AI3: 4 defines the transducer to be used going to or from
the physical world.
1:PV
2:SV
3:TV
4:CAP_TEMP_VAL
5:AMP_TEMP_VAL
6:FLG_TEMP_VAL
16 4016 4116 4216 L_TYPE Specified at the MAN Determines if the values passed by the
time of order transducer block to the AI block may be used
directly (Direct) or if the value is in different units
and must be converted linearly (Indirect), or with
square root (Ind Sqr Root), using the input range
defined by the transducer and the associated
output range.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Relative Index Index Index Write
Parameter Name Factory Default Explanation
Index AI1 AI2 AI3 Mode
17 4017 4117 4217 LOW_CUT Linear: 0% AUTO Limit used in square root processing. A value of
Square root: 10% zero percent of scale is used in block processing
of OUT_SCALE if the transducer value falls below this limit. This
feature may be used to eliminate noise near zero
for a flow sensor. The setting is in an engineering
unit of OUT_SCALE.
18 4018 4118 4218 PV_FTIME 0 (s) AUTO Time constant of a single exponential filter for the
PV, in seconds.
19 4019 4119 4219 FIELD_VAL — — Raw value of the field device in percent of thePV
range, with a status reflecting the Transducer
condition, before signal characterization (L_
TYPE) or filtering (PV_FTIME).
20 4020 4120 4220 UPDATE_EVT — — This alert is generated by any change to the static
data.
21 4021 4121 4221 BLOCK_ALM — — The block alarm is used for all configuration,
hardware, connection failure or system problems
in the block. The cause of the alert is entered in
the subcode field. The first alert to become active
will set the Active status in the Status attribute. As
soon as the Unreported status is cleared by the
alert reporting task, another block alert may be
reported without clearing the Active status, if the
subcode has changed.
22 4022 4122 4222 ALARM_SUM Enable — The current alert status, unacknowledged states,
unreported states, and disabled states of the
alarms associated with the function block.
23 4023 4123 4223 ACK_OPTION 0xFFFF AUTO Selection of whether alarms associated with the
block will be automatically acknowledged.
24 4024 4124 4224 ALARM_HYS 0.5% AUTO Amount the PV must return within the alarm
limits before the alarm condition clears. Alarm
Hysteresis is expressed as a percent of the PV
span.
25 4025 4125 4225 HI_HI_PRI 0 AUTO Priority of the high high alarm.
26 4026 4126 4226 HI_HI_LIM +INF AUTO The setting for high high alarm in engineering
units.
27 4027 4127 4227 HI_PRI 0 AUTO Priority of the high alarm.
28 4028 4128 4228 HI_LIM +INF AUTO The setting for high alarm in engineering units.
29 4029 4129 4229 LO_PRI 0 AUTO Priority of the low alarm.
30 4030 4130 4230 LO_LIM -INF AUTO The setting for the low alarm in engineering units.
31 4031 4131 4231 LO_LO_PRI 0 AUTO Priority of the low low alarm.
32 4032 4132 4232 LO_LO_LIM -INF AUTO The setting of the low low alarm in engineering
units.
33 4033 4133 4233 HI_HI_ALM — — The status for high high alarm and its associated
time stamp.
34 4034 4134 4234 HI_ALM — — The status for high alarm and its associated time
stamp.
35 4035 4135 4235 LO_ALM — — The status of the low alarm and its associated
time stamp.
36 4036 4136 4236 LO_LO_ALM — — The status of the low low alarm and its associated
time stamp.
37 4037 4137 4237 OUT_D_SEL 0 AUTO Selection of alarm to output it from OUT_D
38 4038 4138 4238 OUT_D — Value= A discrete value and status that shows HI_HI, HI,
MAN LO_LO, LO state.
IM 01C25T02-01E
<10. General Specifications> 10-1
10. General Specifications

10.1 Standard Specifications Function Block:
Block Execution
Number Note
For items other than those described below, name time
refer to each User’s Manual. AI 3 30 mS For differential pressure,
static pressure and
temperature
Applicable Model: SC 1 30 mS An Output of Signal
All DPharp EJX/EJA series, except for Characterizer block is
EJX90A. a non-linear function of
the respective input. The
Output: function is determined by
Digital communication signal based on a table
IT 1 30 mS Integrator block integrates
FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol.
a variable as a function of
Supply Voltage: the time or accumulates
the counts
9 to 32 V DC for general use, flameproof type
IS 1 30 mS Input Selector block
and Type n provides selection of up to
9 to 24 V DC for intrinsically safe type Entity eight inputs and generate
model an output based on the
configured action
9 to 17.5 V DC for intrinsically safe type FISCO
AR 1 30 mS Arithmetic block permits
model simple use of popular
measurement math
Communication Requirements: functions
Supply Voltage: 9 to 32 V DC PID 1 45 mS Works as a field PID
Current Draw (Stedy state): 15 mA (max) controller in conjunction
Current Draw (Software Download state): with other function blocks.
24 mA (max)
LM Function:
Update Period: LM function is supported.
Differential Pressure: 100 ms LM function is disabled when shipped.
Static Pressure: 100 ms
Capsule Temperature: 1 s
Amplifier Temperature: 1 s
Integral Indicator (LCD display):
5-digit Numerical Display, 6-digit Unit Display
and Bar graph. The indicator is configurable
to display one or up to four of the I/O signals
periodically.
Functional Specifications:
Functional specifications for Fieldbus
communication conform to the standard
specifications (H1) of FOUNDATION Fieldbus.
IM 01C25T02-01E
<10. General Specifications> 10-2
10.2 Optional Specifications
For items other than those described below, refer to each User’s Manual.
Item Description Code
Data configuration at factory Software damping CC
Software Download Function Based on FOUNDATION fieldbus Specification (FF-883)
EE
Download class: Class1
Advanced diagnostics *3 Multi-sensing process monitoring
• Impulse line blockage detection *1 DG1
• Heat trace monitoring *2
*1: The change of pressure fluctuation is monitored and then detects the impulse line blockage. See TI 01C25A31-01E for detailed
technical information required for using this function.
*2: Not applicable for flange mounted differential pressure transmitters and diaphragm sealed differential pressure transmitters
*3: Applicable for EJX series. This option code must be specified with option code EE.
10.3 Optional Specifications (For Explosion Protected type)

Item Description Code
FM Explosionproof *1 FF1
Factory Mutual (FM)
FM Intrinsically safe and Nonincendive *1 FS15
ATEX Flameproof *1 KF22
ATEX ATEX Intrinsically safe Ex ia *1 KS26
ATEX Intrinsically safe Ex ic *1 KN26
Canadian Standards CSA Explosionproof *1 CF1
Association (CSA) CSA Intrinsically safe *1 CS15
IECEx Flameproof *1 SF2
IECEx Scheme
IECEx Intrinsically safe Ex ia and Ex ic.*1 SS26
Contact Yokogawa representative for the codes indicated as ‘-’.
*1: Applicable for Electrical connection code 2, 4, 7, 9, C and D .
< Factory Setting >

Tag Number (Tag plate) As specified in order
Software Tag (PD_TAG) ‘PT2001’ unless otherwise both Tag Number and Software Tag
specified in order
Node Address ‘0xF5’ unless otherwise specified in order
Operation Functional Class ‘BASIC’ or as specified
Primary value *1 Output Mode (L_TYPE) ‘Direct’ unless otherwise specified in order
Calibration Range (XD_SCALE) As specified in order
Lower/Higher Range Value
Calibration Range Unit Selected from mmH2O, mmH2O(68°F), mmHg, Pa, hPa, kPa,
MPa, mbar, bar, gf/cm2, kgf/cm2, inH2O, inH2O(68°F), inHg,
ftH2O, ftH2O(68°F) or psi. (Only one unit can be specified)
Output Scale (OUT_SCALE) ‘0 to 100%’ unless otherwise specified.
Lower/Higher Range Value
Software Damping *2 ‘2 seconds’ or as specified in order
Static pressure display range 0 to Maximum Working Pressure of each model. Absolute
pressure. (High or Low side is depending on the model.)
*1: Primary means differential pressure in case of differential pressure transmitters and pressure in case of pressure transmitters.
*2: To specify this item, /CC option is required.
IM 01C25T02-01E
<Appendix 1. Signal Characterizer (SC) Block> A1-1
Appendix 1. Signal Characterizer (SC)

Block
The Signal Characterizer (SC) block is used to A1.1 Schematic Diagram of
convert the values of input signals according to a
line-segment function. The line-segment function
Signal Characterizer Block
is created using 21 points of the X/Y coordinates The following shows the schematic diagram of the
specified by the user. This function block can also Signal Characterizer block.
be used as a transmission line for control signals
and supports backward control. IN_1 y OUT_1
Application
IN_2 OFF OFF OUT_2
The Signal Characterizer block is primarily used
if you wish for one of the following reasons to ON x ON
correct signals using the coordinates rather than a

computational expression: Inverse
x function
• The computational expression for correction in
relation to input signals is complex
• The relationship between input signals and
the signals after correction is only empirically y
known
SWAP_2
FA0101.ai
Figure A1.1 Signal Characterizer Block
Input/Output Parameters
Input IN_1 Inputs a signal desired to be corrected using a line-segment function.
(It is substituted for X of the line-segment function.)
IN_2 Inputs a signal desired to be corrected using a line-segment function.
(If SWAP_2 = off, it is substituted for X of the line-segment function.)
(If SWAP_2 = on, it is substituted for Y of the line-segment function.)
Output OUT_1 Outputs the result of the IN_1 input that has been corrected using the line-segment function.
(The function block outputs the value of Y corresponding to IN_1.)
OUT_2 Outputs the result of the IN_2 input that has been corrected using the line-segment function.
The output can also be approximated using the inverse function of the specified line-segment
function. (This is used for backward control.)
(If SWAP_2 = off, the value of Y corresponding to X of IN_1 is output.)
(If SWAP_2 = on, the value of X corresponding to Y of IN_1 is output.)
Others CURVE_X The points of the curve determining inputs and outputs.
The x points of the curve are defined by an array of 1 to 21 points with a monotone increase.
"+INFINITY" is configured for unused point(s).
CURVE_Y The points of the curve determining inputs and outputs.
The y points of the curve are defined by an array of 1 to 21 points.
If SWAP_2 = on, the elements of the curve are defined with a monotone increase or decrease.
"+INFINITY" is configured for unused point(s).
SWAP_2 Selector switch used to specify if an inverse function is used for the line-segment
approximation of IN_2 to OUT_2.
The setting of SWAP_2 = on (which uses the inverse function) is used for backward control.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Line-segment factor
Input section determination section Output section
Y
IN_1 OUT_1 or
OUT X
Determining processing
Determining
the mode BLOCK_ERR the gradient
IN_2  and intercept Determining the OUT_2
status and
computing OUT X or Y

CURVE_X SWAP_2
CURVE_Y
 MODE = AUTO
 MODE = MAN or O/S
FA0102.ai
Figure A1.2 Overview of the Signal Characterizer Block
The following describes the Signal Characterizer A1.2.2 Judging BLOCK_ERR

block, dividing its functions into three sections:
BLOCK_ERR indicates the cause of an error in the
• Input section: Determines the mode and judges function block. If the cause of an error indicated by
BLOCK_ERR. BLOCK_ERR occurs, the following configuration
• Line-segment factor determination section: error is generated.
Determines the gradient and intercept for
Name Description
OUT_1 and
Block 1) “–INFINITY” has been configured for
OUT_2 based on CURVE_X, CURVE_Y, and Configuration CURVE_X and CURVE_Y.
SWAP_2 at shift . Error 2) “+INFINITY” has been configured for
• Output section: Multiplies the input values in X1 of CURVE_X.
3) “+INFINITY” has been configured for
IN_1 and IN_2 by the gradient and adds the Y1 of CURVE_Y.
intercept to them before outputting the results. 4) A value of the array of CURVE_X
Alternatively, it outputs a limit value. does not increase in a monotone
manner.
5) A configuration error when SWAP_2
A1.2 Input Section is on
• A value of the array of CURVE_Y
The input section determines the mode and judges does not increase or decrease in a
BLOCK_ERR. monotone manner.
6) The value of SWAP_2 is any value
other than 1 or 2.
A1.2.1 Determining the Mode
The following describes operations of the Signal The mode changes to O/S if a block configuration
Characterizer block. error occurs.
Supported Mode Rules

O/S • System-stopped status
(Out of Service) • Configuration change
Man • If you do not want to output the
value and the status from IN, you
can manually transmit the value to
OUT.
Auto • Automatic system operation status
IM 01C25T02-01E
A1.3 Line-segment Factor Determination Section
When the mode is AUTO and no bit in BLOCK_ERR is set, the "gradient" and "intercept" of a line passing
through two points that are considered line-segment approximation values are determined.
A1.3.1 Conditions for Configuring Valid Coefficients (CURVE_X, CURVE_Y)

No write error is generated with respect to the settings in CURVE_X and CURVE_Y. However, a configuration
error occurs in the following cases:
1. "+INFINITY" has been configured for X1 or Y1.
2. "–INFINITY" has been configured for each X or Y.
3. The values of CURVE_X are not increasing in a monotone manner (X1 < X2 < ... < X20 < X21).
(If SWAP_2 is off, it is acceptable if the values of CURVE_Y do not increase or decrease in a monotone
manner.)
4. The values of CURVE_Y are not increasing or decreasing in a monotone manner when SWAP_2 is on.
If a configuration error occurs, the Block Configuration Error bit in BLOCK_ERR is set, causing the mode to
change to O/S.
Example of the case where SWAP_2 is off:

Y
Output
Y6
(High limit)
Y1
(Low limit)
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 =INFINITY X
Input
FA0103.ai
Figure A1.3 Example of Curve (SWAP_2 = off)
The range of CURVE_X: X1 to X6 (X7 and above are invalid because "+INFINITY" has been configured for
X7*1.)
The X1 to X6 values always increase in a monotone manner (X1 < X2 < X3 < X4 < X5 < X6).
If an input value is smaller than X1, it is set to Y1.
If an input value is larger than X6, it is set to Y6.
The range of CURVE_Y: Y1 to Y6
It is acceptable if the Y1 to Y6 values do not increase in a monotone manner.
However, if the setting of SWAP_2 is changed from off to on, the values of CURVE_Y must increase or
decrease in a monotone manner. Thus, if a value of CURVE_Y does not increase or decrease in a monotone
manner in this setting, the mode changes to O/S, causing the Block Configuration Error bit in BLOCK_ERR to
be set.
*1: For any points of the curve that are not used, configure "+INFINITY" for all of them.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Example of the case where SWAP_2 is on (monotone increase):
The input range of IN_1 is always in CURVE_X. The following shows the input/output graph of the IN_1 values.
Y
Output
Y6
(High limit)
Y1
(Low limit)
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 =INFINITY X
Input
FA0104.ai
Figure A1.4 Example of Curve for IN_1 (SWAP_2 = on)
The input range of IN_2 is always in CURVE_Y. The following shows the input/output graph of the IN_2 values.
Output
X
X6
X5
X4
X3
X2
X1
Y Input
Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 =INFINITY
(Low limit) (High limit)
FA0105.ai
Figure A1.5 Example of Curve for IN_2 (SWAP_2 = on)
When SWAP_2 is on, the array elements of CURVE_Y must be configured for a monotone increase or
decrease. (Y1 < Y2 < Y3 < Y4 < Y5 < Y6 or Y6 < Y5 < Y4 < Y3 < Y2 < Y1)
IM 01C25T02-01E
A1.4 List of Signal Characterizer Block Parameters
Relative Write Initial View
Parameter Valid Range Description / Remarks
Index Mode Value 1 2 3 4
0 BLOCK_ Block TAG: "SC" Information relating to this function block, such as
HEADER Tag=O/S block tag, DD revision, and execution time
1 ST_REV ----- 2 2 2 2 The revision level of the set parameters associated
with the Signal Characterizer block
2 TAG_DESC Space (32 Stores comments describing tag information.
characters)
3 STRATEGY 1 2 The strategy field can be used by the high-level
system to identify function blocks.
4 ALERT_KEY 1-255 1 1 Key information used to identify the location at which
an alert has occurred
5 MODE_BLK 4 4 Mode of the Signal Characterizer block. O/S, Man,
and Auto are supported.
6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2 Indicates the error status of the Signal Characterizer
block in bit strings.
7 OUT_1 MAN 5 5 Outputs the result of the value of IN_1 corrected
using a line-segment function.
8 OUT_2 MAN 5 5 Outputs the result of the value of IN_2 corrected
using a line-segment function. It is also possible to
approximate the result using the inverse function of
the specified line-segment function. (This is used for
backward control.)
9 X_RANGE 11 The engineering unit of variables corresponding to
the x-axis for display
10 Y_RANGE 11 The engineering unit of variables corresponding to
the y-axis for display
11 GRANT_DENY 2 The parameter used to check if various operations
have been executed.
The bits in the GRANT parameter corresponding to
various operations are set before being executed.
After the operations are complete, the DENY
parameter is checked for the setting of any bit
relating to the corresponding operation. If no bit
is set, it is evident that the operations have been
executed successfully.
12 IN_1 5 5 Input a signal to be corrected using a line-segment
function.
13 IN_2 5 5 Input a signal to be corrected using a line-segment
function.
14 SWAP_2 0:Initialized 1 Selector switch used to apply the inverse function to
1:No swap line-segment approximation of IN_2 to OUT_2
2:Swap
15 CURVE_X Curve input points that determine inputs and
outputs.
The "x" points of the curve are defined by an array of
1 to 21 points with a monotone increase.
16 CURVE_Y Curve input points that determine inputs and
outputs.
The "y" points of the curve are defined by an array of
1 to 21 points.
If SWAP_2 is on, the elements of the curve must be
defined with a monotone increase or decrease.
17 UPDATE_EVT Indicates event information if an update event
occurs.
18 BLOCK_ALM Indicates alarm information if a block alarm occurs.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A1.5 Application Example The following shows the approximation-value graph
of GX Output that is approximation-value output
A1.5.1 Input Compensation and GX Input that is pH input. pH with a quickly
changing reaction rate can be controlled at a point
The following is an application example of pH
near neutral 7 according to the following graph.
compensation made by performing feedback
control. 100
90
The pH is a value representing the degree of acidity
80
or alkalinity and ranges from 0 to 14. pH 7 indicates 70
CURVE_Y
neutral, a value smaller than 7 represents acidity, 60
and a value larger than 7 denotes alkalinity. It is 50
very difficult to control pH with a quickly changing 40
reaction rate at a point near 7. 30
20
14 10
13
12 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
11 0 to 100% = 0 to 14 pH
10
CURVE_X FA0108.ai
9
8 Figure A1.8 Approximation Curve
pH Small increases in reagent
7
flow cause large pH shifts
6
5 A1.5.2 Calorie Flow Compensation
4
3 AI_1: Inlet temperature, AI_2: Outlet temperature,
2
1 AI_3: Flow rate
SC: Corrects the inlet and outlet temperatures.
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
Ratio of Reagent to Influent Flow
AR: Calculates a calorie flow rate on the basis of
FA0106.ai the difference between the corrected inlet and outlet
Figure A1.6 pH and Reagent Flow temperatures.
SWAP_2=OFF
To control this pH, the input is regulated using
AI1 SC AR
line-segment approximation, gain, and input
compensation. OUT IN_1 OUT_1 IN_1
Characterizer AI2 IN_2 OUT_2 IN_2 OUT

GX pH Input
OUT IN
AI3
X Gain OUT
FA0109.ai
PID
DM
Control
Figure A1.9 Calorie Flow Rate Compensation
(SWAP_2 = Off)
Control
Output
Input Compensation
FA0107.ai
Figure A1.7 Input Compensation
IM 01C25T02-01E
A1.5.3 Backward Control Line-segment function
100
SC: The controlled variable output from PID is
converted into an information quantity that can be 90
interpreted by AO, and backward information from 80
AO is converted into an information quantity that
70
can be interpreted by PID before being transmitted
to the PID. 60
CURVE_Y
50
AI PID SC AO
40
OUT IN OUT IN_1 OUT_1 CAS_IN
30
BKCAL_IN OUT_2 IN_2 BKCAL_OUT
20
SWAP_2=ON
FA0110.ai 10
Figure A1.10 Backward Control (SWAP_2 = On)
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
To enable backward control (which inverts the X CURVE_X
and Y axes), the line-segment function must be X_RANGE = 100, 0, %, 0x00
set so that the elements of the curve increase in a Y_RANGE = 100, 0, %, 0x00 FA0111.ai
monotone manner.(As shown in Figure A1.11) If Figure A1.11 Setting Example of a Line-segment
they do not increase in a monotone manner, the Function
mode changes to O/S, disabling calculation.
No. CURVE_X CURVE_Y
1 5 5
2 10 10
3 15 11
4 20 20
5 25 25
6 30 26
7 35 30
8 40 40
9 45 45
10 50 50
11 51 51
12 52 54
13 53 59
14 54 66
15 55 75
16 65 80
17 75 81
18 80 85
19 85 86
20 90 90
21 95 95
IM 01C25T02-01E
<Appendix 2. Integrator (IT) Block> A2-1
Appendix 2. Integrator (IT) Block

The Integrator (IT) block adds two main inputs and integrates them for output. The block compares the
integrated or accumulated value to TOTAL_SP and PRE_TRIP and generates discrete output signals OUT_
TRIP or OUT_PTRIP when the limits are reached.
The output is as represented by the following equation (for counting upward and rate conversion).
OUT.Value = Integration start value + Total
Total = Total + Current Integral
Current Integral = (x + y) × Δt
x: IN_1 value whose unit has been converted
y: IN_2 value whose unit has been converted
Δt: block execution period
A2.1 Schematic Diagram of Integrator Block

The following shows the schematic diagram of the Integrator block.
INTEG_OPTS
(INPUT TYPE)
TIME_UNIT1 INTEG_TYPE
–1
INTEG_OPTS (QUALITY)
IN_1 Convert Rate Reverse
GOOD_LIM
Forward UNCERT_LIM
Convert Accum INTEG_OPTS
(FROW TYPE) CLOCK_PER
MAN
REV_FLOW1 PULSE_VAL1
N_RESET
INTEG_OPTS
Integrate
Add OUT
(INPUT TYPE) TOTAL / RTOTAL
TIME_UNIT2
–1
MAN
PRE_TRIP
Convert Rate Reverse INTEG_OPTS
IN_2 OUT_PTRIP
(CARRY)
Forward Compare
Convert Accum OP_CMD_INT
UNIT_CONV MAN
(RESET) TOTAL_SP
REV_FLOW2 PULSE_VAL2
OUT_TRIP
Compare
RESET_IN
RESET_CONFIRM
FA0201.ai
IN_1: Block input 1 (value and status)

IN_2: Block input 2 (value and status)
REV_FLOW1: Indicates whether the sign of IN_1 is reversed. It is a discrete signal.
REV_FLOW2: Indicates whether the sign of IN_2 is reversed. It is a discrete signal.
RESET_IN: Resets the integrated values. It is a discrete signal.
RESET_CONFIRM: Reset confirmation input. It is a discrete signal.
OUT: Block output (value and status)
OUT_PTRIP: Set if the target value exceeds PRE_TRIP. It is a discrete signal.
OUT_TRIP: Set if the target value exceeds TOTAL_SP (or 0). It is a discrete signal.
The Integrator block is classified into the following five sections for each function:
• Input process section: Determines the input value status, converts the rate and accumulation, and
determines the input flow direction.
• Adder: Adds the two inputs.
• Integrator: Integrates the result of the adder into the integrated value.
• Output process section: Determines the status and value of each output parameter.
• Reset process section: Resets the integrated values.
Figure A2.1 Integrator Block
IM 01C25T02-01E
A2.2 Input Process Section
When executed, the Integrator block first performs input processing in the order of:
"Determining input status" → "Converting Rate or Accum" → "Determining the input flow direction"
Switching between Convert Rate and Convert Accum is made using bit 0 (for IN_1) or bit 1 (for IN_2) of
INTEG_OPTS. INTEG_OPTS is one of the system parameters and should be set by the user. The values of
IN_1 and IN_2 are not retained if the power is turned OFF.
A2.2.1 Determining Input Value Statuses

The following shows the correlation between the statuses of input parameters (IN_1, IN_2) and the statuses of
input values used in the Integrator block.
Statuses of Input Bit 4 of INTEG_OPTS Bit 5* of INTEG_OPTS Status of Input Values
Parameters (IN_1, IN_2) (Use Uncertain) (Use Bad) Handled in IT Block
Good Irrelevant Irrelevant Good
Bad Irrelevant H (=1) Good
Bad Irrelevant L (=0) Bad
Uncertain H (=1) Irrelevant Good
Uncertain L (=0) Irrelevant Bad
For addition (see A2.3), if the status of an input value is "Bad," the "Good" value just before the status changed
to "Bad" is used.
* Even if the Use Bad option is used, changing the internal status to "Good," the value of "Good" just before
the status changed to "Bad" is used.
A2.2.2 Converting the Rate

The following describes an example of rate conversion.
In rate conversion, firstly convert the unit of two inputs to that based on seconds.
Next, convert the unit of the inputs to the same unit to be added together. The unit of IN_2 is standardized to
that of IN_1. Then, calculates a weight, volume, or energy by multiplying each input value and block execution
time. Because unit information is not input to the Integrator block as an input value, the user must input in
advance tuned values to the TIME_UNIT1/2 and UNIT_CONV parameters.
Converts the unit into
that based on seconds
TIME_UNIT1
input1 second:÷1 increment1
minute:÷60 × block execution time
kg/hour kg/s kg
hour:÷3600
day:÷86400
Standardizes the unit of
IN_2 to that of IN_1.
Because "lb/s" is converted into
Converts the unit into "kg/s" in this example, the input
that based on seconds 2 value is multiplied by 0.453.
(1 lb = 0.453 kg)
TIME_UNIT2
input2 second:÷1 UNIT_CONV increment2
minute:÷60 x [conversion factor] × block execution time
lb/minute lb/s (Conversion factor: kg/s kg
hour:÷3600
lb: pounds 0.453 in this example)
day:÷86400 FA0202.ai
Figure A2.2 Increment Calculation with Rate Input
IM 01C25T02-01E
A2.2.3 Converting Accumulation
This following describes an example of accumulation conversion.
In accumulation conversion, the difference between the value executed previously and the value executed
this time is integrated or accumulated. This conversion applies when the output of a function block used as a
counter is input to the input process of the Integrator block.
In order to convert the rate of change of an input to a value with an engineering unit, the user must configure
the factor of conversion to the appropriate engineering unit in the PULSE_VAL1 and PULSE_VAL2
parameters.
Moreover, the unit of IN_2 is standardized to that of IN_1 in the same way as rate conversion. Thus, the user
must also set an appropriate value to UNIT_CONV.
input1 increment1
PULSE_VAL1(#19)
[Current read value] – [Previous read value]
counts number of pulse × [pulse value1] kg
kg/pulse
input2 increment2
PULSE_VAL2(#20) UNIT_CONV(#18)
[Current read value] – [Previous read value]
counts number of pulse × [pulse value2] lb × [conversion factor] kg
lb/pulse FA0203.ai
Figure A2.3 Increment Calculation with Counter Input
A2.2.4 Determining the Input Flow Direction

The Integrator block also considers the input flow direction. Information about the input flow direction is
contained in REV_FLOW1 and REV_FLOW2 (0: FORWARD, 1: REVERSE).
In input processing, the sign of the value after rate and accumulation conversion is reversed if the REV_
FLOW1 and REV_FLOW2 parameters are set to REVERSE. When determination of the flow direction of two
input values is complete, these two inputs are passed to the adder. The settings in REV_FLOW will be retained
even if the power is turned OFF.
A2.3 Adder
When input processing is complete, two arguments that have been rate and accumulate converted will be
passed to the adder. The adder adds these two values according to the option.
A2.3.1 Status of Value after Addition

If one of the statuses of two arguments is "Bad" or if two of them are both "Bad," the status of the value after
addition becomes "Bad." In this case, the value of "Good" just before the status changed to "Bad" is used as
the addition value (see A2.1).
When the statuses of two arguments are both "Good," the status of the value after addition becomes "Good."
In this case, the status of the value after addition will be used for the status applied to integration.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A2.3.2 Addition
The following three options are available for addition:
• TOTAL: Adds two argument values as is.
• FORWARD: Adds two argument values, regarding a negative value as "0."
• REVERSE: Adds two argument values, regarding a positive value as "0."
You can choose these options using bit 2 and bit 3 of INTEG_OPTS as follows:
Bit 2 of INTEG_OPTS Bit 3 of INTEG_OPTS
Adder Options
(Flow Forward) (Flow Reverse)
H H TOTAL
L L TOTAL
H L FORWARD
L H REVERSE
The result of the adder is passed to the integrator. If only one of the inputs is connected, the value of a non-
connected input will be ignored.
When bit 7 of INTEG_OPTS (Add zero if bad) has been set, if the status of a value after addition is "Bad," the
value after addition (increment) becomes "0."
A2.4 Integrator
When addition is complete, its result will be passed to the integrator.
Integration consists of combinations of a reset method and counting up/down. There are the following seven
integration types, which can be set using INTEG_TYPE.
1. UP_AUTO: Counts up with automatic reset when TOTAL_SP is reached
2. UP_DEM: Counts up with demand reset
3. DN_AUTO: Counts down with automatic reset when zero is reached
4. DN_DEM: Counts down with demand reset
5. PERIODIC: Counts up and is reset periodically according to CLOCK_PER
6. DEMAND: Counts up and is reset on demand
7. PER&DEM: Counts up and is reset periodically or on demand
Each type of integration is independently run as a function.
There are the following four types of integrated values:
1. Total: Integrates the result of the adder as is.
2. ATotal: Integrates the absolute value of the result of the adder.
3. RTotal: Integrates the absolute value of the result of the adder only if the status of the result is "Bad."
This value is used for the RTOTAL value.
4. AccTotal: An extension function. The result of the adder is integrated as is and will not be reset.
The value is used for the ACCUM_TOTAL (expanded parameter) value.
The table A2.1 shows the details of INTEG_TYPE.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Table A2.1 INTEG_TYPE
Integration Reset Trigger (Reset if one of the
Name Integration Range Trip Output
Method following conditions is established)
-INF< Total <TOTAL_SP
• OUT reaches TOTAL_SP.
Counting up 0< ATotal <+INF
UP_AUTO(1) • RESET_IN = 1 
Starting from "0" 0< RTotal <+INF
• OP_CMD_INT = 1
-INF< AccTotal <+INF
-INF< Total <+INF
Counting up 0< ATotal <+INF • RESET_IN = 1
UP_DEM(2) 
Starting from "0" 0< RTotal <+INF • OP_CMD_INT = 1
0< Total <+INF
Counting down • OUT reaches "0."
0< ATotal <+INF
DN_AUTO(3) Starting from • RESET_IN = 1 
0< RTotal <+INF
TOTAL_SP • OP_CMD_INT = 1
-INF< Total <+INF
Counting down
0< ATotal <+INF • RESET_IN = 1
DN_DEM(4) Starting from 
0< RTotal <+INF • OP_CMD_INT = 1
TOTAL_SP
-INF< Total <+INF
• At the period specified by
Counting up 0< ATotal <+INF
PERIODIC(5) CLOCK_PER ×
• OP_CMD_INT = 1
-INF< Total <+INF
Counting up 0< ATotal <+INF • RESET_IN = 1
DEMAND(6) ×
Starting from "0" 0< RTotal <+INF • OP_CMD_INT = 1
-INF< Total <+INF
• At the period specified by CLOCK_PER
Counting up 0< ATotal <+INF ×
PER&DEM(7) • RESET_IN = 1
• OP_CMD_INT = 1
Legend : Trip output is made. ×: No trip output is made.
A2.5 Output Process

There are the following three output parameters:
1. OUT
2. OUT_TRIP
3. OUT_PTRIP
Parameters OUT_TRIP and OUT_PTRIP are used only when INTEG_TYPE is a value from 1 to 4.
A2.5.1 Status Determination

The same criteria for determining the status of the output of the Integrator block are used in common for the
above three parameters.
Bad Uncertain GOOD

PCT_INCL
0% UNCERT_LIM GOOD_LIM 100%
PCT_INCL=100×(1 - (msp of RTotal)/(msp of ATotal))

msp of RTotal: RTotal value that is converted into a short floating-point number
msp of ATotal: ATotal value that is converted into a short floating-point number
RTotal: Integrated value of the absolute values of the increments whose status is bad
ATotal: Integrated value of the absolute values of the increments regardless of the output status
FA0204.ai
Figure A2.4 Status of OUT, OUT_TRIP, and OUT_PTRIP Outputs
IM 01C25T02-01E
OUT.Value, OUT_TRIP.Status, and OUT_PTRIP.Status are determined by the ratio of the "Good" integrated
values to all integrated values, which is stored in PCT_INCL (0% to 100%). The user must set the threshold
value of each status to UNCERT_LIM and GOOD_LIM.
The Integrator block determines the status of the output using the three parameters: PCT_INCL,
UNCERT_LIM, and GOOD_LIM.
● PCT_INCL ≥ GOOD_LIM
 Good
● UNCERT_LIM ≤ PCT_INCL < GOOD_LIM
 Uncertain
● PCT_INCL < UNCERT_LIM
 Bad
If INTEG_TYPE is 5, 6, or 7, the status of the trip output becomes "Good-NS-Constant."
A2.5.2 Determining the Output Value

The value of OUT.Value is determined as follows:
● For counting up
OUT = integration start value (0) + Total
● For counting down
OUT = integration start value (TOTAL_SP) _ Total
Total: Total of integrated values. This value is retained even if INTEG_TYPE is changed during integration
(in AUTO).
If OUT is rewritten in the MAN mode, integration starts with the value rewritten in MAN mode after the mode
was returned to AUTO.
The values in OUT_TRIP and OUT_PTRIP are determined according to the correlation between OUT and
TOTAL_SP/PRE_TRIP.
• For counting up
PRE_TRIP(#31)
OUT_TRIP(#14):0 OUT_TRIP(#14):0 OUT_TRIP(#14):1

OUT_PTRIP(#15):0 OUT_PTRIP(#15):1 OUT_PTRIP(#15):1
0 TOTAL_SP(#7)
Counting up starting from 0
• For counting down
OUT_TRIP(#14):1 OUT_TRIP(#14):0 OUT_TRIP(#14):0

OUT_PTRIP(#15):1 OUT_PTRIP(#15):1 OUT_PTRIP(#15):0
0 PRE_TRIP(#31) TOTAL_SP(#7)
Counting down starting from TOTAL_SP FA0205.ai
IM 01C25T02-01E
For counting up, the OUT value is as follows:
● OUT < TOTAL_SP - PRE_TRIP
 OUT_TRIP = 0, COUT_PTRIP = 0
● TOTAL_SP - PRE_TRIP <= OUT < TOTAL_SP
● TOTAL_SP <= OUT
For counting down, the OUT value is as follows:
● PRE_TRIP < OUT
● 0 < OUT <= PRE_TRIP
● OUT <= 0
Note that the given conditions do not apply to the following cases:
• If INTEG_TYPE is 5, 6, or 7, OUT_TRIP and OUT_PTRIP always output "0."
• If INTEG_TYPE is 1 or 3, occurrence of AutoRESET (reset caused if the threshold is exceeded) causes
OUT_TRIP to hold "1" for five seconds.
A2.5.3 Mode Handling

Mode Action Output
Automatic (AUTO) Normal action Normal output
Manual (MAN) Integration calculation is stopped. You may rewrite a value in OUT. If no value is rewritten,
OUT will not be updated unless you the value just before running in AUTO is held. When the
Out of Service (O/S) set a value to it. No reset is accepted. mode returns to AUTO, integration starts with the written
value or the value just before running in AUTO.
If you rewrite the value in OUT and RTOTAL while the mode is in MAN or O/S, N_RESET is incremented.
A2.6 Reset
A2.6.1 Reset Trigger
There are the following five types of reset triggers:
1. An integrated value exceeds TOTAL_SP.
2. An integrated value falls below "0."
3. RESET_IN is "H."
4. Every period specified in CLOCK_PER (for more information, see CLOCK_PER in A2.6.2)
5. OP_CMD_INT is 1.
The table A2.2 shows the correlation between INTEG_TYPE and RESET triggers.
Table A2.2 RESET Triggers
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
1:UP_AUTO  ×  × 
2:UP_DEM × ×  × 
3:DN_AUTO ×   × 
4:DN_DEMO × ×  × 
5:PERIODIC × × ×  
6:DEMAND × ×  × 
7:PER&DEM × ×   
IM 01C25T02-01E
When OP_CMD_INT has become "H" and a reset was made, OP_CMD_INT automatically returns to "L."
Even if RESET_IN becomes "H," activating a reset, RESET_IN does not automatically return to "L."
The RESET_IN setting will not be retained if the power is turned OFF.
A2.6.2 Reset Timing

All items are reset during execution of the function block. Therefore, the minimum period of a reset is the block
execution period.
● 5-second rule
If a reset is made, the next reset will not be accepted for 5 seconds after that.
Even if UP_AUTO (or DN_AUTO) is activated and TOTAL_SP (or 0) is reached within 5 seconds, the next
reset will not be made for 5 seconds from the previous reset.
● CLOCK_PER
If INTEG_TYPE is PERIODIC (5) or PER&DEM (7), a reset is made at the period (sec) set to the CLOCK_PER
parameter.
If the value in CLOCK_PER is smaller than the function block's execution period, bit 1 of BLOCK_ERR "Block
Configuration Error" is set.
A2.6.3 Reset Process

The basic reset process sequence is as follows:
1.) Snapshot
2.) Clearing the integrated values
3.) Reset count increment
4.) Judging OUT_TRIP and OUT_PTRIP (see A2.5)
1.) Snapshot
Saves the following values in the specified parameters before clearing the integrated values. These values will
be retained until the next reset is made.
STOTAL = Total
SRTOTAL = RTotal
SSP = TOTAL_SP
2.) Clearing the integrated values

The reset process clears the Total, ATotal, and RTotal values in the internal registers.
Total = 0
ATotal = 0
RTotal = 0
3.) Reset count increment

Each time a reset is made, the N_RESET parameter will be incremented.
The high limit is 999,999, and if this limit is exceeded, the count returns to "0."
IM 01C25T02-01E
4.) Judging OUT_TRIP and OUT_PTRIP (see A2.5)
OUT_TRIP and OUT_PTRIP are judged again on the basis of the cleared integrated values.
There are two options relating to a reset:
i Confirm reset (bit 8 of INTEG_OPTS)
ii Carry (bit 6 of INTEG_OPTS)
i Confirm reset (bit 8 of INTEG_OPTS)
If this option is enabled, the next reset is rejected until "1" is set to RESET_CONFIRM.
ii Carry (bit 6 of INTEG_OPTS)
If this option is enabled while INTEG_TYPE is UP_AUTO or DN_AUTO, the value exceeding the threshold
at a reset will be carried into the next integration.
If INTEG_TYPE is any setting other than UP_AUTO or DN_AUTO, this option is irrelevant.
A2.7 List of Integrator Block Parameters

Parameter Initial Write View
Index Definition
Name Value Mode 1 2 3 4
0 BLOCK_ TAG:“IT” Block Information relating to this function block, such as block tag, DD revision,
HEADER Tag=O/S execution time
1 ST_REV 0 --- 2 2 2 2 The revision level of the set parameters associated with the Integrator
block
2 TAG_DESC Space (32 Stores comments describing tag information.
characters)
3 STRATEGY 1 2 The strategy field is used by a high-level system to identify the function
block.
4 ALERT_KEY 1 1 Key information used to identify the location at which an alert occurred
5 MODE_BLK 4 4 Integrator block mode. O/S, MAN, and AUTO are supported.
6 BLOCK_ERR --- 2 2 Indicates the active error conditions associated with the function block in
bit strings.
7 TOTAL_SP 1000000.0 4 4 The setpoint of an integrated value or a start value for counting down
8 OUT MAN 5 5 The block output
9 OUT_RANGE 1000000.0 11 Set scaling for output display. This does not affect operation of the function
0.0 block.
m3 (1034)
It is used for making memos.
0
10 GRANT_DENY 0 2 The parameter for checking if various operations have been executed
11 STATUS_ 0 O/S 2 Allows you to select a status-related option.
OPTS The Integrator block uses "Uncertain if Man mode" only.
12 IN_1 0.0 5 5 Inputs flow (Rate, Accum) signals from the AI block or PI block.
13 IN_2 0.0 5 5
14 OUT_TRIP 0 2 2 An output parameter informing the user that the integrated value has
exceeded the setpoint
15 OUT_PTRIP 0 2 2 An output parameter informing the user that the integrated value is
reaching the setpoint
16 TIME_UNIT1 second (1) MAN 1 Set the time unit of the rate (kg/s, lb/min, kg/h ... etc.) of the corresponding
17 TIME_UNIT2 second (1) MAN 1 IN.
18 UNIT_CONV 1.0 4 Specify the unit conversion factor for standardizing the unit of IN_2 into
that of IN_1.
19 PULSE_VAL1 1.0 MAN 4 Set the factor for converting the number of pulses for the corresponding
20 PULSE_VAL2 1.0 MAN 4 IN into an appropriate engineering unit.
21 REV_FLOW1 0 2 2 Selector switch used to specify the fluid flow direction (forward/reverse)
22 REV_FLOW2 0 2 2 with respect to the corresponding IN
23 RESET_IN 0 2 2 The parameter that receives a reset request from an external block to
reset the integrated values
24 STOTAL 0.0 4 Indicates the snapshot of OUT just before a reset.
25 RTOTAL 0.0 MAN 4 4 Indicates the integrated value of the absolute values of the increments if
the input status is "Bad."
26 SRTOTAL 0.0 4 Indicates the snapshot of RTOTAL just before a reset.
27 SSP 0.0 4 Indicates the snapshot of TOTAL_SP just before a reset.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Parameter Initial Write View
Index Definition
Name Value Mode 1 2 3 4
28 INTEG_TYPE UP_ 1 Integration Type Setting
AUTO(1) Value Name Description
1 UP_AUTO Counts up and is automatically reset when
TOTAL_SP is reached.
2 UP_DEM Counts up and is reset as demanded.
3 DN_AUTO Counts down and is automatically reset when
"0" is reached.
4 DN_DEM Counts down and is reset as demanded.
5 PERIODIC Counts up and is reset at periods specified in
CLOCK_PER.
6 DEMAND Counts up and is reset as demanded.
7 PER&DEM Reset periodically or as demanded.
29 INTEG_OPTS 0×0004 2 Specifies an integration optional function.
bit Option Name Description
0 Input 1 accumulate Selects Rate or Accum input of IN_1.
1 Input 2 accumulate Selects Rate or Accum input of IN_2.
2 Flow forward Integrates forward flow (interprets
reverse flow as zero).*
3 Flow reverse Integrates reverse flow (interprets
forward flow as zero).*
4 Use uncertain Uses an input value of IN_1 or IN_2
whose status is "Uncertain" regarding it
as a value of "Good."
5 Use bad Uses an input value of IN_1 or IN_2
whose status is "Bad" regarding it as a
value of "Good."
6 Carry Carries over an excess exceeding the
threshold at reset to the next integration.
(Note that this does not apply to
UP_AUTO or DN_AUTO.)
7 Add zero if bad Interprets an increment as zero if the
status of the increment is "Bad."
8 Confirm reset After a reset, rejects the next reset until
"Confirm" is set to RESET_CONFIRM.
9 to Reserved
15
* If both forward and reverse flows are enabled or disabled, both forward
and reverse flows are integrated.
30 CLOCK_PER 86400.0 4 Specify the period at which a periodic reset is made.
[s]
31 PRE_TRIP 100000.0 4 Set an allowance applied before an integrated value exceeds the setpoint.
32 N_RESET 0.0 4 4 Indicates the number of resets in the range of 0 to 999999.
33 PCT_INCL 0.0[%] 4 4 The ratio of "the integrated values of the absolute values of the increments
whose status is Good" to the "integrated values of the absolute values of
the increments irrelevant to the status" (Equation).
34 GOOD_LIM 0.0[%] 4 The threshold value of the ratio of "the integrated values of the increments
whose status is Good" to all integrated values in which the status of OUT
is "Good".
35 UNCERT_LIM 0.0[%] 4 The threshold value of the ratio of "the integrated values of the increments
whose status is Good" to all the integrated values in which the status of
OUT is "Uncertain".
36 OP_CMD_INT 0 1 1 Operator command that resets integrated values.
37 OUTAGE_LIM 0.0 4 Maximum time for which values can be retained in the event of power
failure.
It does not effect the block operation.
38 RESET_ 0 2 2 Reset confirmation input, which is enabled when the Confirm reset option
CONFIRM of INTEG_OPTS is chosen
39 UPDATE_EVT --- Indicates event information if an update event occurs.
40 BLOCK_ALM --- Indicates alarm information if a block alarm occurs.
41 ACCUM_ 0.0 4 Accumulated integrated values (no extension parameter is reset)
TOTAL
IM 01C25T02-01E
<Appendix 3. Input Selector (IS) Block> A3-1
Appendix 3. Input Selector (IS) Block

The function of the Input Selector (IS) block is to automatically select one signal from multiple input signals
using a specified selection method.
The IS block is used for selective control in which one measured quantity is selected from multiple measured
quantities to be transmitted to the controller as a controlled variable. This feature is primarily used for
temperature control systems.
A3.1 Input Selector Function Block Schematic

The following shows the Input Selector function block schematic.
SELECTION
IN_1
Man
IN_2 MODE
First Good
IN_3 OUT
IN_4 Auto
IN_5
IN_6 MINIMUM SELECTED
IN_7
IN_8
DISABLE_1
MAXIMUM Configuration
DISABLE_2
DISABLE_3
STATUS_OPTS
DISABLE_4
DISABLE_5 MIDDLE
SELECT_TYPE
DISABLE_6
DISABLE_7
MIN_GOOD
DISABLE_8
AVERAGE
OP_SELECT
FA0301.ai
Figure A3.1 IS Block
Input Parameters (Input Terms)

IN_1 : Block input 1
DISABLE_1 : Selector switch 1 to disable input 1 from being selected
OP_SELECT : A parameter which can be set by an operator to forcibly employ the input of the selected number
IM 01C25T02-01E
Output Parameters (Computation or Selection Results)
OUT : Block output
SELECTED : Indicates the input number selected using the alternatives.
Other Parameters
OUT_RANGE : Sets the OUT range.
STATUS_OPTS : Option used to specify the handling of various statuses.
SELECT_TYPE : Determines the input selection algorithm.
MIN_GOOD : Parameter specifying the minimum required number of inputs with “good” status. If the
number of inputs that are “good” is less than the value of MIN_GOOD, input selection is
canceled.
Mode
O/S : Allows configuration change, but disables input value output.
Man : Allows internal processing, but the output value may vary depending on the definition of usage conditions.
Auto : Outputs the input value.
The Input Selector (IS) block offers a maximum of eight input alternatives and generates the output according
to the configured action. This block generally receives inputs from the Analog Input (AI) function block. The
function of the IS block is to select a maximum, minimum, middle, average, “first good,” or “latched good”
signal. The block combines parameter configuration (DISABLE_n) and option (“first good”) to give priority to
alternative(s) or to function as a rotary position switch. When used as a rotary position switch, the block can
receive operator inputs or switch information from connected inputs.
The IS block supports the concept of middle selection. This function outputs the average of two middle signals
if even multiple valid signals are configured or a middle signal if odd multiple valid signals are configured.
Application of the block is to supply a selected control signal in the forward path.
The SELECTED parameter is the 2nd output indicating which input has been selected using the algorithm.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A3.2 Input Section
A3.2.1 Mode Handling
The Input Selector block’s operations are determined by the mode (parameter name: MODE_BLK). The
following describes operations in each mode.
Supported Mode Role
O/S · System-stopped status.
(Out of Service) · Allows you to make changes to configuration.
Man · If you do not want to output the value and status from IN or if the
value or status thus output is not preferable, you can manually
transmit the value to OUT.
Auto · Automatic system operation status.
Valid Input
When the following conditions are satisfied, the value of IN_n becomes valid.
1) The QUALITY in each status of IN_n is either Good (NC), Good (C), or Uncertain*1, 3.
2) The values of DISABLE_n corresponding to each IN_n are OFF and the QUALITY in the status of which is
either Good (NC), Good (C), or Uncertain*1, 2.
3) The number of inputs that are “good” is greater than the value of MIN_GOOD*4.
Note:
*1: Uncertain is applicable when “Use Uncertain as Good” is selected in the STATUS_OPTS parameter.
*2: If the status of DISABLE_n is Bad or Uncertain, its quality is lower so that the status of IN_n is also defined as lower quality. When
DISABLE_n is ON, the value of IN_n becomes invalid. For the priority of DISABLE_n is higher than that of IN_n.
Status in SELECT_TYPE except OP_SELECT

QUALITY of DISABLE / IN Status IN
Good (NC) Valid
Good (C) Valid
Uncertain*1 Valid
Uncertain Invalid
Bad Invalid
Condition: The number of inputs that are “good” is greater than the value of MIN_GOOD.
*3: Priority of IN_n when the same value is input.

Priority Input
1:Highest
8:Lowest
1 IN_1
2 IN_2
3 IN_3
4 IN_4
5 IN_5
6 IN_6
7 IN_7
8 IN_8
*4: Refer to A3.2.2 for the details of MIN_GOOD.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A3.2.2 MIN_GOOD Handling
If there is no selectable input or if the number of selectable inputs is less than the value of MIN_GOOD,
SELECTED becomes “0.”
A case where the number of valid INs is less than the value of MIN_GOOD:
SELECTION
IN_1 = 23
IN_2 = 34.5
OUT = certain retained
IN_3 = 45 value that was
output previously
IN_4 = 2.34
IN_5 = 23.6
SELECTED = 0
IN_6 = 15.5
IN_7 = 32.5
IN_8 = 27.4
SELECT_TYPE = Middle
STATUS_OPTS
DISABLE_1 = ON
MIN_GOOD = 3
DISABLE_2 = ON
DISABLE_3 = OFF
DISABLE_4 = ON
DISABLE_5 = OFF
DISABLE_6 = ON
DISABLE_7 = ON
DISABLE_8 = ON
OP_SELECT = 1
FA0302.ai
Figure A3.2 Example (1)
This example restricts the valid inputs using DISABLE_n, and the inputs are enabled only at DISABLE_3 and
DISABLE_5. Because the effective number of MIN_GOOD is 3, the input specified by OP_SELECT will not be
output.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A3.3 Selection
The following processing is performed after completing input processing. If the number of valid inputs is less
than the value of MIN_GOOD, no input selection is made.
A3.3.1 OP_SELECT Handling

When a value other than “0” (that is, 1 to 8) is selected for OP_SELECT:
The IS block selects the input of the number specified by OP_SELECT regardless of the setting of SELECT_
TYPE, propagates the value of that input to OUT, and transmits the input number to SELECTED.
SELECTION
IN_1 = 23
IN_2 = 34.5
OUT = 45
IN_3 = 45
IN_4 = 2.34
IN_5 = 23.6
SELECTED = 3
IN_6 = 15.5
IN_7 = 32.5
IN_8 = 27.4
SELECT_TYPE = Minimum
DISABLE_1 = OFF STATUS_OPTS

MIN_GOOD = 1
DISABLE_2 = OFF
DISABLE_3 = OFF
DISABLE_4 = OFF
DISABLE_5 = OFF
DISABLE_6 = OFF
DISABLE_7 = OFF
DISABLE_8 = OFF
OP_SELECT = 3
FA0303.ai
In the above example, SELECT_TYPE is set to Minimum. However, because OP_SELECT specifies the value
and number of IN_3, the value and number of this specified IN are transmitted to OUT and SELECTED.
* Note: Even if the IN specified by OP_SELECT is an invalid input (the corresponding DISABLE parameter is ON or the IN’s status is
“bad”), the value and status of that IN are transmitted to OUT.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A3.3.2 SELECTION Handling
If the value of OP_SELECT is “0,” input selection using SELECT_TYPE is enabled.
When SELECT TYPE is “first good”

The IS block selects the input with the smallest input number among valid inputs and transmits the value of that
input to OUT. The number of the selected input is transmitted to SELECTED.
SELECTION
IN_1 = 23
IN_2 = 34.5
OUT = 34.5
IN_3 = 45
IN_4 = 2.34
IN_5 = 23.6
SELECTED = 2
IN_6 = 15.5
IN_7 = 32.5
IN_8 = 27.4
SELECT_TYPE = First Good
STATUS_OPTS
DISABLE_1 = ON
MIN_GOOD = 1
DISABLE_2 = OFF
DISABLE_3 = OFF
DISABLE_4 = OFF
DISABLE_5 = OFF
DISABLE_6 = OFF
DISABLE_7 = OFF
DISABLE_8 = OFF
OP_SELECT = 0
FA0304.ai
Because DISABLE_1 is ON, IN_1 is disabled, and IN_2 is selected for output. If DISABLE_1 is turned OFF,
the output changes from IN_2 to IN_1. That is, the valid IN with the smaller input number is always selected for
output.
IM 01C25T02-01E
When SELECT TYPE is “Minimum”
The IS block selects the input with the minimum value among valid inputs and transmits the value of that input
to OUT. The number of the selected input is transmitted to SELECTED.
SELECTION
IN_1 = 23
IN_2 = 34.5
OUT = 2.34
IN_3 = 45
IN_4 = 2.34
IN_5 = 23.6
SELECTED = 4
IN_6 = 15.5
IN_7 = 32.5
IN_8 = 27.4
SELECT_TYPE = Minimum
STATUS_OPTS
DISABLE_1 = OFF
MIN_GOOD = 1
DISABLE_2 = OFF
DISABLE_3 = OFF
DISABLE_4 = OFF
DISABLE_5 = OFF
DISABLE_6 = OFF
DISABLE_7 = OFF
DISABLE_8 = OFF
OP_SELECT = 0
FA0305.ai
IM 01C25T02-01E
When SELECT TYPE is “Maximum”
The IS block selects the input with the maximum value among valid inputs and transmits the value of that input
to OUT. The number of the selected input is transmitted to SELECTED.
SELECTION
IN_1 = 23
IN_2 = 34.5
OUT = 32.5
IN_3 = 45
IN_4 = 2.34
IN_5 = 23.6
SELECTED = 7
IN_6 = 15.5
IN_7 = 32.5
IN_8 = 27.4
SELECT_TYPE = Maximum
STATUS_OPTS
DISABLE_1 = OFF
MIN_GOOD = 1
DISABLE_2 = ON
DISABLE_3 = ON
DISABLE_4 = OFF
DISABLE_5 = OFF
DISABLE_6 = OFF
DISABLE_7 = OFF
DISABLE_8 = OFF
OP_SELECT = 0
FA0306.ai
Because DISABLE_2 and DISABLE_3 are ON, IN_2 and IN_3 are disabled, and the IN with the maximum
value among the remaining IN_n is selected for output. In the above example, since IN_7 has the maximum
value among the remaining valid INs, it is output.
IM 01C25T02-01E
When SELECT TYPE is “Middle”
If there is more than one valid input and the number of such input is an odd number, the value of the middle
input will be transmitted to OUT. If there is an even number of valid inputs, the average of the middle two inputs
is transmitted to OUT. If the average is used for OUT, the block transmits “0” to SELECTED, while it transmits
the number of the input used for the middle for other cases. If the number of valid inputs is 1, it is irrelevant to
selection by “Middle” selector action. The following shows an example of selection by “Middle” selector action.
If there is an even number of valid inputs:
SELECTION
IN_1 = 23
IN_2 = 34.5
OUT = 19.55
IN_3 = 45 (IN_5+IN_6)/2 = 19.55
IN_4 = 2.34
IN_5 = 23.6
SELECTED = 0
IN_6 = 15.5
IN_7 = 32.5
IN_8 = 27.4
STATUS_OPTS
DISABLE_1 = ON
DISABLE_2 = ON MIN_GOOD = 1
DISABLE_3 = OFF
DISABLE_4 = OFF
DISABLE_5 = OFF
DISABLE_6 = OFF
DISABLE_7 = ON
DISABLE_8 = ON
OP_SELECT = 0
FA0307.ai
Because DISABLE_1, DISABLE_2, DISABLE_7, and DISABLE_8 are ON, the corresponding IN_1, IN_2,
IN_7, and IN_8 are disabled and the remaining four INs are enabled. Furthermore, because IN_3 has the
maximum value and IN_4 has the minimum value among the valid INs, they are not selected and the average
of IN_5 and IN_6 inputs is output. When the average is selected for OUT, SELECTED is set to “0.”
IM 01C25T02-01E
If there is an odd number of valid inputs:
SELECTION
IN_1 = 23
IN_2 = 34.5
OUT = 23.6
IN_3 = 45
IN_4 = 2.34
IN_5 = 23.6
SELECTED = 5
IN_6 = 15.5
IN_7 = 32.5
IN_8 = 27.4
STATUS_OPTS
DISABLE_1 = OFF
MIN_GOOD = 1
DISABLE_2 = OFF
DISABLE_3 = OFF
DISABLE_4 = OFF
DISABLE_5 = OFF
DISABLE_6 = OFF
DISABLE_7 = OFF
DISABLE_8 = ON
OP_SELECT = 0
FA0308.ai
If the number of valid INs is an odd multiple, the IN with the middle value will be output. In the above example,
the IN_5 input having the middle value is output.
IM 01C25T02-01E
When SELECT TYPE is “Average”
The block calculates the average of the valid inputs and transmits it to OUT. The number of inputs used to
calculate its value is indicated in SELECTED.
SELECTION
IN_1 = 23
IN_2 = 34.5
OUT = 25.48
IN_3 = 45 (IN_1+···+IN_8)/8 = 25.48
IN_4 = 2.34
IN_5 = 23.6
SELECTED = 8
IN_6 = 15.5
IN_7 = 32.5
IN_8 = 27.4
SELECT_TYPE = Average
STATUS_OPTS
DISABLE_1 = OFF
DISABLE_2 = OFF MIN_GOOD = 1
DISABLE_3 = OFF
DISABLE_4 = OFF
DISABLE_5 = OFF
DISABLE_6 = OFF
DISABLE_7 = OFF
DISABLE_8 = OFF
OP_SELECT = 0
FA0309.ai
When SELECT TYPE is “Latched Good”

The valid input with the smaller input number is selected as an output and is held until it becomes invalid.
When it becomes invalid, the next valid input will be selected as an output regardless of the magnitude of the
value. Even if an input with the input number smaller than that of the currently selected input recovers, the
current selection is held.
Assuming that IN_2 is the valid input with the smallest input number, the order of input selection is IN_2 →
IN_3 → ...→ IN_8 → IN_1 → ....
If the power is turned OFF and then ON with SELECT TYPE set to “Latched Good,” input selection starts with
the IN that was selected before the power was turned OFF.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A3.4 Output Processing
A3.4.1 Handling of SELECTED
For the value output to SELECTED when OP_SELECT has been selected (that is, not “0”), the number
specified by OP_SELECT will be stored as is.
However, “0” is stored in the SELECTED in the following cases:
1. If there is no valid input;
2. If the value of MIN_GOOD is greater than the number of valid inputs;
3. If the input status is “bad” or “uncertain” when the value of OP_SELECT is anything other than “0”
(with the exception of the case where the “Uncertain as good” bit in STATUS_OPTS is set.);
4. If the value of OP_SELECT is greater than 8, which is the maximum number of inputs;
5. If the value is out of the SELECT_TYPE setting range when the value of OP_SELECT is zero.
As long as there is one valid input, even an invalid input can be selected for OP_SELECT.
If the number of valid inputs is greater than the value of MIN_GOOD, the number of the input (including an
invalid input) specified by OP_SELECT will be stored in SELECTED. Therefore, even if an invalid input is
selected, SELECTED does not become zero.
If no input is selected for OP_SELECT, the output of SELECTED will depend on SELECT_TYPE.
The Table A3.1 shows the value of SELECTED according to the number of valid inputs and SELECT_TYPE.
Table A3.1 Value of SELECTED According to Inputs
Value of SELECTED
Valid Inputs SELECT_TYPE =
SELECT_TYPE = SELECT_TYPE = SELECT_TYPE =
MINIMUM, MAXIMUM,
First Good MIDDLE AVERAGE
or Latched Good
None 0 (zero) 0 (zero) 0 (zero) 0 (zero)
1 # of IN with a smaller # of selected IN # of selected IN 1
Multiple INs value 0 (the average is taken) # of valid INs
(Even # of INs) (the average is taken)
Multiple INs # of IN with the middle
(Odd # of INs) value
Table A3.2 Value of SELECTED According to the Mode

O/S MAN AUTO
0 0 0 to 8
IM 01C25T02-01E
A3.4.2 OUT Processing
OUT is an output parameter used to send the value selected in the IS block to another function block.
The following describes OUT processing.
Table A3.3 Block Mode and Value
MODE Value
O/S · The previous value is output. (At startup, the initial value is
used).
Man · Writable (the operator may change the value.)
Value specified by MIN_GOOD > the number of · The previous value is output.
valid inputs · Not writable
If there is no valid input
If the input status is “bad” or “uncertain” when
the value of OP_SELECT is anything other than
“0” (with the exception of the case where the
“Uncertain as good” bit in STATUS_OPTS is set)
If the value of OP_SELECT is greater than 8, · Zero
which is the maximum number of inputs · Not writable
If OP_SELECT is enabled · The value of the selected input is output.
· Not writable
If the value is out of the SELECT_TYPE setting · The previous value is output.
range when the value of OP_SELECT is “0” · Not writable
If SELECT_TYPE is “First Good” · The value of a valid input with the smallest input number is
output.
· Not writable
A
u If SELECT_TYPE is “MINIMUM” · The minimum value among the values of the valid inputs is
t output.
o · Not writable
If SELECT_TYPE is “MAXIMUM” · The maximum value among the values of the valid inputs is
output.
· Not writable
If SELECT_TYPE is “MIDDLE” · Because two inputs are positioned in the middle of the values
(There is an even multiple number of valid inputs.) of even multiple valid inputs, the average of the values of
these two inputs is output.
· Not writable
If SELECT_TYPE is “MIDDLE” · The value of the input positioned in the middle of the values of
(There is an odd multiple number of valid inputs.) odd multiple valid inputs is output.
· Not writable
If SELECT_TYPE is “AVERAGE” · The value obtained by dividing the added value of the values
of valid inputs by the number of these inputs is output.
· Not writable
If SELECT_TYPE is “Latched Good” · The value of a valid input with the smallest input number is
output.
· Not writable
Table A3.4 Condition and Mode

Condition (Listed in priority sequence) Mode
If the Actual is in O/S O/S
If the “Uncertain if Man mode” bit in STATUS_OPTS is set and the Actual is in Man Man
If the “Uncertain if Man mode” bit in STATUS_OPTS is not set and the Actual is in Man Man
Values specified by MIN_GOOD > the number of valid inputs AUTO
If there is no valid input AUTO
If the input status is “bad” or “uncertain” when the value of OP_SELECT is anything other than “0”
AUTO
(with the exception of the case where the “Uncertain as good” bit in STATUS_OPTS is set)
If the value of OP_SELECT is greater than 8, which is the maximum number of inputs AUTO
If OP_SELECT has selected IN whose status is “bad” or “uncertain” AUTO
If the value is out of the SELECT_TYPE setting range when the value of OP_SELECT is “0” AUTO
IM 01C25T02-01E
A3.4.3 STATUS_OPTS
Bit Description
Use Uncertain as Good Causes all inputs (OP_SELECT, IN_n, and DISABLE_n) the status of which is “uncertain,” to
be handled as “good” (NC) status inputs and the others to be handled as ”bad” status inputs.
Uncertain if Man mode When the mode is Man, the status of OUT is interpreted as “uncertain.”
(This does not apply to SELECTED.)
A3.5 List of Input Selector Block Parameters

Relative Write View
Parameter Valid Range Initial Value Description / Remarks
Index Mode 1 2 3 4
0 BLOCK_ Block TAG: “IS” Information relating to this function block, such as block
HEADER Tag=O/S tag, DD revision, and execution time.
1 ST_REV ----- ----- 2 2 2 2 Indicates the revision level of the set parameters
associated with the IS block. If a setting is modified, this
revision is updated. It is used to check for parameter
changes, etc.
2 TAG_DESC Space (32 A universal parameter that stores comments describing
characters) tag information.
3 STRATEGY 1 2 A universal parameter intended for use by the high-level
system to identify function blocks.
4 ALERT_KEY 1-255 1 1 Key information used to identify the location where an
alert has occurred. Generally, this parameter is used
by the high-level system to identify specific areas in a
plant that are under the control of specific operators,
to distinguish necessary alarms only. This is one of the
universal parameters.
5 MODE_BLK 4 4 A universal parameter representing the operation status
of the IS block. It consists of the Actual, Target, Permitted,
and Normal modes.
6 BLOCK_ ----- ----- 2 2 Indicates the error status relating to the Input Selector
ERR function block.
The bit used by this function block is as follows: Bit 15:
O/S mode.
7 OUT MAN 0 5 5 Block output.
8 OUT_ 11 Set the range of OUT.
RANGE
9 GRANT_ 0 2 The parameter used to check if various operations
DENY have been executed. The bits in the GRANT parameter
corresponding to various operations are set before any
of them are executed. After the operations are complete,
the DENY parameter is checked to find out if any bit
corresponding to the relevant operation has been set.
If no bit is set, it is evident that the operations have been
10 STATUS_ O/S “Use Uncertain 0 2 A user-selectable option available for status handling in
OPTS as good” and the block.
“Uncertain if
Manual” only
11 IN_1 0 5 5 Input 1
12 IN_2 0 5 5 Input 2
13 IN_3 0 5 5 Input 3
14 IN_4 0 5 5 Input 4
15 DISABLE_1 0, 1 0 2 2 Selector switch to disable input 1 from being selected.
19 SELECT_ 1-6 0 1 Specifies the input selection algorithm.
TYPE
IM 01C25T02-01E
Relative Write View
Parameter Valid Range Initial Value Description / Remarks
Index Mode 1 2 3 4
20 MIN_GOOD 0-8 0 1 Parameter specifying the minimum required number
of inputs with “good” status If the number of inputs with
“good” status is less than the value of MIN_GOOD, input
selection is canceled.
21 SELECTED 0-8 0 2 2 Indicates the number of the selected input. However,
it indicates the number of inputs used to calculate the
average if SELECT_TYPE = Average.
If no input is selectable or if there are multiple inputs, it
becomes “0” (none).
22 OP_ 0-8 0 2 2 A parameter to forcibly employ the input of a selected
SELECT number (Operator-settable).
23 UPDATE_ ----- ----- Indicates event information if an update event (setting
EVT change) occurs.
24 BLOCK_ ----- ----- Indicates alarm information if a block alarm occurs.
ALM
25 IN_5 0 5 5 Input 5
26 IN_6 0 5 5 Input 6
27 IN_7 0 5 5 Input 7
28 IN_8 0 5 5 Input 8
IM 01C25T02-01E
A3.6 Application Example
The following describes the temperature control system of a fixed bed-type reactor. In this case, there are
instances where the point showing the maximum temperature changes due to catalytic deterioration, raw
material flow, etc. Therefore, a large number of measurement points are provided, and the maximum value
obtained among these measurement points is input to the controller to control reactor temperature.
Raw material
AI1
Catalytic reactor
AI2
IS
AI3
PID
AO AI4
Refrigerant
Product
FA0310.ai
Figure A3.10 Temperature Control System of a Fixed Bed-type Reactor
AI1 IS
AI PID AO
AI1
AI1
OUT
OUT
OUT IN_1 4 OUT IN OUT CAS_IN
OUT
BKCAL_IN BKCAL_OUT
AI1 AI4
FA0311.ai
Figure A3.11 Example of Scheduling
AI1: Temperature 1, AI2: Temperature 2, AI3: Temperature 3, AI4: Temperature 4

IS: SELECT_TYPE = MAX
Basic operations and work sequence:

1. The IS block obtains values and status information from AI.
2. The block selects the AI information using the alternatives.
3. The block displays and outputs the information selected by SELECTED.
IM 01C25T02-01E
<Appendix 4. Arithmetic (AR) Block> A4-1
Appendix 4. Arithmetic (AR) Block

The Arithmetic (AR) block switches two main inputs of different measurement ranges seamlessly and
combines the result with three auxiliary inputs through the selected compensation function (10 types) to
calculate the output.
A4.1 Arithmetic Function Block Schematic

The diagram below shows the Arithmetic block schematic.
RANGE_LO ARITH_TYPE
RANGE_HI BAL_TIME
IN RANGE OUT_HI_LIM
PV
EXTENSION
FUNCTION MAN·O/S
IN_LO
PRE_OUT
t_1 func
IN_1 (IN_1+BIAS_IN_1)*GAIN_IN_1 ALGORITHM TYPE * GAIN OUT
+ BIAS
t_2
IN_2 (IN_2+BIAS_IN_2)*GAIN_IN_2
OUT_LO_LIM
t_3
IN_3 (IN_3+BIAS_IN_3)*GAIN_IN_3
COMP_LO_LIM
BIAS_IN_i COMP_HI_LIM
GAIN_IN_i
FA0401.ai
Figure A4.1 AR Block
The Arithmetic block is divided into three sections:

• Input section: Makes a go/no-go decision on the use of an input value, switches the range, and
determines the PV status.
• Computation section: Makes calculations through ARITH_TYPE.
• Output section: Applies gain multiplication and bias addition to the calculated result to perform limitation
processing for output.
* The range extension function compensates the IN and IN_LO input values when two devices with different
ranges are connected, to make smooth input switching.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A4.2 Input Section PV is a parameter with status information, and PV
status is determined by the value of “g.”
There are five inputs: IN and IN_LO main inputs If “g” < 0.5 → The status of IN_LO is used.
and IN_1, IN_2, and IN_3 auxiliary inputs. If “g” ≥ 0.5 → The status of IN is used.
IN and IN_LO are intended to connect devices with Determination of the status is made with a
different measurement ranges and allow the use hysteresis of 10% provided for 0.5.
of switching a measurement range by selecting If RANGE_LO > RANGE_HI, the statuses of PV
the measuring device. However, because there and OUT are “Bad. Configuration Error.” Then
are slight differences between IN and IN_LO “Configuration Error” is output to BLOCK_ERR.
values even when the same item is measured,
instantaneous switching causes abrupt changes in If there is only one main input, the input is
the output. incorporated into the computation section as is, not
taking into account RANGE_HI and RANGE_LO.
To prevent this phenomenon, the Arithmetic block
uses a function known as range extension to Example:
compensate the IN and IN_LO values between Assuming that
RANGE_HI and RANGE_LO. This enables the RANGE_LO 20
input to be switched smoothly. The result of the RANGE_HI 300
range extension function is substituted into PV to be
used for calculations. the following are established:
IN = 310, IN_LO = 20
A4.2.1 Main Inputs → PV = 310
IN = 230, IN_LO = 20
The range extension function determines the PV → g = (230 - 20) / (300 - 20) = 0.75
value in the following order: PV = 0.75 × 230 + (1 - 0.75) × 20 = 177.5
1. If IN ≥ RANGE_HI → PV = IN IN = 90, IN_LO = 20
2. If IN ≤ RANGE_LO → PV = IN_LO → g = (90 - 20) / (300 - 20) = 0.25
3. If RANGE_HI > IN > RANGE_LO → PV PV = 0.25 × 230 + (1 + 0.25) × 20 = 37.5
= g × IN + (1- g) × IN_LO IN = 19, IN_LO = 10
g = (IN - RANGE_LO) / (RANGE_HI - RANGE_ → PV = 10
LO)
RANGE_HI and RANGE_LO are threshold A4.2.2 Auxiliary Inputs
values for switching two main inputs There are bias and gain parameters for the IN_1,
seamlessly. IN_2, and IN_3 auxiliary inputs. The following
shows the equation using them.
PV = IN_LO PV=g×IN+(1-g)×IN_LO PV =IN
t_i = (IN_i + BIAS_IN_i) × GAIN_IN_i
The bias parameter is used for calculating absolute
Formula based on temperature or absolute pressure, while the gain
(1) and (2) (2): Range for IN parameter is used for normalization of square root
(1): Range for IN_LO extraction.
RANGE_LO RANGE_HI IN
FA0402.ai
Figure A4.2 Range Extension Function and PV
IM 01C25T02-01E
A4.2.3 INPUT_OPTS A4.2.4 Relationship between the Main
Inputs and PV
INPUT_OPTS has an option that handles an input
with “uncertain” or “bad” status as a “good” status The value and PV status are determined by the
input. statuses of two main inputs, INPUT_OPTS, and
Bit Function RANGE_LO and RANGE_HI.
0 Handles IN as a “good” status input if its status • If the statuses of two main inputs are both
is “uncertain.” “good” or anything other than “good”
1 Handles IN_LO as a “good” status input if its See A4.2.1, Main Inputs.
status is “uncertain.”
2 Handles IN_1 as a “good” status input if its • If only one of two main inputs has “good” status
status is “uncertain.” after application of INPUT_OPTS, the PV value
3 Handles IN_1 as a “good” status input if its
is determined as follows:
status is “bad.”
• If the status of IN is “good” and that of
status is “uncertain.” “IN_LO” is anything other than “good”
5 Handles IN_2 as a “good” status input if its IN > RANGE_LO → PV = IN
status is “bad.” IN ≤ RANGE_LO → See A4.2.1.
6 Handles IN_3 as a “good” status input if its • If the status of IN is anything other than
status is “uncertain.”
“good” and that of “IN_LO” is “good”
status is “bad.” IN_LO < RANGE_HI → PV = IN_LO
8 to 15 Reserved IN_LO ≥ RANGE_H → See A4.2.1.
If the status of IN is “good” and that of “IN_LO” is

There are options called “IN Use uncertain” and anything other than “good”
“IN_LO Use uncertain” for the IN and IN_LO inputs.
When these options are valid, IN and IN_LO are PV = g × IN + (1-g) × IN_LO PV = IN
internally interpreted as “good” IN and IN_LO even
if their statuses are “uncertain.” (There is no option IN
RANGE_LO
for “bad” status.)
For the IN_1, IN_2, and IN_3 auxiliary inputs, there
are options known as “IN_i Use uncertain” and “IN_i If the status of IN is anything other than “good”
and that of “IN_LO” is “good”
Use bad.” If these options are valid, an IN_i with
“uncertain” or “bad” status is internally interpreted
PV = IN_LO PV = g × IN + (1-g) × IN_LO
as a “good” IN_i.
IN_LO
* The exception is that if the input status is “Bad. RANGE_HI
Not Connected,” INPUT_OPTS does not apply and FA0403.ai
the input is considered “bad” as is.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A4.3 Computation Section A4.3.2 Compensated Values
In computing equations 1) to 5) in A4.3.1, the value
A4.3.1 Computing Equations “f” is restricted by the COMP_HI_LIM or COMP_
This subsection shows computing equations used LO_LIM parameter. In this case, the value “f” is
in the computation section: treated as follows:
1) Flow compensation (linear)
If “f” > COMP_HI_LIM, f = COMP_HI_LIM
func = PV × f
f = (t_1 / t_2) If “f” < COMP_LO_LIM, f = COMP_LO_LIM
2) Flow compensation (square root) A4.3.3 Average Calculation

func = PV × f In computing equation 6) in A4.3.1, the average
f = sqrt(t_1 / t_2 / t_3) of input value is calculated. Here, it is necessary
3) Flow compensation (approximate expression) to obtain the number of inputs, N. For this,
func = PV × f determination is made to see if the sub-status of
f = sqrt(t_1 × t_2 × t_3 × t_3) each input is “Not Connected.” Note that the main
inputs may be accepted if IN or IN_LO is not in “Not
4) Quantity of heat calculation Connected” sub-status. In this case, the number of
func = PV × f inputs that are not in “Not Connected” sub-status is
f = (t_1 - t_2) regarded as “N.”
5) Multiplication and division
func = PV × f
f = ((t_1 / t_2) + t_3)
A4.4 Output Section
After executing the computing equation, the block
6) Average calculation
applies a gain to the calculated result and then adds
func = (PV + t_1 + t_2 + t_3) / N
a bias to it.
where N: number of inputs
It then substitutes the result into PRE_OUT and
7) Summation
if the mode is in AUTO, the value of PRE_OUT is
func = PV + t_1 + t_2 + t_3
taken as OUT.
8) Polynomial computation
PRE_OUT = func × gain + bias
func = PV + t_12 + t_23 + t_34
where func: result of computing equation
9) HTG-level compensation execution
func = (PV - t_1) / (PV - t_2) OUT = PRE_OUT (when the mode is in AUTO)
10) Polynomial computation Next, the block performs limitation processing
func = PV + GAIN_IN_1 × PV2 + GAIN_IN_2 × (OUT_HI_LIM, OUT_LOW_LIM). This processing
PV3 + GAIN_IN_3 × PV4 is described as follows with respect to the value of
PRE_OUT.
* Precaution for computation If PRE_OUT > OUT_HI_LIM:
Division by “0”: If a value is divided by “0,” the PRE_OUT = OUT_HI_LIM
calculation result is interpreted as The “high limited” processing is applied to the
1037 and, depending with core, a status of PRE_OUT.
plus sign is added to it.
If PRE_OUT < OUT_LO_LIM:
Negative square root: The square root of an
PRE_OUT = OUT_LO_LIM
absolute value is extracted and a
The “low limited” processing is applied to the
minus sign is added to it.
status of PRE_OUT.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A4.4.1 Mode Handling A4.4.2 Status Handling
Mode Output The setting of INPUT_OPTS is applied to the input
Auto OUT = PRE_OUT status. When INPUT_OPTS is applied, there are
MAN For OUT, the OUT value in the Auto mode just cases where the PV status becomes “good” even if
O/S before change to MAN or O/S is retained. the status of main inputs is “uncertain” or the status
of auxiliary inputs is “uncertain” or “bad.”
In the Manual mode (including O/S), the value of
OUT in the Auto mode just before a change to the The PV status is classified by the following:
Manual mode is held or the value written to OUT is • If the statuses of two main inputs are both
output. “good” or anything other than “good”:
If the mode is switched from Manual to Auto, the See A4.2.1, Main Inputs.
value of OUT that is linearly changed with respect to • If only one of the statuses of two main inputs is
the value of PRE_OUT for time set by BAL_TIME is “good”:
output. The PRE_OUT always indicates the results • If the status of IN is “good” and that of
of calculation. After elapse of BAL_TIME, OUT = “IN_LO” is anything other than “good”
PRE_OUT is established. Note that if the value IN > RANGE_LO
of BAL_TIME is changed during linear change → The status of IN applies.
of the OUT value, it is not reflected. The value of IN ≤ RANGE_LO
BAL_TIME will be reflected only after the mode is → See A4.2.1, Main Inputs
changed the next time.
• If the status of IN is anything other than
“good” and that of “IN_LO” is “good”
AUTO MAN AUTO
IN_LO < RANGE_H
→ The status of IN_LO applies.
IN_LO ≥ RANGE_HI
→ See A4.2.1, Main Inputs
The exception is that if RANGE_LO > RANGE_HI,
the PV status is made “Bad. Configuration Error.”
The input status irrelevant to the computing
equation selected by ARITH_TYPE will be ignored
BAL_TIME
and does not affect other statuses. The statuses
of outputs (OUT.Status and PRE_OUT.Status) are
PRE_OUT
Case of BAL_TIME = 5 seconds interpreted as the status of the worst input among
OUT
FA0404.ai the statuses of PV and auxiliary inputs (IN_1,
The value of OUT is represented by the following IN_2, and IN_3) to which INPUT_OPTS has been
equation. applied.
yn = yn - 1 + (xn - yn - 1) / (α - n) Example:
α = (T / tc) + 1 Case 1 Case 2 Case 3
*: The value of T/tc truncates digits to the right of PV Good
the decimal point. IN_1 Unceriain
IN_2 Bad
where y: OUT IN_3 Bad
INPUT_ IN_1 Handled as a
x: PRE_OUT OPTS “good” input
No option
tc: period of execution if its status is
T: BAL_TIME “uncertain.”
n: period IN_2 Handled as a “good” input
No option
if its status is “bad.”
IN_3 No option
ARITH_TYPE 1) Flow compensation (linear) in
A4.3.1, “Computing Equations”
OUT.Status Good Uncertain Bad
IM 01C25T02-01E
A4.5 List of the Arithmetic Block Parameters
Relative Write Valid Initial View
Parameter Description / Remarks
Index Mode Range Value 1 2 3 4
0 BLOCK_ O/S TAG=“AR” Information relating to this function block, such as block tag, DD
HEADER revision, and execution time.
1 ST_REV 0 2 2 2 2 Indicates the revision level of the set parameters associated with the
Arithmetic block. If a setting is modified, this revision is updated. It is
used to check for parameter changes, etc.
2 TAG_DESC Space (32 A universal parameter that stores comments describing tag
characters) information.
3 STRATEGY 1 2 A universal parameter intended for use by a high-level system to
identify function blocks.
4 ALERT_KEY 1-255 1 1 Key information used to identify the location at which an alert has
occurred.
Generally, this parameter is used by a high-level system to identify
specific areas in a plant that are under the control of specific
operators, to separate necessary alerts only. This is one of the
universal parameters.
5 MODE_BLK AUTO 4 4 A universal parameter representing the operation status of the
Arithmetic block. It consists of the Actual, Target, Permitted, and
Normal modes.
6 BLOCK_ 0 2 2 Indicates the error status relating to the Arithmetic block.
ERR The bit used by this function block is as follows:
Bit 1: Block Configuration Error
Bit 15: O/S mode
7 PV 0 5 5 The result of a range extension function is substituted into this.
When viewed from the computing equation, PV is the main input.
8 OUT MAN 0 5 5 Block output.
9 PRE_OUT 0 5 5 Always indicates the calculation result. The value is substituted into
10 PV_SCALE O/S 11 OUT in Auto mode.
11 OUT_ 11 Indicates PV scaling (for making a memo).
RANGE Output scaling for the host (for making a memo).
12 GRANT_ 0 2 The parameter used to check if various operations have been
DENY executed. The bits in the GRANT parameter corresponding to
various operations are set before any of them are executed. After
the operations are complete, the DENY parameter is checked to
find out if any bit corresponding to the relevant operation has been
set. If no bit has been set, it is evident that the operations have been
13 INPUT_ 0 2 Determines whether an input is used as a “good” input when the
OPTS input status is "bad" or “uncertain.”
Bit Function
0 Handles IN as “good” input if its status is “uncertain.”
1 Handles IN_LO as “good” input if its status is “uncertain.”
2 Handles IN_1 as “good” input if its status is “uncertain.”
3 Handles IN_1 as “good” input if its status is “bad.”
8 to 15 Reserved
14 IN 0 5 Input block.
15 IN_LO 0 5 Input for a low-range transmitter.
This is used for the range extension function.
16 IN_1 0 5 Auxiliary input 1
19 RANGE_HI 0 4 High limit for switching to a high-range transmitter by the range
extension function.
20 RANGE_LO 0 4 Low limit for switching to a low-range transmitter by the range
extension function.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Relative Write Valid Initial View
Parameter Description / Remarks
Index Mode Range Value 1 2 3 4
21 BIAS_IN_1 0 4 IN_1 bias
22 GAIN_IN_1 0 4 IN_1 gain
27 COMP_HI_ +INF 4 High limit of compensation factor f.
LIM
28 COMP_LO_ -INF 4 Low limit of compensation factor f.
LIM
29 ARITH_ 1 to 10 0x01 1 Computation algorithm identification no.
TYPE Value Selection Name Description
1 Flow compensation, linear Flow compensation (linear)
2 Flow compensation, square Flow compensation (square
root root)
3 Flow compensation, Flow compensation
approximate (approximate expression)
4 BTU flow (*) Quantity of heat calculation
5 Traditional Multiply Divide Multiplication and division
6 Average Average calculation
7 Traditional summer Summation
8 Fourth order Polynomial, 4th-order (auxiliary input)
Type 1 polynomial computation
9 HTG level compensation (*) HTG-level compensation
10 Fourth order Polynomial, 4th-order (main input)
Type 2 polynomial computation
* BTU stands for British thermal unit.

HTG stands for hydrostatic tank gauging.
30 BAL_TIME More 0 4 Time taken to return to the set value.
than 0
31 BIAS 0 4 Bias value used to calculate the output.
32 GAIN 1 4 Gain value used to calculate the output.
33 OUT_HI_ +INF 4 Maximum output value.
LIM
34 OUT_LO_ -INF 4 Minimum output value.
LIM
35 UPDATE_ Indicates event information if an update event (setting change)
EVT occurs.
36 BLOCK_ Indicates alarm information if a block alarm occurs.
ALM
IM 01C25T02-01E
<Appendix 5. PID Block> A5-1
Appendix 5. PID Block

A PID block performs the PID control computation based on the deviation of the measured value (PV) from the
setpoint (SV), and is generally used for constant-setpoint and cascaded-setpoint control.
A5.1 Function Diagram

The figure below depicts the function diagram of a PID block.
BKCAL_OUT BKCAL_IN
RCAS_OUT FF_VAL ROUT_IN ROUT_OUT
CAS_IN SP
Setpoint Bypass Feed-forward Output OUT
RCAS_IN
PID Control
PV Computation
IN Input Filter
Data Status
Management
Alarm
Mode Control
Processing
Output Tracking
TRK_IN_D
TRK_VAL
FA0501.ai
Figure A5.1 PID Block
A5.2 Functions of PID Block

The table below shows the functions provided in a PID block.
Function Description
PID control computation Computes the control output in accordance with the PID control algorithm.
Control output Converts the change in control output ΔMV to the manipulated value MV that is to be actually output.
Switching of direction of Switches over the direction of control action between direct and reverse, i.e., the direction of changes in
control action the control output depending on the changes in the deviation.
Control action bypass When the bypass is on, the value of the SP is scaled to the range of the OUT and output as the OUT.
Feed-forward Adds the value of the FF_VAL (input to the PID block) to the output from the PID computation.
Measured-value tracking Equalizes the setpoint SP to the measured value PV.
Setpoint limiters Limit the value of setpoint SP within the preset upper and lower levels as well as limit the rate of change
when the PID block is in Auto mode.
External-output tracking Performs the scaling of the value of TRK_VAL to the range of the OUT and outputs it as the OUT.
Mode change Changes the block mode between 8 modes: O/S, IMan, LO, Man, Auto, Cas, RCas, ROut.
Bumpless transfer Prevents a sudden change in the control output OUT at changes in block mode and at switching of the
connection from the control output OUT to the cascaded secondary function block.
Initialization and manual Changes the block mode to IMan and suspends the control action when the specified condition is met.
fallback
Manual fallback Changes the block mode to Man and aborts the control action.
Auto fallback Changes the block mode to Auto when it is Cas, and continues the control action with the setpoint set by
the operator.
Mode shedding upon Changes the block mode in accordance with the SHED_OPT setting upon a computer failure.
computer failure
Alarm processing Generates block alarms and process alarms, and performs event updates.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A5.3 Parameters of PID Block
NOTE: In the table below, the Write column shows the modes in which the respective parameters can be
written. A blank in the Write column indicates that the corresponding parameter can be written in all modes of
the PID block. A dash (-) indicates that the corresponding parameter cannot be written in any mode.
Parameter Default
Index Write Valid Range Description
Name (factory setting)
0 Block Header TAG: “PID” Block Tag Same as that for an AI block.
= O/S
1 ST_REV — Same as that for an AI block.
2 TAG_DESC Space Same as that for an AI block.
(32 characters)
3 STRATEGY 1 Same as that for an AI block.
4 ALERT_KEY 1 1 to 255 Same as that for an AI block.
5 MODE_BLK
6 BLOCK_ERR — Same as that for an AI block.
7 PV — Measured value; the non-dimensional value that is
converted from the input (IN) value based on the
PV_SCALE values and filtered.
8 SP 0 AUTO PV_SCALE ±10% Setpoint
9 OUT MAN Output
10 PV_SCALE 100 O/S Upper and lower scale limit values used for scaling of
0 the input (IN) value.
1342(%)
1
11 OUT_SCALE 100 O/S Upper and lower scale limit values used for scaling
0 of the control output (OUT) value to the values in the
1342(%) engineering unit.
1
12 GRANT_DENY 0 AUTO Same as that for an AI block.
13 CONTROL_ 0 O/S Setting for control action. See Section A5.13 for details.
OPTS
14 STATUS_OPTS 0 O/S See Section A5.15 for details.
15 IN 0 Controlled-value input.
16 PV_FTIME 0 AUTO Non-negative Time constant (in seconds) of the first-order lag filter
applied to IN.
17 BYPASS 1 (off) MAN 1, 2 Whether to bypass the control computation.
1 (off): Do not bypass.
2 (on): Bypass.
18 CAS_IN 0 Cascade setpoint
19 SP_RATE_DN +INF Positive Rate-of-decrease limit for setpoint (SP).
20 SP_RATE_UP -INF Positive Rate-of-increase limit for setpoint (SP).
21 SP_HI_LIM 100 PV_SCALE ±10% Upper limit for setpoint (SP).
22 SP_LO_LIM 0 PV_SCALE ±10% Lower limit for setpoint (SP).
23 GAIN 1 Proportional gain (= 100 / proportional band).
24 RESET 10 Integration time (seconds).
25 BAL_TIME 0 Positive Unused
26 RATE 0 Positive Derivative time (seconds).
27 BKCAL_IN 0 Read-back of control output.
28 OUT_HI_LIM 100 OUT_SCALE ±10% Upper limit for control output (OUT).
29 OUT_LO_LIM 0 OUT_SCALE ±10% Lower limit for control output (OUT).
30 BKCAL_HYS 0.5 (%) 0 to 50% Hysteresis for release from a limit for OUT.status.
31 BKCAL_OUT 0 — Read-back value to be sent to the BKCAL_IN in the
upper block.
32 RCAS_IN 0 Remote setpoint set from a computer, etc.
33 ROUT_IN 0 Remote control output value set from a computer, etc.
34 SHED_OPT 0 Action to be performed in the event of mode shedding.
SHED_OPT defines the changes to be made to MODE.
BLK.target and MODE.BLK.actual when the value of
RCAS_IN.status or ROUT_IN.status becomes Bad if
MODE_BLK.actual = RCas or ROut.
See Section A5.17.1 for details.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Parameter Default
Index Write Valid Range Description
Name (factory setting)
35 RCAS_OUT 0 — Remote setpoint sent to a computer, etc.
36 ROUT_OUT 0 — Remote control output value.
37 TRK_SCALE 100 MAN Upper and lower scale limits used to convert the output
0 tracking value (TRK_VAL) to non-dimensional.
1342
1
38 TRK_IN_D 0 Switch for output tracking. See Section A5.12 for
details.
39 TRK_VAL 0 Output tracking value (TRK_VAL).
When MODE_BLK.actual = LO, the value scaled from
the TRK_VAL value is set in OUT.
40 FF_VAL 0 Feedforward input value.
The FF_VAL value is scaled to a value with the same
scale as for OUT, multiplied by the FF_GAIN value, and
then added to the output of the PID computation.
41 FF_SCALE 100 MAN Scale limits used for converting the FF_VAL value to a
0 non-dimensional value.
1342
1
42 FF_GAIN 0 MAN Gain for FF_VAL.
43 UPDATE_EVT — Same as that for an AI block.
44 BLOCK_ALM — Same as that for an AI block.
45 ALARM_SUM Enable Same as that for an AI block.
46 ACK_OPTION 0xFFFF Same as that for an AI block.
47 ALARM_HYS 0.5% 0 to 50% Hysteresis for alarm detection and resetting to prevent
each alarm from occurring and recovering repeatedly
within a short time.
48 HI_HI_PRI 0 0 to 15 Priority order of HI_HI_ALM alarm.
49 HI_HI_LIM +INF PV_SCALE Setting for HI_HI_ALM alarm.
50 HI_PRI 0 0 to 15 Priority order of HI_ALM alarm.
51 HI_LIM +INF PV_SCALE Setting for HI_ALM alarm.
52 LO_PRI 0 0 to 15 Priority order of LO_ALM alarm.
53 LO_LIM -INF PV_SCALE Setting for LO_ALM alarm.
54 LO_LO_PRI 0 0 to 15 Priority order of LO_LO_ALM alarm.
55 LO_LO_LIM -INF PV_SCALE Setting for LO_LO_ALM alarm.
56 DV_HI_PRI 0 0 to 15 Priority order of DV_HI_ALM alarm.
57 DV_HI_LIM +INF Setting for DV_HI_ALM alarm.
58 DV_LO_PRI 0 0 to 15 Priority order of DV_LO_ALM alarm.
59 DV_LO_LIM -INF Setting for DV_LO_ALM alarm.
60 HI_HI_ALM — — Alarm that is generated when the PV value has
exceeded the HI_HI_LIM value and whose priority
order* is defined in HI_HI_PRI.
* Priority order: Only one alarm is generated at a time.
When two or more alarms occur at the same
time, the alarm having the highest priority order is
generated.
When the PV value has decreased below [HI_HI_
LIM - ALM_HYS], HI_HI_ALM is reset.
61 HI_ALM — — As above
62 LO_ALM — — As above
Reset when the PV value has increased above
[LO_LIM + ALM_HYS].
63 LO_LO_ALM — — As above
64 DV_HI_ALM — — Alarm that is generated when the value of [PV - SP] has
exceeded the DV_HI_LIM value. Other features are the
same as HI_HI_ALM.
65 DV_LO_ALM — — Alarm that is generated when the value of [PV - SP] has
decreased below the DV_LO_LIM value. Other features
are the same as LO_LO_ALM.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A5.4 PID Computation Details A5.4.2 PID Control Parameters
The table below shows the PID control parameters.
A5.4.1 PV-proportional and -derivative
Type PID (I-PD) Control Algorithm Parameter Description Valid Range
GAIN Proportional gain 0.05 to 20
For PID control, the PID block employs the PV- RESET Integral time 0.1 to 10,000 (seconds)
proportional and PV-derivative type PID control RATE Derivative time 0 to infinity (seconds)
algorithm (referred to as the I-PD control algorithm)
in Auto and RCas mode. The I-PD control algorithm
A5.5 Control Output
ensures control stability against sudden changes in
the setpoint, such as when the user enters a new The final control output value, OUT, is computed
setpoint value. At the same time, the I-PD algorithm based on the change in control output ΔMVn, which
ensures excellent controllability by performing is calculated at each control period in accordance
proportional, integral, and derivative control with the aforementioned algorithm. The PID block
actions in response to changes of characteristics in an EJX performs the velocity type output action
in the controlled process, changes in load, and for the control output.
occurrences of disturbances.
A5.5.1 Velocity Type Output Action
In Cas mode, PV derivative type PID control
algorithm (referred to as the PI-D control algorithm) The PID block determines the value of the new
is employed in order to obtain better performance control output OUT by adding the change in control
against the changes in the setpoint. The algorithm output calculated in the current control period,
is automatically switched by the block according ΔMVn, to the current read-back value of the MV,
to the mode. A basic form of each algorithm is MVRB (BKCAL_IN).
expressed in the equation below. This action can be expressed as:
I-PD Control Algorithm (in Auto / RCas mode) ΔMVn’ = ΔMVn * (OUT_SCALE. EU100 – OUT_
∆T Td SCALE. EU_0) / (PV_SCALE. EU_100 – PV_
∆MVn = K{∆PVn + (PVn - SPn) + ∆(∆PVn)}
Ti ∆T SCALE. EU_0)
PI-D Control Algorithm (in Cas mode)
(Direct Acting is False in CONTROL_OPTS)
∆MVn = K{∆(PVn - SPn) + ∆T (PVn - SPn) OUT = BKCAL_IN – ΔMVn’
Ti
Td (Direct Acting is True in CONTROL_OPTS)
+ ∆(∆PVn)}
∆T OUT = BKCAL_IN + ΔMVn’
Where,
ΔMVn = change in control output A5.6 Direction of Control Action
ΔPVn = change in measured (controlled) The direction of the control action is determined by
value = PVn - PVn-1 the Direct Acting setting in CONTROL_OPTS.
ΔT = control period = period_of_execution
in Block Header Value of Direct
Resulting Action
Acting
K = proportional gain = GAIN (= 100/
True The output increases when the input
proportional band) PV is greater than the setpoint SP.
Ti = integral time = RESET False The output decreases when the input
Td = derivative time = RATE PV is greater than the setpoint SP.
The subscripts, n and n-1, represent the time

of sampling such that PVn and PVn-1 denote
the PV value sampled most recently and the PV
value sampled at the preceding control period,
respectively.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A5.7 Control Action Bypass A5.9 Block Modes
The PID control computation can be bypassed so The block mode is set in the parameter MODE-
as to set the SP value in the control output OUT as BLK.
shown below. Setting BYPASS to “On” bypasses
MODE_ Target Stipulates the target mode to which
the PID control computation. BLK the PID block transfers.
BYPASS Actual Indicates the current mode of the
PID block.
Output OUT Permitted Stipulates all the modes that the
PID block can enter. The PID
block is prohibited to enter any
CAS_IN mode other than those set in this
Setpoint Feed- element.
RCAS_IN Control
forward
SP Normal Stipulates the mode in which the
PID block normally resides.
IN Filter PV
FA0502.ai There are eight modes for a PID block as shown
below.
A5.8 Feed-forward Block

Description
Mode
Feed-forward is an action to add a compensation ROut Remote output mode, in which the PID block
output signal FF_VAL to the output of the PID outputs the value set in ROUT_IN.
control computation, and is typically used for feed- RCas Remote cascade mode, in which the PID
block carries out the PID control computation
forward control. The figure below illustrates the
based on the setpoint (SP) set via the remote
action. cascade connection, such as from a computer,
and outputs the computed result.
FF_VAL
Cas Cascade mode, in which the PID block carries
out the PID control computation based on the
setpoint (SP) set from another fieldbus function
FF_SCALE block, and outputs the computed result.
OUT_SCALE
Auto The PID block carries out automatic control
and outputs the result computed by the PID
control computation.
FF_GAIN
Man Manual mode, in which the PID block outputs
the value set by the user manually.
PID LO The PID block outputs the value set in TRK_
PV OUT
computation VAL.
IMan Initialization and manual mode, in which the
FA0503.ai control action is suspended. The PID block
enters this mode when the specified condition
is met (see Section A5.14).
O/S Out of service mode, in which neither the
control computation nor action is carried out,
and the output is kept at the value that was
output before the PID block entered into O/S
mode.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A5.9.1 Mode Transitions A5.10 Bumpless Transfer
Transition Prevents a sudden change in the control output
NOT
Destination Condition
Mode
Conditions OUT at changes in block mode (MODE_BLK) and
O/S 1. If O/S is set in MODE_ at switching of the connection from the control
BLK.target (or if O/S is output OUT to the cascaded secondary function
set in target inside the block. The action to perform a bumpless transfer
resource block).
differs depending on the MODE_BLK values.
IMan 2. If the specified condition is NOT if
met (see Section A5.14). condition 1 is
met.
LO 3. If Track Enable is specified NOT if either A5.11 Setpoint Limiters
in CONTROL_OPTS and or both of
the value of TRK_IN_D conditions 1 Active setpoint limiters that limit the changes in the
is true. and 2 are met. SP value, differ depending on the block mode as
Man 4. If Man is set in MODE_ NOT if any follows.
BLK.target or if IN.status one or more of
(input status) is Bad. conditions 1 to
3 are met.
A5.11.1 When PID Block Is in Auto Mode
Auto* 5. If Auto is set in MODE_ NOT if any When the value of MODE_BLK is Auto, the four
BLK.target one or more of
- AND - conditions 1 to
types of limiters are in force: high limit, low limit,
if IN.status (input status) is 3 are met. rate-of-increase limit, and rate-of-decrease limit.
not Bad.
Cas* ** 6. If Cas is set in MODE_ NOT if any Setpoint High/Low Limits
BLK.target one or more of
- AND - conditions 1 to • A value larger than the value of SP_HI_LIM
if neither IN.status (input 3 are met. cannot be set for SP.
status) nor CAS_IN.status
is Bad. • A value smaller than the value of SP_LO_LIM
RCas* ** 7. If RCas is set in MODE_ NOT if any cannot be set for SP.
BLK.target one or more
- AND - of conditions 1 Setpoint Rate Limits
if neither IN.status (input to 3 are met.
The setpoint rate limits are used to restrict the
status) nor RCAS_
IN.status is Bad. magnitude of changes in the SP value so as to
ROut* ** 8. If ROut is set in MODE_ NOT if any change the SP value gradually towards a new
BLK.target one or more setpoint.
- AND - of conditions 1
if ROUT_IN.status (input to 3 are met. • An increase of the SP value at each execution
status) is not Bad.
period (period of execution in the Block Header)
In accordance 9. If RCAS_IN.status or
with the ROUT_IN.status is Bad
is limited to the value of SP_RATE_UP.
SHED_OPT (indicating a computer • A decrease of the SP value at each execution
setting failure; see Section A5.17.1 period (period of execution in the Block Header)
for details).
is limited to the value of SP_RATE_DOWN.
* To activate mode transitions to Auto, Cas, RCas,
and ROut, the respective target modes must be set A5.11.2 When PID Block Is in Cas or RCas
beforehand to MODE_BLK.permitted. Mode
** A transition to Cas, RCas, or ROut requires that
initialization of the cascade connection has been By selecting Obey SP Limits if Cas or RCas in
completed.
CONTROL_OPTS (see Section A5.13), the setpoint
high/low limits can be put into force also when the
value of MODE_BLK is Cas or RCas.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A5.12 External-output Tracking Options in
Description
CONTROL_OPTS
External tracking is an action of outputting the value Bypass Enable This parameter allows BYPASS to
of the remote output TRK_VAL set from outside be set.
the PID block, as illustrated in the figure below. SP-PV Track in Equalizes SP to PV when MODE_
External tracking is performed when the block Man BLK.target is set to Man.
SP-PV Track in Equalizes SP to PV when MODE_
mode is LO.
ROut BLK.target is set to ROut.
TRK_VAL SP-PV Track in LO Equalizes SP to PV when actual is
or IMan set to LO or IMAN.
SP-PV Track Equalizes SP to RCAS_IN when
TRK_SCALE retained Target MODE_BLK.target is set to RCas,
OUT_SCALE and to CAS_IN when MODE_BLK.
target is set to Cas when the
TRK_IN_D actual mode of the block is IMan,
LO, Man or ROut.
PID control
Direct Acting Set the PID block to a direct acting
computation result OUT
controller.
LO mode Track Enable This enables the external tracking
FA0504.ai function.
The value in TRK_VAL will replace
To change the block mode to LO: the value of OUT if TRK_IN_D
becomes true and the target mode
(1) Select Track Enable in CONTROL_OPTS. is not Man.
(2) Set TRK_IN_D to true. Track in Manual This enables TRK_VAL to replace
the value of OUT when the target
However, to change the block mode from Man mode is Man and TRK_IN_D is
to LO, Track in Manual must also be specified in true. The actual mode will then be
CONTROL_OPTS. LO.
Use PV for Sets the value of PV in BKCAL_
BKCAL_OUT OUT and RCAS_OUT, instead of
A5.13 Measured-value Tracking Obey SP limits if
the value of SP.
Puts the setpoint high/low limits in
Measured-value tracking, also referred to as SP-PV Cas or RCas force in the Cas or RCas mode.
tracking, is an action to equalize the setpoint SP No OUT limits in Disables the high/low limits for
Manual OUT in the Man mode.
to the measured value PV when the block mode
(MODE_BLK.actual) is Man in order to prevent a
sudden change in control output from being caused
by a mode change to Auto. A5.14 Initialization and Manual
While a cascade primary control block is performing Fallback (IMan)
the automatic or cascade control (in the Auto or Initialization and manual fallback denotes a set of
Cas mode), when the mode of its secondary control actions in which a PID block changes mode to IMan
block is changed from Cas to Auto, the cascade (initialization and manual) and suspends the control
connection is opened and the control action of the action. Initialization and manual fallback takes
primary block stops. The SP of the secondary place automatically as a means of abnormality
controller can be equalized to its cascade input handling when the following condition is met:
signal CAS_IN also in this case.
• The quality component of BKCAL_IN.status is
The settings for measured-value tracking are made Bad.
in the parameter CONTROL_OPTS, as shown in - OR -
the table below. • The quality component of BKCAL_IN.status is
Good (c)
- AND -
The sub-status component of BKCAL_IN.status
is FSA, LO, NI, or IR.
The user cannot manually change the mode to
IMan. A mode transition to IMan occurs only when
the condition above is met.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A5.15 Manual Fallback A5.17 Mode Shedding upon
Manual fallback denotes an action in which a Computer Failure
PID block changes mode to Man and suspends When the data status of RCAS_IN or ROUT_IN,
the control action. Manual fallback takes place which is the setting received from a computer as
automatically as a means of abnormality handling the setpoint SP, falls to Bad while the PID block
when the following condition is met: is running in the RCas or ROut mode, the mode
• IN.status is Bad except when the control action shedding occurs in accordance with the settings in
bypass is on. SHED_OPT.
If the RCAS_IN data is not renewed within the time
To enable the manual fallback action to take place
specified by SHED_RCAS in resource block, the
when the above condition is met, Target to Manual if
data status of RCAS_IN falls to Bad.
BAD IN must be specified beforehand in STATUS_
OPTS. A5.17.1 SHED_OPT
The table below shows the options in STATUS_ The SHED_OPT setting stipulates the
OPTS. specifications of mode shedding as shown below.
Options in Only one can be set.
Description
STATUS_OPTS
Available
IFS if BAD IN Sets the sub-status component of
Setting for Actions upon Computer Failure
OUT.status to IFS if IN.status is Bad
SHED_OPT
except when PID control bypass is
on. Normal shed, Sets MODE_BLK.actual to Cas*1, and
normal return leaves MODE_BLK.target unchanged.
IFS if BAD CAS Sets the sub-status component of
IN OUT.status to IFS if CAS_IN.status Normal shed, Sets both MODE_BLK.actual and
is Bad. no return MODE_BLK.target to Cas*1.
Use Uncertain Does not regard IN as being in Bad Shed to Auto, Sets MODE_BLK.actual to Auto*2, and
as Good status when IN.status is Uncertain normal return leaves MODE_BLK.target unchanged.
(to prevent mode transitions from Shed to Auto, Sets both MODE_BLK.actual and
being affected when it is Uncertain). no return MODE_BLK.target to Auto*2.
Target to Manual Automatically changes the value of Shed to Sets MODE_BLK.actual to Man, and
if BAD IN MODE_BLK.target to MAN when IN Manual, leaves MODE_BLK.target unchanged.
falls into Bad status. normal return
Target to next Automatically changes the value of Shed to Sets both MODE_BLK.actual and
permitted mode MODE_BLK.target to Auto (or to Manual, no MODE_BLK.target to Man.
if BAD CAS IN Man if Auto is not set in Permitted) return
when CAS_IN falls into Bad status. Shed to If Cas is in MODE_BLK.target, sets
retained MODE_BLK.actual to Cas*1, and
target, normal leaves MODE_BLK.target unchanged.
A5.16 Auto Fallback return If Cas is not set in MODE_BLK.target,
sets MODE_BLK.actual to Auto*2, and
Auto fallback denotes an action in which a PID
leaves MODE_BLK.target unchanged.
block changes mode from Cas to Auto and Shed to If Cas is set in MODE_BLK.target, sets
continues automatic PID control with the user-set retained both MODE_BLK.actual and MODE_
setpoint. Auto fallback takes place automatically target, no BLK.target to Cas*1.
return If Cas is not set in MODE_BLK.target,
when the following condition is met:
sets MODE_BLK.actual to Auto*2, and
• IN.status (data status of IN) is Bad except when MODE_BLK.target to Cas.
the control action bypass is on. *1 The modes to which a PID block can transfer are limited
to those set in MODE_BLK.permitted, and the priority
To enable the manual fallback action to take place levels of modes are as shown below. In fact, if Normal
shed, normal return is set for SHED_OPT, detection of a
when the above condition is met: computer failure causes MODE_BLK.actual to change
to Cas, Auto, or MAN, whichever is set in MODE_BLK.
• Target to next permitted mode if BAD CAS permitted and has the lowest priority level.
IN must be previously specified in STATUS_ Lower priority Higher priority
OPTS. level level
- AND - ROut RCas Cas Auto Man
FA0505.ai
• Auto must be previously set in MODE_BLK.
*2 Only when Auto is set as permitted mode.
permitted.
IM 01C25T02-01E
NOTE: If a control block is connected as a cascade primary
block of the PID block in question, a mode transition of
A5.19 Example of Block
the PID block to Cas occurs in the following sequence
due to initialization of the cascade connection: RCas or
Connections
ROut → Auto → Cas.
A5.18 Alarms AI
OUT
There are two kinds of alarms generated by a PID
block: block and process alarms.
IN
A5.18.1 Block Alarm (BLOCK_ALM) PID
The block alarm BLOCK_ALM is generated upon BKCAL_IN OUT

occurrence of either of the following errors (values
set in BLOCK_ERR) and notifies the content of CAS_IN
BLOCK_ERR. AO
Value of
Condition BKCAL_OUT
BLOCK_ERR FA0506.ai
Local Override MODE_BLK actual of PID block is LO.

When configuring a simple PID control loop by
Sensor Failure The status of PV is Bad. (The status
of IN is Bad, or the status of IN is combining an EJX transmitter with a fieldbus
Uncertain and “Use Uncertain as Good” valve positioner that contains an AO block, follow
is false in STATUS_OPTS.) the procedure below to make the settings of the
Out of Service MODE_BLK.target of the PID block is
corresponding fieldbus function blocks:
O/S.
1. Connect the AI block and PID block of the EJX,
A5.18.2 Process Alarms and the AO block of the valve positioner as
shown above.
There are six types of process alarms. Only one 2. Set MODE_BLK.target of the PID block to
process alarm can be generated at the same time, O/S, and then set GAIN, RESET, and RATE to
and the process alarm having the highest priority appropriate values.
level from among those occurring at the same 3. Check that the value of MODE_BLK.actual of
time is generated. The priority level is set for each the AI block is Auto.
process alarm type. 4. Set MODE_BLK.target of the AO block to
Parameter CAS|AUTO (meaning "Cas and Auto").
Process
Cause of Occurrence
Containing 5. Check that the value of BKCAL_IN.status of the
Alarm Priority Level PID block is not Bad.
Setting
6. Check that the value of IN.status of the PID
HI_HI_ALM Occurs when the PV HI_HI_PRI
increases above the block is not Bad.
HI_HI_LIM value. 7. Check that Auto is set in MODE_BLK.permitted
HI_ALM Occurs when the PV HI_PRI of the PID block.
increases above HI_LIM 8. Set MODE_BLK.target of the PID block to Auto.
value.
LO_ALM Occurs when the PV LO_PRI
decreases below the When finishing all steps in order, the PID block and
LO_LIM value. AO block exchange the respective information and
LO_LO_ Occurs when the PV LO_LO_PRI initialize the cascade connection. Consequently,
ALM decreases below the
the value of MODE_BLK.actual of the PID block
LO_LO_LIM value.
DV_HI_ALM Occurs when the value of DV_HI_PRI
changes to Auto and automatic PID control starts.
[PV - SP] increases above
the DV_HI_LIM value.
DV_LO_ Occurs when the value DV_LO_PRI
ALM of [PV - SP] decreases
below the DV_LO_LIM
value.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A5.20 View Object for PID Relative
Parameter Mnemonic
VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW
Index 1 2 3 4
Function Block 52 LO_PRI 1
Relative VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW 53 LO_LIM 4
Parameter Mnemonic
Index 1 2 3 4 54 LO_LO_PRI 1
1 ST_REV 2 2 2 2 55 LO_LO_LIM 4
2 TAG_DESC 56 DV_HI_PRI 1
3 STRATEGY 2 57 DV_HI_LIM 4
4 ALERT_KEY 1 58 DV_LO_PRI 1
5 MODE_BLK 4 4 59 DV_LO_LIM 4
6 BLOCK_ERR 2 2 60 HI_HI_ALM
7 PV 5 5 61 HI_ALM
8 SP 5 5 62 LO_ALM
9 OUT 5 5 63 LO_LO_ALM
10 PV_SCALE 11 64 DV_HI_ALM
11 OUT_SCALE 11 65 DV_LO_ALM
12 GRANT_DENY 2
13 CONTROL_OPTS 2 Totals 43 43 83 104
14 STATUS_OPTS 2
15 IN 5
16 PV_FTIME 4
17 BYPASS 1
18 CAS_IN 5 5
19 SP_RATE_DN 4
20 SP_RATE_UP 4
21 SP_HI_LIM 4
22 SP_LO_LIM 4
23 GAIN 4
24 RESET 4
25 BAL_TIME 4
26 RATE 4
27 BKCAL_IN 5
28 OUT_HI_LIM 4
29 OUT_LO_LIM 4
30 BKCAL_HYS 4
31 BKCAL_OUT 5
32 RCAS_IN 5
33 ROUT_IN 5
34 SHED_OPT 1
35 RCAS_OUT 5
36 ROUT_OUT 5
37 TRK_SCALE 11
38 TRK_IN_D 2 2
39 TRK_VAL 5 5
40 FF_VAL 5
41 FF_SCALE 11
42 FF_GAIN 4
43 UPDATE_EVT
44 BLOCK_ALM
45 ALARM_SUM 8 8
46 ACK_OPTION 2
47 ALARM_HYS 4
48 HI_HI_PRI 1
49 HI_HI_LIM 4
50 HI_PRI 1
51 HI_LIM 4
IM 01C25T02-01E
<Appendix 6. Link Master Functions> A6-1
Appendix 6. Link Master Functions

A6.1 Link Active Scheduler
A link active scheduler (LAS) is a deterministic, centralized bus scheduler that can control communications on
an H1 fieldbus segment. There is only one LAS on an H1 fieldbus segment.
The transmitter supports the following LAS functions.
• PN transmission: Identifies a fieldbus device newly connected to the same fieldbus segment. PN is short
for Probe Node.
• PT transmission: Passes a token governing the right to transmit, to a fieldbus device on the same
segment. PT is short for Pass Token.
• CD transmission: Carry out a scheduled transmission to a fieldbus device on the same segment. CD is
short for Compel Data.
• Time synchronization: Periodically transmits the time data to all fieldbus devices on the segment and
returns the time data in response to a request from a device.
• Live list equalization: Sends the live list data to link masters on the same segment.
• LAS transfer: Transfers the right to be the LAS on the segment to another link master.
A6.2 Link Master

A link master (LM) is any device containing a link active scheduler. There must be at least one LM on a
segment. When the LAS on a segment has failed, another LM on the same segment starts working as the
LAS.
LM
There are 3 LMs on this segment.
Node address: 0x14
LAS
SlotTime = 5
LM LM Basic device Basic device Basic device Basic device

Node address: Node address: Node address: Node address: Node address: Node address:
0x15 0x16 0xF1 0xF2 0xF3 0xF4
SlotTime = 5 SlotTime = 5
FA0601.ai
Figure A6.1 Example of Fieldbus configuration-3 LMs on Same Segment
IM 01C25T02-01E
A6.3 Transfer of LAS
There are two procedures for an LM to become the LAS:
• If the LM whose value of [V(ST)×V(TN)] is the smallest on a segment, with the exception of the current
LAS, judges that there is no LAS on the segment, in such a case as when the segment has started up or
when the current LAS has failed, the LM declares itself as the LAS, then becomes the LAS. (With this
procedure, an LM backs up the LAS as shown in the following figure.)
• The LM whose value of [V(ST)×V(TN)] is the smallest on a segment, with the exception of the current LAS,
requests the LAS on the same segment to transfer the right of being the LAS, then becomes the LAS.
LM
In the event that the current LAS in
this segment (node address 0x14)
Node address: 0x14
LAS fails, the LM with the address of 0x15
SlotTime = 5
takes its place to become the LAS.
LAS
LM LM Basic device Basic device Basic device Basic device

Node address: Node address: Node address: Node address: Node address: Node address:
0x15 0x16 0xF1 0xF2 0xF3 0xF4
SlotTime = 5 SlotTime = 5
FA0602.ai
Figure A6.2 Backup of LAS
To set up the transmitter as a device that is capable of backing up the LAS, follow the procedure below.
NOTE: When changing the settings in the transmitter, add the transmitter to the segment in which an LAS
is running. After making changes to the settings, do not turn off the power to the transmitter for at least 30
seconds.
(1) Set the node address of the transmitter. In general, use an address from 0x10 to [V(FUN) - 1].
0x00
Not used
0x0F
0x10
Bridge device
0x13
0x14
LM device
V (FUN)
Not used V (NUN)
V (FUN) + V (NUN)
Basic device
0xF7
0xF8
Default address
0xFB
0xFC
Portable-device address
0xFF
FA0603.ai
Figure A6.3 Node Address Ranges
IM 01C25T02-01E
(2) In the LAS settings of the transmitter, set the values of V(ST), V(MRD), and V(MID) to the same as the
respective lowest capability values in all the devices within the segment. An example is shown below.
DlmeBasicInfo (Index 282 (SM))
Subindex Element EJX Device 1 Device 2 Device 3 Description
1 SlotTime 4 8 10 20 Capability value for V(ST)
3 MaxResponseDelay 3 6 3 5 Capability value for V(MRD)
6 MinInterPduDelay 4 8 12 10 Capability value for V(MID)
In this case, set SlotTime, MaxResponseTime, and MinInterPduDelay as follows:
ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord (Index 293 (SM))

Subindex Element Setting (Default) Description
1 SlotTime 20 (12) V (ST)
3 MaxResponseDelay 6 (5) V (MRD)
6 MinInterPduDelay 12 (12) V (MID)
(3) In the LAS settings of the transmitter, set the values of V(FUN) and V(NUN) so that they include the node
addresses of all nodes within the same segment. (See also Figure 3.)
ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord (Index 293 (SM))
Subindex Element Default Value Description
4 FirstUnpolledNodeId 0x25 V (FUN)
7 NumConsecUnpolledNodeId 0xBA V (NUN)
A6.4 LM Functions
No. Function Description
1 LM initialization When a fieldbus segment starts, the LM with the smallest [V(ST) ×
V(TN)] value within the segment becomes the LAS.
At all times, each LM is checking whether or not a carrier is on the
segment.
2 Startup of other nodes (PN and Node Transmits a PN (Probe Node) message, and Node Activation SPDU
Activation SPDU transmissions) message to devices which return a new PR (Probe Response)
message.
3 PT transmission (including final bit Passes a PT (Pass Token) message to devices included in the live list
monitoring) sequentially, and monitors the RT (Return Token) and final bit returned in
reply to the PT.
4 CD transmission Transmits a CD (Compel Data) message at the scheduled times.
5 Time synchronization Supports periodic TD (Time Distribution) transmissions and
transmissions of a reply to a CT (Compel Time).
6 Domain download server Sets the schedule data.
The schedule data can be equalized only when the Domain Download
command is carried out from outside the LM in question.
(The version of the schedule is usually monitored, but no action takes
place, even when it changes.)
7 Live list equalization Transmits SPDU messages to LMs to equalize live lists.
8 LAS transfer Transfers the right of being the LAS to another LM.
9 Reading/writing of NMIB for LM See Section A6.5.
10 Round Trip Delay Reply (RR) Reply to Not yet supported in the current version.
DLPDU
11 Long address Not yet supported in the current version.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A6.5 LM Parameters
A6.5.1 LM Parameter List
The tables below show LM parameters.
Meanings of Access column entries: RW = read/write possible; R = read only
Index Sub-parameter Name Default Factory
Parameter Name Access Remarks
(SM) (Sub Index) Setting
283 PLME_BASIC_ 0 R
CHARACTERISTICS 1 ChannelStatisticsSupported 0x00
2 MediumAndDataRatesSupported 0x4900000000000000
3 IecVersion 1 (0x1)
4 NumOfChannels 1 (0x1)
5 PowerMode 0 (0x0)
284 CHANNEL_STATES 0 R
1 channel-1 0 (0x0)
2 channel-2 128 (0x80)
3 channel-3 128 (0x80)
4 channel-4 128 (0x80)
5 channel-5 128 (0x80)
6 channel-6 128 (0x80)
7 channel-7 128 (0x80)
8 channel-8 128 (0x80)
285 PLME_BASIC_INFO 0 R
1 InterfaceMode 0 (0x0)
2 LoopBackMode 0 (0x0)
3 XmitEnabled 1 (0x1)
4 RcvEnabled 1 (0x1)
5 PreferredReceiveChannel 1 (0x1)
6 MediaTypeSelected 73 (0x49)
7 ReceiveSelect 1 (0x1)
286 DLME_LINK_MASTER_CAPABILITIES_VARIABLE 0x04 RW
287 DLME_LINK_ 0 RW
MASTER_INFO_ 1 MaxSchedulingOverhead 0
RECORD 2 DefMinTokenDelegTime 100
3 DefTokenHoldTime 300
4 TargetTokenRotTime 4096
5 LinkMaintTokHoldTime 400
6 TimeDistributionPeriod 5000
7 MaximumInactivityToClaimLasDelay 2
8 LasDatabaseStatusSpduDistributionPeriod 6000
288 PRIMARY_LINK_MASTER_FLAG_VARIABLE 0 RW LAS: True = 0xFF;
non-LAS: False = 0x00
289 LIVE_LIST_STATUS_ARRAY_VARIABLE 0 R
290 MAX_TOKEN_ 0 RW
HOLD_TIME_ 1 Element1 0x0000(x16),
ARRAY 0x012C(x16)
2 Element2 0x012C(x5),
0x0000(x27)
3 Element3 0x0000(x32)
7 Element7 0x0000(x31),
0x012C(x1)
8 Element8 0x012C(x32)
291 BOOT_OPERAT_FUNCTIONAL_CLASS Specified at the time RW 0x01 (basic device);
of order 0x02 (LM)
IM 01C25T02-01E
Index Sub-parameter Name Default Factory
Parameter Name Access Remarks
(SM) (Sub Index) Setting
292 CURRENT_LINK_ 0 R Settings for LAS
SETTING_RECORD 1 SlotTime 0
2 PerDlpduPhlOverhead 0
3 MaxResponseDelay 0
4 FirstUnpolledNodeId 0
5 ThisLink 0
6 MinInterPduDelay 0
7 NumConseeUnpolledNodeId 0
8 PreambleExtension 0
9 PostTransGapExtension 0
10 MaxInterChanSignalSkew 0
11 TimeSyncClass 0
293 CONFIGURED_ 0 RW
LINK_SETTING_ 1 SlotTime 4095
RECORD 2 PerDlpduPhlOverhead 4
3 MaxResponseDelay 5
4 FirstUnpolledNodeId 37
5 ThisLink 0
6 MinInterPduDelay 12
7 NumConseeUnpolledNodeId 186
8 PreambleExtension 2
9 PostTransGapExtension 1
10 MaxInterChanSignalSkew 0
11 TimeSyncClass 4
294 LINK_SCHEDULE_ACTIVATION_VARIABLE 0 (0x0) RW
295 LINK_ 0 R
SCHEDULE_LIST_ 1 NumOfSchedules 2
CHARACTERISTICS_
2 NumOfSubSchedulesPerSchedule 5
RECORD
3 ActiveScheduleVersion 0
4 ActiveSheduleOdIndex 0
5 ActiveScheduleStartingTime 0
296 DLME_SCHEDULE_ 0 R
DESCRIPTOR.1 1 Version 0
2 MacrocycleDuration 0
3 TimeResolution 0
297 DLME_SCHEDULE_ 0 R
DESCRIPTOR.2 1 Version 0
2 MacrocycleDuration 0
3 TimeResolution 0
298 DOMAIN.1 Read/write impossible.
Get-OD possible.
299 DOMAIN.2 Read/write impossible.
Get-OD possible.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A6.5.2 Descriptions for LM Parameters (4) LiveListStatusArrayVariable
The following describes LM parameters of the A 32-byte variable, in which each bit represents the
transmitter. status of whether a device on the same segment
NOTE: Do not turn off the power to the transmitter for 60 is live or not. The leading bit corresponds to the
seconds after making a change to its parameter device address 0x00, and final bit to 0xFF. The
settings.
value of LiveListStatusArrayVariable in the case
(1) DlmeLinkMasterCapabilitiesVariable where devices having the addresses 0x10 and
0x15 in the fieldbus segment is shown below.
Bit
Meaning Description Value
Position
0x00 00 84 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
B3: 0x04 LAS Whether the LAS schedule
Schedule in can (=1) or cannot (=0) be 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
1
Non-volatile saved to the non-volatile 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Memory memory Bit correspondences: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B2: 0x02 Last Values Whether to support (=1) 0×00
Record or not to support (=0) 0
Supported LastValuesRecord. 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0...
B1: 0x01 Link Master Whether to support (=1) 0×10 0×15
Statistics or not to support (=0)
0
Record DlmeLinkMasterStatisticsRecord. (5) MaxTokenHoldTimeArray
Supported
An 8 (64 byte array variable, in which each set of
(2) DlmeLinkMasterInfoRecord 2 bytes represents the delegation time (set as an
octet time) assigned to a device. The delegation
Sub- Size Descrip-
index
Element
[bytes] tion time denotes a time period that is given to a device
1 MaxSchedulingOverhead 1 V(MSO) by means of a PT message sent from the LAS
2 DefMinTokenDelegTime 2 V(DMDT) within each token circulation cycle.
3 DefTokenHoldTime 2 V(DTHT)
The leading 2 bytes correspond to the device
4 TargetTokenRotTime 2 V(TTRT)
5 LinkMaintTokHoldTime 2 V(LTHT) address 0x00, and the final 2 bytes to the device
6 TimeDistributionPeriod 4 V(TDP) address 0xFF. Specify the subindex to access this
7 MaximumInactivityToClaimLasDelay 2 V(MICD) parameter.
8 LasDatabaseStatusSpduDistributionPeriod 2 V(LDDP)
(6) BootOperatFunctionalClass
(3) PrimaryLinkMasterFlagVariable
Writing 1 to this parameter in a device and
Explicitly declares the LAS. Writing “true” (0xFF) restarting the device causes the device to start as
to this parameter in a device causes that device to a basic device. On the contrary, writing 2 to this
attempt to become the LAS. However, a request parameter and restarting the device causes the
of writing “true” to this parameter in a device is device to start as an LM.
rejected if the value of the same parameter in any
other device that has a smaller node address within
the same segment is true.
IM 01C25T02-01E
(7) CurrentLinkSettingRecord and (9) PlmeBasicCharacteristics
ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord
Sub- Size
Element Value Description
CurrentLinkSettingRecord indicates the index [bytes]
bus parameter settings currently used. 1 Channel 1 0 Statistics data are

Statistics not supported.
ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord indicates the Supported
bus parameter settings to be used when the 2 Medium 8 0x49 00 00 00 Wire medium,
device becomes the LAS. Thus, when a device AndData 00 00 00 00 voltage mode, and
is the LAS, its CurrentLinkSettingRecord and Rates 31.25 kbps are
Supported supported.
ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord have the same
3 IceVersion 2 1 IEC Physical Layer
values. Entity Version
Sub- Size Descrip- 4 NumOf 1 1
Element Channels
index [bytes] tion
1 SlotTime 2 V(ST) 5 Power 1 0 0: Bus-powered;
Mode 1: Self-powered
2 PerDlpduPhlOverhead 1 V(PhLO)
3 MaxResponseDelay 1 V(MRD)
(10) ChannelStates
4 FirstUnpolledNodeId 1 V(FUN)
5 ThisLink 2 V(TL) Sub- Size
6 MinInterPduDelay 1 V(MID) index [bytes]
7 NumConsecUnpolledNodeId 1 V(NUN) 1 Channel 1 1 0x00 In Use, No Bad since

last read, No Silent
8 PreambleExtension 1 V(PhPE)
since last read, No
9 PostTransGapExtension 1 V(PhGE) Jabber since last read,
10 MaxInterChanSignalSkew 1 V(PhIS) Tx Good, Rx Good
11 TimeSyncClass 1 V(TSC) 2 Channel 2 1 0x80 Unused
3 Channel 3 1 0x80 Unused
(8) DlmeBasicInfo 4 Channel 4 1 0x80 Unused
Sub- Size
Element Description 6 Channel 6 1 0x80 Unused
index [bytes]
1 SlotTime 2 Indicates the
capability value 8 Channel 8 1 0x80 Unused
for V(ST) of the
device. (11) PlmeBasicInfo
2 PerDlpduPhlOverhead 1 V(PhLO)
3 MaxResponseDelay 1 Indicates the Sub- Size
capability value index [bytes]
for V(MRD) of the 1 InterfaceMode 1 0 0: Half duplex;
device. 1: Full duplex
4 ThisNode 1 V(TN), node 2 LoopBackMode 1 0 0: Disabled; 1: MAU;
address 2: MDS
5 ThisLink 2 V(TL), link-id 3 XmitEnabled 1 0x01 Channel 1 is
6 MinInterPduDelay 1 Indicates the enabled.
capability value 4 RcvEnebled 1 0x01 Channel 1 is
for V(MID) of the enabled.
device. 5 PreferredReceive 1 0x01 Channel 1 is used
7 TimeSyncClass 1 Indicates the Channel for reception.
capability value 6 MediaType 1 0x49 Wire medium,
for V(TSC) of the Selected voltage mode, and
device. 31.25 kbps are
8 PreambleExtension 1 V(PhPE) selected.
9 PostTransGapExtension 1 V(PhGE) 7 ReceiveSelect 1 0x01 Channel 1 is used
10 MaxInterChanSignalSkew 1 V(PhIS) for reception.
IM 01C25T02-01E
(12) LinkScheduleActivationVariable (15) Domain
Writing the version number of an LAS schedule, Read/write: impossible; get-OD: possible
which has already been downloaded to the domain,
Carrying out the GenericDomainDownload
to this parameter causes the corresponding
command from a host writes an LAS schedule to
schedule to be executed. On the other hand,
Domain.
writing 0 to this parameter stops execution of the
active schedule.
CAUTION
(13) LinkScheduleListCharacteristicsRecord
When downloading a LAS schedule to
Sub- Size transmitter, maximum allowable linkages
Element Description
index [bytes]
between devices are 48.
1 NumOf 1 Indicates the total number
Schedules of LAS schedules that have
been downloaded to the
domain.
2 NumOfSub 1 Indicates the maximum
A6.6 FAQs
SchedulesPer number of sub-schedules an
Schedule LAS schedule can contain. Q1. When the LAS stops, the transmitter does
3 ActiveSchedule 2 Indicates the version number not back it up by becoming the LAS. Why?
Version of the schedule currently
executed. A1-1. Is that transmitter running as an LM? Check
4 ActiveSchedule 2 Indicates the index number that the value of BootOperatFunctionalClass
OdIndex of the domain that stores the (index 291) is 2 (indicating that it is an LM).
schedule currently executed.
5 ActiveSchedule 6 Indicates the time when A1-2. Check the values of V(ST) and V(TN) in all
StaringTime the current schedule began
LMs on the segment and confirm that the
being executed.
following condition is met:
(14) DlmeScheduleDescriptor Transmitter Other LMs
This parameter exists for the same number as the V(ST)×V(TN) < V(ST)×V(TN)
total number of domains, and each describes the
LAS schedule downloaded to the corresponding Q2. How can I make the transmitter become the
domain. For the domain to which a schedule LAS?
has not yet been downloaded, the values in this
parameter are all zeros. A2-1. Check that the version numbers of the
active schedules in the current LAS and the
Sub- Size transmitter are the same by reading:
Element Description
index [bytes]
1 Version 2 Indicates the version LinkScheduleListCharacteristicsRecord
number of the LAS (index 295 for the transmitter)
schedule downloaded to the
corresponding domain. - ActiveScheduleVersion (subindex 3)
2 Macrocycle 4 Indicates the macro cycle
Duration of the LAS schedule A2-2. Make the transmitter declare itself as and
downloaded to the become the LAS by writing:
corresponding domain.
• 0x00 (false) to
3 TimeResolution 2 Indicates the time
resolution that is required PrimaryLinkMasterFlagVariable in the
to execute the LAS current LAS; and
schedule downloaded to the • 0xFF (true) to
corresponding domain.
PrimaryLinkMasterFlagVariable (index 288)
in the transmitter.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Q3. On a segment where the transmitter works
as the LAS, another device cannot be
connected. How come?
A3-1. Check the following bus parameters that
indicate the bus parameter as being the LAS
for the transmitter and the capabilities of
being the LAS for the device that cannot be
connected:
• V(ST), V(MID), V(MRD) of the transmitter:
ConfiguredLinkSettingsRecord (index 293)
• V(ST), V(MID), V(MRD) of problematic
device: DlmeBasicInfo
Then, confirm that the following conditions
are met:
Transmitter Problematic
Device
V(ST) > V(ST)
V(MID) > V(MID)
V(MRD) > V(MRD)
A3-2. Check the node address of the problematic

device is not included in the V(FUN)+V(NUN)
of the transmitter.
Q4. “AL.20” is kept shown on LCD.
The LAS does not exist or is not identified in the
fieldbus network, or the transmitter is not able to
establish communication with the LAS.
A4-1. Check that the LAS is connected on the
network. When using the transmitter as the
LAS, follow the steps described in section
A6.3.
A4-2. Adjust the parameters of the LAS to that
of the transmitter. Refer to section 5.2 for
details.
LAS Transmitter
V(ST) > V(ST) 4 or above
V(MID) > V(MID) 4 or above
V(MRD) > V(MRD) 12 or above
A4-3. Check that the correct Node Address is used

for the transmitter. Refer to section 5.2 for
details.
Confirm that the Node Address of transmitter
should be out of the parameters of the LAS
of V (FUN) ~ V (FUN)+V (NUN)
Confirm that the Node Address is not within
the default address (0xF8 to 0xFB).
IM 01C25T02-01E
<Appendix 7. Software Download> A7-1
Appendix 7. Software Download

A7.1 Benefits of Software A7.3 Preparations for Software
Download Downloading
This function enables you to download software to For software downloading, you need to prepare the
field devices via a FOUNDATION Fieldbus to update following:
their software. Typical uses are to add new features
• Software download tool
such as function blocks and diagnostics to existing
• Software for downloading file for each of the
devices, and to optimize existing field devices for
target field devices
your plant.
For the software download tool, use only a program
developped for that purpose. For details, see the
software’s User’s Manual.
Update
CAUTION
Program
Do not hook up the software download tool to a
I/O New
Diagnostics
fieldbus segment while the plant is in operation,
PID
as it may temporarily disturb the communication.
AI AI Always connect the tool before starting
operation.
FA0701.ai
Figure A7.1 Concept of Software Downloading

NOTE
A7.2 Specifications The download tool can not execute downloading
during other system connects to the system/
Steady-state current: Max. 15 mA network management VFD of the device.
Current Draw (Steady-state): 15mA (max)
Current Draw (Software Download state):
24mA (max)
Current during FlashROM blanking time:
Max. 24 mA additional to steady-state current
Based on Fieldbus Foundation Specification
Download class: Class 1
NOTE
Class 1 devices can continue the specified
measurement and/or control actions even
while software is being downloaded to them.
Upon completion of a download, however, the
devices will be reset internally to make the new,
downloaded software take effect, and this will
halt fieldbus communication and function block
executions for about one minute.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A7.4 Software Download
Sequence CAUTION
The flowchart below outlines the software download Upon completion of the activation, the target
procedure. Although the time taken for the entire fieldbus device performs resetting internally,
procedure varies depending on the size of the field which temporarily halts fieldbus communication
bus device’s software, it generally take about 20 and function block executions. Be especially
minutes where there is a one-to-one connection careful about a valve positioner; the output air
between a fieldbus device and download tool, and pressure will fall to the minimum level (i.e., zero).
longer when multiple field devices are connected to
the fieldbus.
CAUTION
Start download tool
Do not turn off the power to a field device or
disconnect the download tool during a download
Select the software file(s) you
Select file(s)
want to download.
or activation. The device may fail as a result.
Select the device(s) to which you

Select device(s)
want to download software. NOTE
Be careful about the noise on the fieldbus link. If
Transmit the software to the field
Carry out download
device(s).
the fieldbus is noisy, the downloading may take a
very long time or fail.
Activate the device(s) to start with
Activate device(s)
new software.
FA0702.ai A7.5 Download Files
Figure A7.2 Flow of Software Download Procedure
Download files have the following filenames (with
the filename extension of “.ffd”). Take care to
choose the correct download file for the target field
CAUTION device:
Carrying out a software download leaves the “594543” + device family + “_” + device type +
PD tag, node address, and transducer block “_” + domain name + “_” + software name + “_”
calibration parameters that are retained in the + software revision + “.ffd”
nonvolatile memory inside the target device,
but may reset other parameters to the defaults For example, the name of the download file for an
(except a minor update that does not change EJX may have the following name:
the number of parameters). Hence, where 594543000C_000C_EJX_ORIGINAL_R101.ffd
necessary, save the parameters using an
engineering tool, parameter setting utility, or the Refer to A7.11(3) DOMAIN_HEADER about each
like before carrying out a software download, keyword of the file name.
and then reconfigure the field device(s) after the The device type is “000C” for an EJX transmitter,
download. For details, see Section A7.6. and is "0011" for an EJA transmitter.
The software name is “ORIGINAL” or “UPDATE.”
The former indicates an original file and the latter
CAUTION an update file. Whenever performing a download
to update the device revision, obtain the original file.
The current dissipation of the target field
In general, an addition to the parameters or blocks
device increases transitorily immediately after
requires a device revision update.
a download due to erasing of the FlashROM’s
contents. Use a fieldbus power supply which
has sufficient capacity to cover such increases in
feed current.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A7.6 Steps after Activating a Table A7.1 Actions after Software Update
Field Device Contents of Software

Update
Action
When the communication with a field device has Does not change the number Re-setup of parameters
of parameters. not needed.
recovered after activating the device, check using
Adds a block parameter. Setup of the added
the download tool that the software revision of the parameter needed.
field device has been updated accordingly. The Adds a block. Reengineering and
value of SOFT_REV of the resource block indicates setup of the added
the software revision. block’s parameters
needed.
The PD tag, node address, and transducer block Changes the number of Reengineering needed.
calibration parameters that are retained in the system/network management
VFD parameters.
nonvolatile memory inside the target device will
remain unchanged after a software download.
However, after a software update which causes an
addition to the block parameters or blocks, or to the
system/network management VFD parameters,
some parameters may be reset to the defaults, thus
requiring parameter setup and engineering again.
For details, see the table below.
Also note that a change in the number of
parameters or blocks requires the DD and
capabilities files corresponding to the new software
revision.
A7.7 Troubleshooting
For information on the download tool’s error messages, see also the software’s User’s Manual.
Table A7.2 Problems after Software Update
Symptom Cause Remedy
An error occurs before starting a The selected download file is not for Check SOFTDWN_ERROR in the
download, disabling the download. the selected field device. resource block and obtain the correct file.
An error occurs after starting a You attempted to update the device Check SOFTDWN_ERROR in the
download, disabling the download. revision by downloading a file which is resource block and obtain the original file.
not an original file.
The selected field device does not Check whether the option code /EE is
support software downloading. included in the model and suffix codes of
the device.
The voltage on the fieldbus segment Check the capacity of the field bus power
falls below the specified limit (9 volts). supply used and the voltage at the terminal.
There was an error in a checksum or Check SOFTDWN_ERROR in the
the number of transmission bytes. resource block and obtain the correct file.
The download tool does not allow Check the setting of the download tool.
download with same software revision.
The download takes far longer than The fieldbus segment is noisy. Check the noise level on the fieldbus
expected or fails frequently. segment.
An error occurs after activation. Transient error caused by the internal Check whether communication with the
resetting of the field device. field device has recovered after a while.
The new software does not work The file of the current revision was Obtain the correct file.
after the activation. downloaded.
Failure of the memory in field device, Check SOFTDWN_ERROR in the
etc. resource block, and re-try downloading.
If fails, place a service call.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A7.8 Resource Block’s Parameters Relating to Software Download
Table A7.3 Additional Parameters of Resource Block
Relative Default Write
Index Parameter Name Description
Index (Factory Set) Mode
53 1053 SOFTDWN_PROTECT 0x01 Defines whether to accept software
downloads.
0x01: Unprotected
0x02: Protected
54 1054 SOFTDWN_FORMAT 0x01 Selects the software download method.
0x01: Standard
55 1055 SOFTDWN_COUNT 0 — Indicates the number of times the internal
FlashROM was erased.
56 1056 SOFTDWN_ACT_AREA 0xFF — Indicates the ROM number of the
currently working FlashROM.
57 1057 SOFTDWN_MOD_REV 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 — Indicates the software module revision.
58 1058 SOFTDWN_ERROR 0 — Indicates an error during a software
download. See Table 4.
Table A7.4 Download Error Codes

Error Error
Description Description
Code Code
0 No error 32785 Abnormal EEPROM block ID which tunes
32768 Unsupported header version (not 1) EEPROM data
32769 Abnormal header size (not 44) 32786 Offset error from the beginning of the block
which tunes EEPROM data
32770 Abnormal manufacturer ID (not 0x594543)
32787 Abnormal data size which tunes EEPPROM
32771 Device family error (not RB.DEV_TYPE) data
32772 Device revision error (less than RB.DEV_REV) 32788 EEPROM data tuning type error (except 1 to 3)
32773 File revision error (not 3) 32789 File CRC error
32774 File type error (not 0 or 1) 32790 File endcode error ( first 1 byte of endcode is
32775 Abnormal number of modules (9 and over) not 0x00)
32776 Abnormal number of EEPROM data tuning 32791 Verification error during external
(11 and over) SerialFlashROM writing
32777 Abnormal module size of program (less than 32792 Access error of external SerialFlashROM
13 bytes or 655373 bytes and over) 32793 Timeout of the external SerialFlashROM
32778 Abnormal data size of EEPROM (under 13 access
bytes or (A area size + 13byte) and over) 32794 Generic initiate download sequence error
32779 Module type error (except 0 and 1) 32795 Generic download segment error
32780 Module address error (less than 32768 32796 Generic terminate download sequence.error
(0x8000) or 786432 (0xC0000)and over)
32797 State error during activation
32781 Module CRC error (except DWNLD_NOT_READY, DWNLD_
32782 Abnormal block size (Block size of downloaded READY, and DWNLD_OK)
EEPRPM data is under the existing block size) 32798 Succeeded process error during activation
32783 Block ID error (There is no existing Block in (FlashROM failure, EEPRPM failure)
downloaded EEPROM data)
32784 Abnormal module ID which tunes EEPROM
data (except 1 and 2)
IM 01C25T02-01E
A7.9 System/Network Management VFD Parameters Relating to
Software Download
Table A7.5 System/Network Management VFD Parameters
Write Mode: R/W = read/write; R = read only
Index Parameter Sub Default Write
Sub-parameter Name Remarks
(SM) Name Index (Factory Set) Mode
310 DWNLD_ 0 R
PROPERTY
1 Download Class 1
2 Write Rsp Returned For ACTIVATE 1
3 Write Rsp Returned For PREPARE 1
4 Reserved 0
5 ReadyForDwnld Delay Secs 300
6 Activation Delay Secs 60
313 DOMAIN_ 0 R/W Read/write-permitted
DESCRIPTOR only for sub-index 1
1 Command 3
2 State 1
3 Error Code 0
4 Download Domain Index 316
5 Download Domain Header Index 314
6 Activated Domain Header Index 315
7 Domain Name (Device name)
314 DOWNLOAD_ 0 R
DOMAIN_
HEADER
1 Header Version Number 0
2 Header Size 0
3 Manufacturer ID
4 Device Family
5 Device Type
6 Device Revision 0
7 DD Revision 0
8 Software Revision
9 Software Name
10 Domain Name
315 ACTIVATED_ 0 R
DOMAIN_
HEADER
1 Header Version Number 1
2 Header Size 44
3 Manufacturer ID 0x594543
4 Device Family (DEV_TYPE of RB)
5 Device Type (DEV_TYPE of RB)
6 Device Revision (DEV_REV of RB)
7 DD Revision (DD_REV of RB)
8 Software Revision (SOFT_REV of RB)
9 Software Name ORIGINAL
10 Domain Name (Device name)
316 DOMAIN Read/write: prohibited
Get-OD: permitted
IM 01C25T02-01E
A7.10 Comments on System/Network Management VFD Parameters
Relating to Software Download
IMPORTANT
Do not turn off the power to a field device immediately after changing parameter settings. Data writing
actions to the EEPROM are dual redandant to ensure reliability. If the power is turned off within 60 seconds
after setup, the parameters may revert to the previous settings.
(1) DWNLD_PROPERTY
Sub Size
Element Description
Index (Bytes)
1 Download Class 1 Indicates the download class.
1: Class 1
2 Write Rsp Returned For ACTIVATE 1 Indicates whether a write response is returned to the ACTIVATE
command.
1: Write Response Returned
3 Write Rsp Returned For PREPARE 1 Indicates whether a write response is returned to the PREPARE
command.
1: Write Response Returned
4 Reserved 1 (Reserved)
5 ReadyForDwnld Delay Secs 2 Indicates the maximum delay after receipt of the PREPARE_
FOR_DWNLD command to proceed to transition from DWNLD_
NOT_READY to DWNLD_READY.
6 Activation Delay Secs 2 Indicates the maximum delay after receipt of the ACTIVATE
command to proceed to transition from DWNLD_OK to
DWNLD_NOT_READY.
(2) DOMAIN_DESCRIPTOR
Sub Size
Element Description
Index (Bytes)
1 Command 1 Reads/writes software download commands.
1: PREPARE_FOR_DWNLD (instruction of download preparation)
2: ACTIVATE (activation instruction)
3: CANCEL_DWNLD (instruction of download cancellation)
2 State 1 Indicates the current download status.
1: DWNLD_NOT_READY (download not ready)
2: DWNLD_PREPARING (download under preparation)
3: DWNLD_READY (ready for download)
4: DWNLD_OK (download complete)
5: DOWNLOADING (download underway)
6: CHECKSUM_FAIL (not used in this product)
7: FMS_DOWNLOAD_FAIL (failure during download)
8: DWNLD_INCOMPLETE (download error detected at restart)
9: VCR_FAIL (not used in this product)
10: OTHER (download error other than 6 and 7 detected)
3 Error Code 2 Indicates the error during a download and activation.
0: success, configuration retained (download successfully
completed)
32768 - 65535: Download error (See Table 4 for error codes.)
4 Download Domain Index 4 Indicates the index number of the domain for software downloading.
5 Download Domain Header 4 Indicates the index number of the domain header to which the
Index download is performing.
6 Activated Domain Header 4 Indicates the index numbers of the domain header currently
Index running.
7 Domain Name 8 Indicates the domain name. With this product, Domain Name
indicates the field device name.
IM 01C25T02-01E
(3) DOMAIN_HEADER
Sub Size
Element Description
Index (Bytes)
1 Header Version Number 2 Indicates the version number of the header.
2 Header Size 2 Indicates the header size.
3 Manufacturer ID 6 Indicates the value of resource block’s MANUFAC_ID
(manufacturer ID) as character string data.
4 Device Family 4 Indicates the device family. With this product, Device Family
indicates the value of resource block’s DEV_TYPE as character
string data.
5 Device Type 4 Indicates the value of resource block’s DEV_TYPE as character
string data.
6 Device Revision 1 Indicates the value of resource block’s DEV_REV.
7 DD Revision 1 Indicates the value of resource block’s DD_REV.
8 Software Revision 8 Indicates the value of resource block’s SOFT_REV.
9 Software Name 8 Indicates the attribute of the binary file. With this product, Software
Name indicates either of the following:
“ORIGINAL” followed by one space: Original file
“UPDATE” followed by two spaces: Update file
10 Domain Name 8 Indicates the domain name. With this product, Domain Name
indicates the field device name.
IM 01C25T02-01E
<Appendix 8. Advanced Diagnostics> A8-1
Appendix 8. Advanced Diagnostics

A8.1 Multi-sensing Process *: VALUE_BLKF indicates blockage degree
characterized by a comparison of the high- and
Monitoring low-pressure-side fluctuation values. For the
Multi-sensing process monitoring function (option details, refer to A8.2.1.
code: /DG1) provides the advanced diagnostics
to detect the abnormal conditions in process
environment such as an impulse line etc. by using
IMPORTANT
the EJX multi-sensing technology and its unique • The pressure fluctuation amplitude in fluids
algorithm. There are following two functions. must be sufficiently large for blockages to be
detected.
 Impulse Line Blockage Detection (ILBD) • If the pressure fluctuation amplitude is too
The fluctuation change of differential pressure and low for a reference value to be obtained,
static pressure is monitored by a silicone resonant blockages detection operation cannot be
sensor and detects a potential blockage condition. performed with an alarm that the reference
The differential pressure transmitter provides also a value is invalid.
result of which pressure-side was plugged. • The pressure fluctuation amplitude may
change due to other causes unrelated with a
 Heat Trace Monitoring blockage according to process condition. In
The flange temperature is calculated by two above case, a false alarm of an impulse line
temperature sensors built in the EJX. The blockage may be generated. Before taking
temperature change enables to detect the heat action in response to a blockage alarm,
trace breakage or the abnormal temperature due to you need to consider the plant operating
the failure. conditions.
A8.2 Impulse Line Blockage  Notes for Pressure or Level

measurement
Detection (ILBD)
With pressure or level measurement, the pressure
ILBD is carried out by using statistical analysis fluctuation amplitude may reduce especially for the
derived from the measured values of process following cases.
fluctuations that exist in a fluid. An alarm on the
EJX LCD display or an analog alert is generated if  Pressure Measurement
certain blockage level is reached. EJX provides the
• A pressure transmitter is used and the pressure
following results as blockage detection.
drops to nearly the low-cut value.
(1) A Blocking and B Blocking • Even though the pressure is constant, the flow
These are blockage detections derived from decreases after a reference value is obtained.
the fluctuation value change of differential • A source of pressure fluctuation (pump,
pressure/pressure. With a differential pressure compressor, blower, etc.) is shut down. As
transmitter, each result indicates that both or a result, the pressure fluctuation amplitude
single side is plugged. decreases.
(2) Low Side Blocking
 Level Measurement
It is a low-pressur-side blockage detection
derived from the change of VALUE_BLKF* or • A transmitter is used to measure tank level and
low-pressure-side fluctuation value. the flow of fluid into or out of the tank comes to
(3) High Side Blocking a stop.
It is a high-pressure-side blockage detection • The agitator in the tank is shut down.
derived from the change of VALUE_BLKF* or • A source of pressure variation (a compressor,
low-pressure-side fluctuation. etc.) that controls the internal pressure of a
sealed (closed) tank is shut down.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Before taking action in response to a blockage alarm, you need to consider the plant operating conditions.
 Functional block diagram

The figure below shows the functional block diagram of ILBD, which is performed in the SENSOR Transducer
block.
EJX block AI
SENSOR
Transducer block Function block
block AI Output of AI
Sensor AI.OUT (1)
signals Process value Function block
block AI
Sensor
calculation Function block
Add result of
STB.RATIO_FDP
blockage detection to status STB.RATIO_FSPL
Values of blockage degree STB.RATIO_FSPH
Blockage degree STB.VALUE_FDP (2)
STB.VALUE_FSPL
STB.VALUE_FSPH
STB.VALUE_BLKF
Result of
Execution of Resource blockage detection
RS.DEVICE_STATUS_7 (3)
ILBD block Result of
blockage detection
STB.DIAG_ERR (4)
Alarm Blockage alarm STB.DIAG_H_ALM
(5)
Masking STB.DIAG_L_ALM
LCD Transducer Blockage alarm
block Display on LCD (6)
FA0801.ai
Figure A8.1 Functional Block Diagram of ILBD
The following outputs are given for the ILBD results.

Table A8.1 List of Outputs for ILBD
OUTPUT
# Remarks
Parameter name Block
OUT AI function block The result of blockage detection can be set to “UNCERTAIN: Non Specific” if
(1)
DIAG_OPTION has been set to indicate the alarm status.
RATIO_FDP SENSOR Parameters based on the fluctuation value and blockage degree
Transuducer Block [ COMP_FLG: Non-Compensation ] VALUE_FDP
RATIO_FDP = REFERENCE_FDP
[ COMP_FLG: Compensation ]
VALUE_FDP REFERENCE_DPAVG
RATIO_FDP = X
REFERENCE_FDP VALUE_DPAVG
RATIO_FSPL VALUE_FSPL
RATIO_FSPL = REFERENCE_FSPL
(2)
RATIO_FSPH VALUE_FSPH
RATIO_FSPH = REFERENCE_FSPH
VALUE_BLKF Blockage degree characterized in comparison of high-pressure side and
low-pressure side pressure fluctuation value
VALUE_FDP Average value of the sum of squares of differential pressure fluctuations
VALUE_FSPL Average value of the sum of squares of low-pressure side static pressure fluctuation
VALUE_FSPH Average value of the sum of squares of high-pressure side static pressure fluctuation
DEVICE_STATUS_7 Resource block When an impulse line blockage is detected, the result of the blockage detection
(3)
(alarm status) is indicated.
DIAG_ERR SENSOR When an impulse line blockage is detected, the results of the blockage detection
(4)
Transducer block (alarm status) are indicated.
DIAG_H_ALM SENSOR When an impulse line blockage is detected, an alert is generated by divided into
(5)
DIAG_L_ALM Transducer block high- and low-pressure sides.
(6) Display on LCD When impulse line blockage is detected, an alarm status is displayed on LCD.
FA0802.ai
IM 01C25T02-01E
A8.2.1 Blockage Detection DIAG_LIM
# Parameter Threshold value
 DIAG_LIM
[1] fdpmax Threshold to detect “A Blocking” by
When the parameter based on pressure fluctuation using RATIO_FDP
exceeds the preset value, EJX diagnoses an [2] fdpmin Threshold to detect “B Blocking” by
impulse line as blockage and gives an alarm. The using RATIO_FDP
threshold values are set to DIAG_LIM [1] to [8] in [3] fsplmax Threshold to detect “Large
Fluctuation of Low Side” by using
the SENSOR Transducer block. RATIO_FSPL
TableA8.2 shows the default values at the factory [4] fsplmin Threshold to detect “Low Side
Blocking” by using RATIO_FSPL
setting, which are different according to the model.
[5] fsphmax Threshold to detect “Large
Fluctuation of High Side” by using
NOTE RATIO_FSPH
[6] fsphmin Threshold to detect “High Side
• When ILBD is performed for the first time, Blocking” by using RATIO_FSPH
use the default value. If the pressure [7] blkfmax Threshold to detect “High Side
fluctuation amplitude is low or a false alarm Blocking” by using VALUE_BLKF
is often generated after ILBD is performed, [8] blkfmin Threshold to detect “Low Side
Blocking” by using VALUE_BLKF
change the values of DIAG_LIM according to
[9] dpavgmax Threshold to detect “Outside
the procedure described in A8.2.10. Diagosis Range” by using VALUE_
• Use Device description (DD) file for DPAVG and to detect “Invalid
parameter setting. Ref xx” by using REFERENCE_
DPAVG.
[10] dpavgmin Threshold to detect “Outside
Diagosis Range” by using VALUE_
DPAVG and to detect “Invalid
Ref xx” by using REFERENCE_
DPAVG.
Table A8.2 Default Values of DIAG_LIM

Differential pressure Flange Diaphragm Absolute Gauge Gauge/
transmitter mounted sealed pressure pressure Absolute
differential differential transmitter transmitter pressure
pressure pressure/ transmitter
INDEX Parameter transmitter pressure
transmitter
EJX110A EJX120A EJX130A EJX210A EJX118ANote 1 EJX310A EJX430A EJX510A
EJX115A EJX135A EJX438A EJX440A EJX530A
[1] fDPmax 3 3 3 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000
[2] fDPmin 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
[3] fSPlmax 5 10000 5 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000
[4] fSPlmin 0.5 0 0.5 0 0 0 0 0
[5] fSPhmax 5 10000 5 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000
[6] fSPhmin 0.5 0 0.5 0 0 0 0 0
[7] blkfmax 0.6 10 0.6 10 10 10 10 10
[8] blkfmin -0.6 -10 -0.6 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10
[9] dpavgmax 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Note2
[10] dpavgmin 0.05 0.2 0.05 -1 -1 0.05 0.05 0.05
Note2
Note 1: The default values are set for level measurement. If EJX118A is applied to the flow measurement, set the same value to
DIAG_LIM [1] to [10] as those of EJX110A.
Note 2: It indicates the threshold value for ILBD over range (refer to A8.2.5.3).
IM 01C25T02-01E
 A/B Blocking Detection 1 1
“A Blocking” and “B Blocking” indicates the result
VALUE_BLKF
VALUE_BLKF
Threshold
estimated from blockage degree based on the
Blockage Progress
difference of the high- and low-pressure-side 0 0
fluctuation values. RATIO_FDP, SQRT (VALUE_ Blockage Progress
FDP / REFERENCE_FDP) is used to detect A/B
Blocking. -1 -1
Threshold
REFERENCE_FDP is the average value of the sum
Blockage detection for Blockage detection for
of squares of differential pressure fluctuations under high-pressure side low-pressure side
normal condition. As the value of RATIO_FDP FA0803.ai
exceeds the value of DIAG_LIM [1], EJX gives Figure A8.2 Relation between Blockage Progress
basically an alarm of “A Blocking”. On the other and VALUE_BLKF
hand, if this value is below the value of DIAG_LIM
[2], EJX gives an alarm of “B Blocking. As a high- or The each threshold value to detect the high- or
low-pressure-side blockage progresses, VALUE_ low-pressure-side blockage is set to DIAG_LIM [7]
FDP increases. Therefore, “A Blocking” with a or [8].
differential pressure transmitter indicates that a
 Low Side Blocking Detection
single-side impulse line is plugged for a differential
pressure transmitter. VALUE_BLKF is preferentially used to "Low Side
As the both-side blockages progress Blocking" detection. If VALUE_BLKF cannot
simultaneously, VALUE_FDP decreases. be used, RATIO_FSPL, SQRT (VALUE_FSPL
Therefore, “B Blocking” with a differential pressure / REFERENCE_FSPL) is used to "Low Side
transmitter indicates that bothside impulse lines are Blocking" detection. REFERENCE_FSPL is
plugged. the average value of the sum of squares of low-
pressure-side static pressure fluctuations under
normal condition. As the value of RATIO_FSPL
NOTE is below the value of DIAG_LIM [4], EJX gives an
A single-side impulse line blockage may alarm of "Low Side Blocking". On the other hand, if
generate “B blocking” under the condition where this value exceeds the value of DIAG_LIM [3], EJX
the fluctuation amplitude is much different gives an alarm of “Large Fluctuation of Low Side”.
between high- and low-pressure sides.
 High Side Blocking Detection
With a transmitter to measure pressure or tank VALUE_BLKF is preferentially used to "High
level, “B Blocking” only is detected. Side Blocking" detection. If VALUE_BLKF cannot
be used, RATIO_FSPH, SQRT (VALUE_FSPH
 H/L Side Blocking Detection / REFERENCE_FSPH) is used to "High Side
EJX differential pressure transmitter enables Blocking" detection. REFERENCE_FSPH is the
to detect both-, a high-, or low-pressure-side average value of the sum of squares of high-
blockage. The blockage degree characterized pressure-side static pressure fluctuations under
by a comparison of high-pressure side and low- normal condition.
pressure-side fluctuation values, VALUE_BLKF, is As the value of RATIO_FSPH is below the value
used to detect it. The value changes within a range of DIAG_LIM [6], EJX gives an alarm of "High Side
of –1 to +1. As VALUE_BLKF approaches +1, the Blocking". On the other hand, if this value exceeds
high-pressure-side blockage progresses. On the the value of DIAG_LIM [5], EJX gives an alarm of
other hand, if it approaches -1, the low-pressure- “Large Fluctuation of High Side”.
side blockage progresses.
IM 01C25T02-01E
 Large Fluctuation Detection A8.2.2 Combination of Reference Result
When a pump or compressor starts, the large and Blockage Detection
fluctuation is generated as process condition An EJX differential pressure transmitter can detect
changes rapidly. This phenomenon affects process four modes of impulse line blockage: both-sides,
fluctuation measurement, so correct blockage high-pressure side, low-pressure side, and/or
detection is not performed. single-side when all the reference values are
If “Large fluctuation of Low Side” or “Large properly measured. However, the detectable alarm
fluctuation of High Side” is detected, consider mode combination is limited when some of the
whether a blockage result is correct. reference values are invalid. The relation between
the detectable blockage modes and reference value
The threshold values to detect large fluctuation are results are shown in the below figure.
set to DIAG_LIM [3] and [5].
Since these values are enough to detect large NOTE
fluctuation, it is not almost necessary to change
them. • REFERENCE_FDP must be larger than the
specified level shown in Table A8.3 (refer
A8.2.6). No blockage can be detected when
VALUE_FDP is not large enough.
• The plausibility of blockage detection needs
to be confirmed by blockage simulation test.
The simulation test can be performed by
the appropriate manifold operation (refer to
A8.2.8).
[Differential pressure transmitter]

Fluctuation Parameters Simulation Test Available Blockage Detection
• B Blocking detection
(by using RATIO_FDP)
REFERENCE_FDP OK • Test for low-pressure side
• Low side blockage detection
REFERENCE_FSPL OK (by using RATIO_FSPL)
REFERENCE_FSPH OK
 • Test for high-pressure side  • High side blockage detection
REFERENCE_BLKF OK (by using RATIO_FSPH)
• Test for both-pressure sides
• High/Low side blockage detection
(by using VALUE_BLKF )
• A/B Blocking detection
REFERENCE_FDP OK • Test for low-pressure side
(by using RATIO_FDP)
REFERENCE_FSPL OK • Low Side Blocking detection
REFERENCE_FSPH OK
 • Test for high-pressure side  (by using RATIO_FSPL)
REFERENCE_BLKF NG • High Side Blocking detection
• Test for both-pressure sides
(by using RATIO_FSPH)
REFERENCE_FDP OK • A Blocking detection
REFERENCE_FSPL NG (by using RATIO_FDP)
REFERENCE_FSPH OK
 • Test for high-pressure side  • High Side Blocking detection
(by using RATIO_FSPH)
REFERENCE_BLKF NG
REFERENCE_FDP OK • B Blocking detection
REFERENCE_FSPL NG (by using RATIO_FDP)
REFERENCE_FSPH NG
 • Test for both-pressure sides 
REFERENCE_BLKF NG
[Transmitter for gauge/absolute pressure and level measurement]

Fluctuation Parameters Simulation Test Available Blockage Detection
• B Blocking detection
REFERENCE_FDP OK  • Test for high-pressure side  (by using RATIO_FDP)
IM 01C25T02-01E
A8.2.3 Operating Parameters
DIAG_COUNT(Number of times: 3)
An alarm is generated.
 DIAG_MODE
DIAG_MODE gives the directive for the ILBD A B
operation. There are following three modes.
DIAG MODE
Code Mode Function
0 Stop The blockage detection operation
is stopped. Upper Threshold(DIAG_LIM)
1 Calculation The blockage detection operation
is performed.
Alarms are generated along with DIAG_PERIOD
the result.
2 Reference Reference values for the Time
blockage detection are obtained
and updated to the latest. After DIAG_PERIOD
sampling reference values, this Lower Threshold(DIAG_LIM)
mode changes to "Calculation".
When the blockage detection operation is

performed, set “Calculation” to DIAG_MODE.
“Stop” must be set when you change a threshold
value or set an alarm.
“Reference” is set in order to obtain the reference A B
fluctuation values under the normal configuration.
An alarm is generated.
 DIAG_PERIOD
DIAG_COUNT(Number of times: 3)
The values such as RATIO_FDP and BLKF are
averaged based on several hundreds of pressure Time
FA0804.ai
fluctuation values in constant time. DIAG_PERIOD
Figure A8.3 Relationship of DIAG_COUNT and
defines the sampling time. The default value at the Alarm
shipment is set to 180 seconds.
For the information on how to change the sampling The number of detection to give an alarm is set for
period, refer to A8.2.10. each blockage detection function. The default value
at the shipment is set to three times.
 DIAG_COUNT If fluctuating around the threshold value, an alarm
When the value as RATIO_FDP or BLKF exceeds may be often generated. In this case, change the
the threshold value for several times in a row, it is threshold value (DIAG_LIM) or the sampling time
estimated that the impulse line is plugged. DIAG_ (DIAG_PERIOD) to enhance the accuracy of the
COUNT defines the number of times to estimate blockage detection. Refer to A8.2.10.
blockage detection.
If DIAG_COUNT is set to three times, an alarm is
not generated at part ‘A’ in Figure A8.3. The reason
is that only the first and second values exceeded
consecutively the threshold.
When the value exceeds consecutively the
threshold value three times, an alarm is generated
(see part ‘B’ in Figure A8.3).
IM 01C25T02-01E
A8.2.4 Operating Procedure If an alarm is often generated or the process
condition changed in the ILBD operation, you need
The basic flow of the ILBD operation is as follows.
to do tuning, to change the alarm setting, or to reset
1) Initial setting the reference values.
2) Condition check
Fill out the information to the checklist, at the
3) Start up
process shown in below figure.
4) Perform the ILBD algorithm
Items on
Check sheet
1-1) Analog Alert Setting
• Enable an alert to be generated by
1, 2 ALM_SUM parameter.
• Set the report priority to DIAG_PRI
parameter.
1) Initial Setting Refer to A8.2.5
1-2) Alarm Masking

• Select the alarm status to display on
7
LCD or to give an alert by
DIAG_OPTION parameter.
Refer to A8.2.5
2-1) Check Stability of PV

3
• Check the stability of Primary value.
Refer to A8.2.6
2) Condition Check
2-2) Check Fluctuation Values
4 • Check whether the fluctuation values
are available for ILBD.
Refer to A8.2.6
3-1) Obtain Reference Values

• Obtain a reference fluctuation value of
5, 6
differential pressure/pressure and
static pressure under normal condition.
Refer to A8.2.7
3) Start up
3-2)
Check Detection Tuning
Capability NG • Change the threshold value by
10 • Simulate the blockage detection DIAG_LIM parameter.
operation with a three-valve • Change the sampling time by
manifold or stop valve. DIAG_PERIOD parameter.
Refer to A8.2.10
Refer to A8.2.8
OK
4) Perform ILBD algorithm
Spurious alarm detection.
Refer to A8.2.9
Reset Reference Values
• Reset a reference fluctuation
value of differential
Process condition is
pressure/pressure according to
changed by a comparison
process condition.
of the condition when the
reference values were Refer to A8.2.11
obtained.
Blockage Detection
Alarm is generated.
FA0805.ai
Figure A8.4 Flow Chart of ILBD Operation
IM 01C25T02-01E
A8.2.5 Alarm and Alert Setting  Report Setting
The abnormal results, as the blockage detection DIAG_PRI in SENSOR Transducer block defines
and high/low flange temperature (heat trace the priority to transfer the analog alert to the host.
monitoring) are given by an analog alert or the LCD The alert is generated according to the priority when
display of alarm status. The analog alert or the LCD interfering in other alerts.
display of alarm status is set according to the flow
shown in below figure. DIAG_PRI
Bit Description
Storage of Abnormal results
(STB.DIAG_ERR) 0 An alert is not generated.
1 An alert does not be reported to the host.
Alarm Masking 2 Disabled
(STB.DIAG_OPTION)
3-7 ADVISORY
8-15 CRITICAL
Alarm Enabling
(STB.ALAM_SUM.DISABLED) The default value at the factory setting is set to 1.
Report Setting Outside Diagnosis Range/ Set the priority according to the following procedure.
(STB.DIAG_PRI) Invalid Ref xx
Masking 1) Set "Stop" to DIAG_MODE.
2) Enter the value to DIAG_PRI in the number of 3
PV/SV/TV Status to 15.
Discrete Alarm Reflection Flag
FF Alert Notification (STB.DIAG_OPTION) Note: The setting of the highest priority is 15.
(STB.DIAG_H_ALM) Set to “Calculation” after setting the parameters.
(STB.DIAG_L_ALM) PV/SV/TV Status
A8.2.5.2 Alarm Display on LCD
Discrete Alarm Device Status
FF Alert Notify and
If the ILBD algorithm detects the abnormality, the
(RB.DEVICE_STATUS_7)
(STB.FLG_TEMP_ALM) content of the detected result is displayed with
Alarm Display “AL.88” or “AL.89” on the LCD. “AL.88” indicates
on LCD
FA0806.ai
that condition is not applicable for the abnormality
Figure A8.5 Alarm and Alert Setting detection and “AL.89” indicates the abnormality is
detected.
A8.2.5.1 Alert Setting

 Link to DIAG_H_ALM and DIAG_L_ALM
DIAG_H_ALM and DIAG_L_ALM enable to indicate
the alarm status separately divided into the high-
and low-pressure-side alert. The factory setting is
not enabled to display them. FA0808.ai
Enable to display the alarm status to DIAG_H_ALM Figure A8.6 Display Example of High Side Blocking
and DIAG_L_ALM according to the following
procedure. The alarm display on LCD regarding ILBD is
described in Table 8.12 of the section 8.
1) Set "Stop" to DIAG_MODE.
2) Uncheck the checkbox of "Diag Alm Disabled” A8.2.5.3 Alarm Status
or “Fail Alm Disabled”, which is corresponding When the algorithm of ILBD and Heat trace
to bit 8, in ALARM_SUM. monitoring detect the abnormality, the result is
stored in DIAG_ERR. The alarm status based on
NOTE the detected abnormality is displayed to DIAG_ERR
in the SENSOR Transducer block.
In DevRev5, bit8 of “ALARM_SUM” is commonly
used by “Diag Alm Disabled” and “Fail Alm
Disabled”. If “Diag Alm Disabled” is not displayed
on DD/DTM display and “Fail Alm Disabled” is
shown, clear the selection of “Fail Alm Disabled”.
Note: Set to “Calculation” after setting the parameters.
IM 01C25T02-01E
DIAG_ERR 1.000
Outside Diagnosis Range
TEMP_ALM
0.80
DIAG_H_
DIAG_L_
FLG_
ALM
ALM
Bit Alarm status
Detectable
0 Not used. range
1 Not used. 0.000
2 A Blocking  
3 Large Fluctuation of Low Side  DPAvg
4 Large Fluctuation of High Side 

5 Low Side Blocking  -0.80
6 High Side Blocking 
Outside Diagnosis Range
7 B Blocking   -1.000
FA0807.ai
8 Invalid Ref BlkF  
9 Invalid Ref fSPh 
 Invalid Ref BlkF, fSPh, fSPl, or fDP
10 Invalid Ref fSPl 
11 Invalid Ref fDP   This alarm indicates that the reference value under
12 Outside Diagnosis Range   normal condition is invalid. If REFERENCE_BLKF
13 Flg Temp Low Alarm  is invalid, the blockage detection excluding VALUE_
14 Flg Temp High Alarm  BLKF is carried out. If blockage detection function
15 Reflect Blockage to PV/SV/TV based on VALUE_BLKF is required, obtain the
status reference value again.
Note: The bit 13 and 14 are used for Heat trace monitorig
function. Also when REFERENCE_DPAVG is below DIAG_
LIM [10] or exceeds DIAG_LIM [9], all reference
 Outside Diagnosis Range
value becomes invalid so that “Invalid Ref fDP”,
1) dpavgmax “Invalid Ref fSPl”, “Invalid Ref fSPh”, and “Invalid
The dpavgmax, DIAG_LIM [9], is the upper Ref BlkF” are generated.
limit of the diagnostic capability range. The limit
value can be changed when DIAG_MODE is A8.2.5.4 Alarm Masking
“Stop”.
 DIAG_OPTION
VALUE_DPAVG indicates the ratio of the
average of differential pressure to the maximum The alarms linked to an analog alert and LCD
span regarded as 1. When VALUE_DPAVG display are selected by DIAG_OPTION in the
exceeds this limit, “Outside Diagnosis Range” SENSOR Transducer block. The BIT of DIAG_
is generated so that the blockage detection OPTION is corresponding to that of DIAG_ERR.
becomes impossible. To link the alarm to an analog alert and LCD display,
2) dpavgmin follow the procedure below.
The dpavgmin, DIAG_LIM [10], is the lower
limit of the diagnostic capability range. The limit 1) Set "Stop" to DIAG_MODE.
value can be changed when DIAG_MODE is 2) Check each checkbox of the alarm, which is
“Stop”. selectable from bit 2 to bit 14.
When VALUE_DPAVG is below this limit, Note: The bit 13 and 14 are used for Heat trace monitoring
“Outside Diagnosis Range” is generated so that function.
Set to “Calculation” after setting the parameters.
the blockage detection becomes impossible.
<Example>
When the level range that can be measured by the
transmitter with 100 kPa span is -80 to 80 kPa, the
limits are set as follows.
• dpavgmax: 0.80
• dpavgmin: -0.80
IM 01C25T02-01E
A8.2.5.5 Reflect Blockage to PV/SV/TV Confirm that each value of VALUE_FDP, VALUE_
Status FSPL, VALUE_FSPH, and VALUE_BLKF is more
“Reflect Blockage to PV/SV/TV Status” than the value specified in the below table.
corresponding to bit 15 in DIAG_OPTION is Table A8.3 Requiremnents to apply ILBD
used to link the alarm to the OUT signal status of
Condition
PRIMARY_VALUE, SECONDARY_VALUE, and
VALUE_FDP 7×10-10 or more
TERTIARY_VALUE.
VALUE_FSPL 1×10-10 or more
When the ILBD algorithm detects the abnormality, VALUE_FSPH 1×10-10 or more
each signal status becomes “UNCERTAIN: Non VALUE_BLKF -0.5 to 0.5
Specific”.
The alarm is linked to the signal status of PV, SV  VALUE_FDP is not enough
and TV, according to the following procedure. No blockage can be detected if VALUE_FDP is not
1) Set "Stop" to DIAG_MODE. larger than the specified value.
2) Check the checkbox of “Availability for the
Status” of DIAG_OPTION.  Only VALUE_FDP is enough
Note:Set to “Calculation” after setting the parameters.

“A Blocking” or “B Blocking” can be detected if
VALUE_FSPL and VALUE_FSPH are not larger
than specified values.
NOTE
 VALUE_FDP and VALUE_FSPL are enough
The alarms of "Invalid Ref xx", "Outside
Diagnosis Range" do not link to the signal status “High Side Blocking” and “Large Fluctuation of High
of PV, SV, and TV. Side” can not be detected if VALUE_FSPH is not
larger than specified value.
A8.2.6 Condition Check  VALUE_FDP and VALUE_FSPH are enough
After the EJX differential pressure/pressure
“Low Side Blocking” and “Large Fluctuation of Low
transmitter was installed, it is necessary to confirm
Side” can not be detected if VALUE_FSPL is not
that the Primary Value (PV) is stable under the
larger than specified value.
normal operating condition and that fluctuation
amplitude under the normal operating condition is  VALUE_FDP, VALUE_FSPL and VALUE_FSPH
large enough to detect the blockage. are enough
A8.2.6.1 Stability of Primary Value All alarm modes can be detected even if VALUE_
1) Observe the value change of PRIMARY_ BLKF is not within the specified values.
VALUE under the normal operating condition
A8.2.7 Obtain Reference Values
for 10 minutes.
2) Confirm the value change is less than 10%. The pressure fluctuation values are reduced
when the impulse line is plugged. Therefore, the
If the value change is more than 10%, the error
reference value is required to determine the degree
influences pressure fluctuation value so that the
of reduction
blockage detection becomes Unreliable. You need
to consider the plant operating conditions.
A8.2.6.2 Fluctuation Value
NOTE
The blockage detection may not be carried
out correctly when pressure fluctuation
amplitude especially with the pressure and level
measurement, is small.
IM 01C25T02-01E
 Reference Values
IMPORTANT Confirm the latest values are obtained into the
following parameters.
• If the impulse line is about to be plugged at
the time when a reference value is obtained, • REFERENCE_FDP
blockages cannot be detected accurately. • REFERENCE_FSPL
The impulse lines on both the high-pressure • REFERENCE_FSPH
and low-pressure sides need to be cleaned • REFERENCE_BLKF
before a reference value is obtained. • REFERENCE_DPAVG
• All air bubbles need to be adequately purged  Invalid Ref BlkF, fSPh, fSPl, or fDP
before a reference value is obtained.
When the enough reference fluctuation value is not
• Reference values must be obtained under
obtained, an alarm of Invalid Reference value for
operating condition.
each parameter is generated and also the part of
• Do not obtain the reference values when the
ILBD function related to the Invalid Ref BlkF, fSPh,
BLOCK_MODE of SENSOR Transducer is
fSPl, or fDP is not carried out.
O/S. If carried out, an alarm of "Invalid Ref
xx" is generated. Some hosts may have a Confirm the alarm of Invalid Ref BlkF, fSPh, fSPl, or
function to automatically change the mode fDP is not displayed in DIAG_ERR.
to O/S when changing the setting. In such If an alarm of Invalid Reference value is generated,
case, disable that function. consider the process condition or obtain the
reference fluctuation values again.
 Start of Sampling
The sampling of reference value is carried out NOTE
for 180 seconds, which is the default value set to Even if an alarm of Invalid Ref BlkF, fSPh, fSPl,
DIAG_PERIOD. or fDP is generated, “Calculation” in DIAG_
1) Confirm that the sampling period MODE is kept.
(DIAG_PERIOD) is set to 180 seconds.
2) Set “Reference” to DIAG_MODE. A8.2.8 Capability Test of Blockage
The sampling starts soon after the setting. Detection Operation
IMPORTANT Before performing the ILBD operation, check the

capability of the blockage detection operation.
• For the each parameter, the one value is The simulation test is performed by closing motion
given. If “Reference” is set to DIAG_MODE of a three-valve manifold or stop valve. When
again, the value is updated and overwritten. simulated blockage occurs, confirm that an alarm is
• If the power supply is shut down during the generated.
sampling, DIAG_MODE becomes “Stop”.
Set “Reference” to DIAG_MODE in order to
carry out the sampling again. NOTE
The fluctuation amplitude of atmospheric
 End of Sampling pressure is nearly zero with pressure or level
measurement. In such case, simulate the
After about 180 seconds, the sampling
blockage detection by closing the valve where
automatically finishes. The “Reference” setting
the fluctuation existed.
of DIAG_MODE changes automatically to
“Calculation” and the termination time is recorded to
REFERENCE_TIME.  Simulation of High-pressure-side
1) Confirm that the setting of DIAG_MODE
Blockage
changes to “Calculation”. 1) Close the high-pressure-side valve.
2) Check the termination time recorded into 2) Confirm the value of PRIMARY_VALUE is
REFERENCE_TIME. stable. If unstable, open valve a little.
IM 01C25T02-01E
3) Set “Calculation” to DIAG_MODE so as to start 3) Set “Calculation” status to DIAG_MODE.
blockage detection operation. If the reference value has not yet been
4) Check that an alarm of “High Side Blocking” is obtained, set “Reference” to DIAG_MODE.
generated after the time that consists of DIAG_ After obtained the reference values, the ILBD
PERIOD and DIAG_COUNT passed. starts automatically. At the same time, DIAG_
5) Check also the operation of the analog alert if MODE changes automatically from “Reference”
an analog alert is set. to “Calculation”.
6) Open the valve completely and check that there
are no alarms. A8.2.10 Tuning
 Simulation of Low-pressure-side When the pressure fluctuation amplitude in fluids is
Blockage not sufficiently large or an alarm is often generated
1) Close the low-pressure-side valve. according to the process condition, tune up by
2) Confirm the value of PRIMARY_VALUE is changing the threshold for the blockage detection
stable. If unstable, open valve a little. (DIAG_LIM) or the sampling period (DIAG_
3) Set “Calculation” to DIAG_MODE so as to start PERIOD) to enhance the accuracy of the blockage
blockage detection operation. detection.
4) Check that an alarm of “Low Side Blocking” is The ILBD operation must be stopped to tune up.
generated after the time that consists of DIAG_ Set “Stop” to DIAG_MODE.
PERIOD and DIAG_COUNT passed.
5) Check also the operation of the analog alert if A8.2.10.1 Threshold Value
an analog alert is set. The figure below shows the image of tuning effect
6) Open the valve completely and check that there with a monochrome bar.
are no alarms.
(a) The tuning image of the threshold values for
 Simulation of Both-pressure-side 1) RATIO_FDP Sqrt
Blockage (VALUE_FDP/REFERENCE_FDP),
1) Close the both-pressure-side valves. 2) RATIO_FSPL Sqrt
2) Confirm the value of PRIMARY_VALUE is (VALUE_FSPL/REFERENCE_FSPL),
stable. If unstable, open valve a little. 3) RATIO_FSPH Sqrt
3) Set “Calculation” to DIAG_MODE so as to start (VALUE_FSPH/REFERENCE_FSPH)
blockage detection operation. 0 1 3
4) Check that an alarm of “B Blocking” is
generated after the time that consists of DIAG_
Threshold (lower side) Threshold (upper side)
PERIOD and DIAG_COUNT passed.
5) Check also the operation of the analog alert if
1) DIAG_LIM [2] 1) DIAG_LIM [1]
an analog alert is set. 2) DIAG_LIM [4] 2) DIAG_LIM [3]
6) Open the valves completely and check that 3) DIAG_LIM [6] 3) DIAG_LIM [5]
there are no alarms.
(b) The tuning image of the threshold values for
A8.2.9 Start ILBD Operation 4) Sqrt (VALUE_BLKF/REFERENCE_BLKF)
If process condition and capability to detect a -1 0 1
blockage are confirmed, the ILBD operation can be
started according to the following procedure. Threshold (lower side) Threshold (upper side)
1) Check the value of sampling period
(DIAG_PERIOD). 4) DIAG_LIM [8] 4) DIAG_LIM [7]
2) Check the number of times that detect the
FA0809.ai
blockage consecutively in order to give an Figure A8.7 Tuning Image of Threshold Value
alarm (DIAG_COUNT). The default value at the
shipment is set to 3 times.
IM 01C25T02-01E
 Move the threshold toward the white. The longer the sampling time, better the expected
accuracy.
• It becomes increasingly likely to give an alarm
due to the disturbance from environment (1) Set “Stop” to DIAG_MODE.
change. (2) Enter the value to DIAG_PERIOD within
• If flow/differential pressure is below DIAG_LIM the range of 20 to 65535 (seconds).
[10] or exceeds DIAG_LIM [9], pressure Note: Set to “Calculation” after setting the parameters.
fluctuation is likely too small or too large to
detect the blockage. Also, the accuracy can be improved by increasing
the number of DIAG_COUNT.
 Move the threshold toward the black.
• It enables to be insusceptible to disturbance A8.2.10.3 ILBD Range Setting
such as environment change and to detect the When the VALUE_DPAVG is less than the value of
blockage easier. the DIAG_LIM [10] or exceeds the value of DIAG_
• It becomes giving an alarm of the blockage after LIM [9] shown in Table A8. 2, EJX gives an alarm of
the blockage has been progressed. “Outside Diagnosis Range”.
The default values at the factory setting are the If flow/differential pressure is less than the default
values of DIAG_LIM [1] to [8] shown in Table A8. 2. threshold value of DIAG_LIM [10], pressure
fluctuation is not large enough to detect the
Change the threshold value to solve your problem blockage. To prevent the fault blockage detection,
according to the above image the threshold value should be changed to larger
(1) Set “Stop” to DIAG_MODE. value.
(2) Change the unsuitable value of DIAG_ (1) Set “Stop” to DIAG_MODE.
LIM corresponding to the each blockage (2) Enter the value to DIAG_LIM [10].
detection.
Note: Set to “Calculation” after setting the parameters.
Note:Set to “Calculation” after setting the parameters.
A8.2.10.4 COMP_FLG
DIAG_LIM When “Compensation” is selected in COMP_FLG,
# Parameter Threshold value RATIO_FDP is compensated by following formula
[1] fdpmax Threshold to detect “A Blocking” by and used as treatable monitoring value, CRATIO_
using RATIO_FDP FDP.
[2] fdpmin Threshold to detect “B Blocking” by
using RATIO_FDP VALUE_FDP REFERENCE_DPAVG
CRATIO_FDP = X
[3] fsplmax Threshold to detect “Large REFERENCE_FDP VALUE_DPAVG
Fluctuation of Low Side” by using
RATIO_FSPL On the other hand, if the compensation is not
[4] fsplmin Threshold to detect “Low Side necessary, “Non-compensation” is selected in
Blocking” by using RATIO_FSPL
COMP_FLG and RATIO_FDP is used as NRATIO_
[5] fsphmax Threshold to detect “Large
Fluctuation of High Side” by using FDP.
RATIO_FSPH
VALUE_FDP
[6] fsphmin Threshold to detect “High Side NRATIO_FDP = REFERENCE_FDP
Blocking” by using RATIO_FSPH
[7] blkfmax Threshold to detect “High Side
Blocking” by using VALUE_BLKF A8.2.11 Reset of Reference Value
[8] blkfmin Threshold to detect “Low Side
Blocking” by using VALUE_BLKF When there are large flow change or the change of
fluid under the measured process conditions, obtain
the reference value again.
A8.2.10.2 Sampling Period
If fluctuating around the threshold value, an If flow change by a comparison of the reference
alarm may be often generated. When the above value is ±25% or more, you need to obtain the
phenomenon happens, the sampling time (DIAG_ reference value again.
PERIOD) can be changed as as to enhance the
accuracy of the blockage detection.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A8.2.12 ILBD Parameter Lists
All the ILBD parameters belong to the SENSOR Transducer block.
Note: The Write Mode column contains the modes in which each parameter is write enabled.
O/S: Write enabled in O/S mode.
MAN: Write enabled in Man mode and O/S mode.
AUTO: Write enabled in Auto mode, Man mode, and O/S mode.
Relative Factory Write
Index Parameter Name Explanation
Index Default Mode
66 2066 DIAG_MODE Stop (0) AUTO Select the function mode for the ILBD.
Stop (0): The blockage detection is stopped.
Calculation (1): The blockage detection is carried out. The alarms
are generated along with the detected result.
Reference (2): The reference values are obtained and the update
values are overwritten. After setting, this mode
changes automatically to Calculation (1)
67 2067 DIAG_PERIOD 180 (s) AUTO Set the data acquisition period for ILBD within the range of 20
to 65535 (s). Writable only when DIAG_MODE is Stop(0). If the
process fluctuation values are unsteady, change this value to the
longer to enhance the accuracy of the blockage detection.
68 2068 DIAG_PRI 1 AUTO Set alert (DIAG_H_ALM and DIAG_L_ALM) priority for ILBD.
Writable only when DIAG_MODE is Stop(0).
69 2069 DIAG_ERR 0x0000 — The following ILBD results are shown.
• A Blocking (bit 2)
• Large Fluctuation of Low Side (bit 3)
• Large Fluctuation of High Side (bit 4)
• Low Side Blocking (bit 5)
• High Side Blocking (bit 6)
• B Blocking (bit 7)
• Invalid Ref BlkF (bit 8)
• Invalid Ref fSPh (bit 9)
• Invalid Ref fSPl (bit 10)
• Invalid Ref fDP (bit 11)
• Outside Diagnosis Range (bit 12)
• Flg Temp Low Alarm (bit 13)
• Flg Temp High Alarm (bit 14)
Bit 15 is used to link the alarm to status of PRIMARY_VALUE,

SECONDARY_VALUE, and TERTIARY_VALUE.
70 2070 DIAG_H_ALM — Alerts for high-pressure side are indicated.
• A Blocking
• B Blocking
• Large Fluctuation of High Side
• High Side Blocking
• Invalid Reference value (BlkF, fSPh, or fDP)
• Outside Diagnosis Range
71 2071 DIAG_L_ALM — Alerts for low-pressure side blockage are indicated due to the
following factors.
• A Blocking
• B Blocking
• Large Fluctuation of Low Side
• Low Side Blocking
• Invalid Reference value (BlkF, fSPl, or fDP)
• Outside Diagnosis Range
72 2072 DIAG_OPTION 0x08FC AUTO The alarm status linked to an analog alert and LCD display is
selected by DIAG_OPTION in the SENSOR Transducer block.
The alarm selected in DIAG_OPTION is corresponding to bit of
DIAG_ERR.
BIT 15 is used to link the alarm to the status of PRIMARY_VALUE,

SECONDARY_VALUE, and TERTIARY_VALUE.
If set to 1, the signal status becomes “UNCERTAIN: Non Specific”
when the ILBD algorithm detects the abnormality.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Index Default Mode
73 2073 REF_LIM_FDPMIN 7.0E-10 AUTO Lower limit to judge whether REFERENCE_FDP is available for
ILBD operation. Writable only when Diag Mode is Stop(0).
74 2074 REF_LIM_FSPMIN 1.0E-10 AUTO Lower limit to judge whether REFERENCE_FSPL and
REFERENCE_FSPH are available for ILBD operation.
Writable only when Diag Mode is Stop(0).
75 2075 REF_LIM_BLKFMAX 0.5 AUTO Upper limit to judge whether REFERENCE_BLKF is available for
ILBD operation.
Writable only when Diag Mode is Stop(0).
76 2076 COMP_FLAG 0 AUTO Whether RATIO_FDP is referred by CRATIO_FDP or NRATIO_FDP
(Compensation) is selected.
• Compensation(0)
• Non-Compensation(1)
77 2077 DIAG_LIM Refer to AUTO Set the ten threshold values for ILBD.
Table A8.2 [1] Upper limit to detect “A Blocking”
[2] Lower limit to detect “B Blocking”
[3] Upper limit to detect “Large Fluctuation of Low Side”
[4] Lower limit to detect “Low Side Blocking”
[5] Upper limit to detect “Large Fluctuation of High Side”
[6] Lower limit to detect “High Side Blocking”
[7] Upper limit to detect “High Side Blocking” by using VALUE_
BLKF
[8] Lower limit to detect “Low Side Blocking” by using VALUE_BLKF
[9] Upper limit to detect “Outside Diagnosis Range”
[10] Lower limit to detect “Outside Diagnosis Range”
78 2078 DIAG_COUNT 3 AUTO When the statistical value such as VALUE_FDP and VALUE_BLKF
exceeds consecutively the threshold by number of times preset to
this parameter, it is estimated that the impulse line is plugged.

If the process fluctuation values are unsteady, increase this
numbers to enhance the accuracy of the blockage detection.
79 2079 REFERENCE_TIME 0x00000000 AUTO The date and time when the reference values were obtained are
automatically recorded when DIAG_MODE is set to Reference (2).
80 2080 REFERENCE_FDP 0x00, 0 AUTO The reference value of VALUE_FDP obtained at normal operating
condition is automatically recorded when DIAG_MODE is set to
Reference (2).
81 2081 REFERENCE_FSPL 0x00, 0 AUTO The reference value of VALUE_FSPL obtained at normal operating
Reference (2).
82 2082 REFERENCE_FSPH 0x00, 0 AUTO The reference value of VALUE_FSPH obtained at normal operating
Reference (2).
83 2083 REFERENCE_BLKF 0x00, 0 AUTO VALUE_BLKF obtained under normal condition.
84 2084 REFERENCE_ 0x00, 0 AUTO The average value of differential pressure obtained at normal
DPAVG operating condition is automatically recorded when DIAG_MODE is
set to Reference (2).
85 2085 VALUE_TIME — The date and time when the statistical values such as VALUE_FDP
and VALUE_BLKF were calculated are recorded.
86 2086 VALUE_FDP — Average value of the sum of squares of differential pressure/
pressure fluctuations.
87 2087 VALUE_FSPL — Average value of the sum of squares of low-pressure side static
88 2088 VALUE_FSPH — The average value of the sum of squares of low-pressure side static
89 2089 VALUE_BLKF — Blockage degree characterized in comparison of high-pressure side
and low-pressure side pressure fluctuation values.
90 2090 VALUE_DPAVG — Ratio of the average of differential pressure/pressure to the
maximum span of an EJX
91 2091 RATIO_FDP — CRATIO_FDP or NRATIO_FDP is used by COMP_FLG setting.
VALUE_FDP decreases and this parameter is used to determine
whether single or both side is plugged.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Index Default Mode
92 2092 RATIO_FSPL — SQRT (VALUE_FSPL/REFERENCE_FSPL).
VALUE_FSPL decreases and this parameter is used to determine
whether low-pressure-side is plugged.
93 2093 RATIO_FSPH — SQRT (VALUE_FSPH/REFERENCE_FSPH).
VALUE_FSPH decreases and this parameter is used to determine
whether high-pressure-side is plugged.
94 2094 CRATIO_FDP — RATIO_FDP is compensated by following formula and used as
treatable monitoring value when the flow change is too large or
small.
CRATIO_FDP = Sqrt (VALUE_FDP/REFERENCE_FDP)
X|REFERENCE_DPAVG / DPAVG)|
When Compensation is selected in COMP_FLG, CRATIO_FDP is
used as monitoring value.
95 2095 NRATIO_FDP — When Non-compensation is selected in COMP_FLG, NRATIO_
FDP is used as monitoring value NRATIO_FDP = Sqrt (VALUE_
FDP/REFERENCE_FDP)
96 2096 DIAG_APPLICABLE — After the reference value is obtained, the applicable blockage
detection is displayed on this parameter.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A8.2.13 Checklist
Fill out the below checklist according to the operation flow of the ILBD in order to keep the important
information for the blockage detection.
Checklist (1/5)
No. Items Parameters Result Example
1 Enable Analog Alert to Be Generated ALARM_SUM (Index: 2063) 
“Diag Alm Disable”
• Uncheck the checkbox of “Diag Alm
Disable” in ALARM_SUM.
2 Priority Setting of Analog Alert DIAG_PRI (Index: 2068) 3
• Enter a value of more than 3 to DIAG_
PRI. (3 is recommended.)
3 Stability of PRIMARY_VALUE Status Good
(differential pressure/pressure) under
normal condition
• Check that the status of PRIMARY_ PRIMARY_VALUE (Index: 2014) Max.: Max.: 12.3 kPa
VALUE is “GOOD”. Min.: Min.: 12.1 kPa
• Check the maximum and minimum
values of PRIMARY_VALUE.
4 VALUE_FDP under normal condition VALUE_FDP (Index: 2086) 
• Check that the value of VALUE_FDP is
more than 7×10-10.
5 Start to obtain Reference values DIAG_MODE (Index: 2066) 
• Set Reference to DIAG_MODE.
6 End of Reference Value Sampling DIAG_MODE (Index: 2066) 
• Check that DIAG_MODE is
“Calcuration”, after the time set to
DIAG_PERIOD passed.
7 Alarm setting DIAG_OPTION (Index: 2072)
• Record the status of Checkbox in A Blocking  
DIAG_OPTION. Large Fluctuation of Low Side  
Large Fluctuation of High Side  
Low Side Blocking  
High Side Blocking  
B Blocking  
Invalid Ref BlkF  
Invalid Ref fSPh  
Invalid Ref fSPl  
Invalid Ref fDP  
Outside Diagnosis Range  
Reflect Blockage to PV/SV/TV  
Status
IM 01C25T02-01E
Checklist (2/5)
8 Alarm status DIAG_ERR (Index: 2069)
• Check the alarm status shown in A Blocking  
DIAG_ERR. Large Fluctuation of Low Side  
• Check that the alarm status of Large Fluctuation of High Side  
“Outside Diagnosis Range” is not Low Side Blocking  
shown in DIAG_ERR.
High Side Blocking  
B Blocking  
Invalid Ref BlkF  
Invalid Ref fDP  
Reflect Blockage to PV/SV/TV Status  
9 ILBD parameters DIAG_PERIOD (Index: 2067) 180
• Record the values of parameters for DIAG_LIM (Index: 2077)
ILBD operation. DIAG_LIM [1] 3.000000
• Check the status of parameters for DIAG_LIM [2] 0.300000
ILBD operation. DIAG_LIM [3] 5.000000
DIAG_LIM [4] 0.500000
*: Record the value after checked DIAG_LIM [5] 5.000000
that the status of each parameter is
“GOOD”. DIAG_LIM [6] 0.500000
DIAG_LIM [7] 0.600000
DIAG_LIM [8] -0.600000
DIAG_LIM [9] 1.000000
DIAG_LIM [10] 0.050000
DIAG_COUNT (Index: 2078) 3
REFERENCE_TIME (Index: 2079) 16:22:55.876
01/31/2008
REFERENCE_FDP* (Index: 2080) 7.43245e-9
REFERENCE_FSPL* (Index: 2081) 7.25765e-9
REFERENCE_FSPH* (Index: 2082) 7.18374e-9
REFERENCE_DPAVG* (Index: 2084) 5.364248
VALUE_TIME (Index: 2085) 16:22:55.876
01/31/2008
VALUE_FDP (Index: 2086) * 7.48562e-9
VALUE_FSPL (Index: 2087) * 7.23277e-9
VALUE_FSPH (Index: 2088) * 7.14085e-9
VALUE_BLKF (Index: 2089) * -0.287259
VALUE_DPAVG (Index: 2090) * 0.055957
IM 01C25T02-01E
Checklist (3/5)
Go to the following step according to the result of "Invalid Ref xx" shown in the DIAG_ERR of 8th check item.
DIAG_ERR (Index: F2086)
Check item
Invalid Ref fSPh Invalid Ref fSPl Invalid Ref fdP
    10-a
    10-b
: The alarm is generated.

: The alarm is not generated.

10-a Simulation of Blockage detection
operation
• High Side Blocking: 10-a-1
• Low Side Blocking: 10-a-2
• Both Side Blocking: 10-a-3
10-a-1 High Side Blocking
• Close the high-pressure side valve
completely.
• Record the values of VALUE_# after VALUE_FDP (Index: 2086)* 7.48562e-9
the certain time, (DIAG_PERIOD ×
DIAG_COUNT), passed. VALUE_FSPL (Index: 2087) * 7.23277e-9
VALUE_FSPH (Index: 2088) * 7.14085e-9
*: Record the value after checked that
the status is “GOOD”. VALUE_BLKF (Index: 2089) -0.287259
• Record the status of Checkbox in DIAG_OPTION (Index: 2072)
DIAG_OPTION. A Blocking  
• Check that the alarms status of “A
Large Fluctuation of Low Side  
Blocking” and “High Side Blocking”
are set. Large Fluctuation of High Side  
Low Side Blocking  
Note: If the alarm of “Outside Diagnosis High Side Blocking  
Range” is generated, the valve may
B Blocking  
be closed too much tightly. Open
valve a little and record the updated Invalid Ref BlkF  
status of the parameters. Invalid Ref fSPh  
Status
• Check that the alarm of “High Side DIAG_ERR (Index: 2069)
Blocking” is generated.
• Check that the alarm of “Low Side High Side Blocking  
Blocking” is not generated. Low Side Blocking  
IM 01C25T02-01E
Checklist (4/5)
10-a-2 Low Side Blocking
• Close the low-pressure side valve
completely.
• Record the values of VALUE_# after VALUE_FDP (Index: 2086) * 7.48562e-9
DIAG_COUNT), passed. VALUE_FSPL (Index: 2087) * 7.23277e-9
*: Record the value after checked that VALUE_FSPH (Index: 2088) 7.14085e-9
the status is “GOOD”. VALUE_BLKF (Index: 2089) * -0.287259
DIAG_OPTION. A Blocking  
• Check that the alarms status of “A
Blocking” and “Low Side Blocking” are
set. Large Fluctuation of High Side  
Note: If the alarm of “Outside Diagnosis High Side Blocking  
B Blocking  
valve a little and record the updated Invalid Ref BlkF  
status of the parameters. Invalid Ref fSPh  
Status
• Check that the alarm of “Low Side DIAG_ERR (Index: 2069)
Blocking” is generated.
• Check that the alarm of “High Side Low Side Blocking  
Blocking” is not generated. High Side Blocking  
10-a-3 Both Side Blocking
• Close the both-pressure side valves
completely.
• Record the values of VALUE_# after VALUE_FDP (Index: 2086) 7.48562e-9
DIAG_COUNT), passed. VALUE_FSPL (Index: 2087) 7.23277e-9
*: Record the value after checked that VALUE_FSPH (Index: 2088) 7.14085e-9
the status is “GOOD”. VALUE_BLKF (Index: 2089) -0.287259
DIAG_OPTION. A Blocking  
• Check that the alarms status of “High
Side Blocking” , “Low Side Blocking”
and “B Blocking” are set. Large Fluctuation of High Side  
Note: If the alarm of “Outside Diagnosis High Side Blocking  
be closed too much tightly. B Blocking  
Open valve a little and record the Invalid Ref BlkF  
updated status of the parameters. Invalid Ref fSPh  
Status
• Check that the alarm of “B Blocking” is DIAG_ERR (Index: 2069)
generated. B Blocking  
IM 01C25T02-01E
Checklist (5/5)
10-b Simulation of Blockage detection
operation
• Close completely the valve for the
side where the alarm of Invalid
Reference Value is not generated.
For the case that the high-pressure side VALUE_FDP (Index: 2086) 7.48562e-9
valve is closed;
• Record the values of VALUE_# after
DIAG_COUNT), passed. VALUE_FSPH (Index: 2088) 7.14085e-9
the status is “GOOD”.
For the case that the low-pressure side VALUE_FDP (Index: 2086) 7.48562e-9
valve is closed;
• Record the values of VALUE_# after
DIAG_COUNT), passed. VALUE_FSPL (Index: 2087) 7.23277e-9
the status is “GOOD”.
DIAG_OPTION. A Blocking  
• Check that the alarms status of “B
Blocking” is set.
Large Fluctuation of High Side  
Note: If the alarm of “Outside Diagnosis Low Side Blocking  
Range” is generated, the valve may High Side Blocking  
B Blocking  
valve a little and record the updated
status of the parameters. Invalid Ref BlkF  
Invalid Ref fSPl  
Status
• Check that the alarm of “B Blocking” is DIAG_ERR (Index: 2069)
generated. B Blocking  
IM 01C25T02-01E
A8.3 Heat Trace Monitoring [Calculation formula]
FLG_TEMP_VAL(FT) = CT + Cf × (CT - AT)
The EJX with Heat trace monitoring function
calculates the flange temperature by using the two
The FLG_TEMP_VAL (FT) is assigned to Process
temperature sensors built in the EJX. An analog
Value (PV) in the AI function block. If the flange
alert is generated if the temperature reached to the
temperature exceeds the value preset to the
preset level.
HI_LIM, LO_LIM, HI_HI_LIM, or LO_LO_LIM in the
The flange temperature is based on the following AI function block, an analog alert is generated.
parameters and calculation formula.
[Parameters]
NOTE
Parameter name Explanation The flange temperature is calculated by the
CAP_TEMP_VAL (CT) Measured capsule calculation formula assumed that the capsule
temperature value part of EJX is heated up or kept warm by an
AMP_TEMP_VAL (AT) Measured amplifier
electrical heater or steam. In the case of an
temperature value
FLG_TEMP_VAL (FT) Flange temperature value atmosphere temperature or less, the difference
(Calculated value) of temperature of approximately 3 to 4°C
FLG_TEMP_COEF (Cf) Coefficient to calculate flange may occur because the amplifier temperature
temperature becomes higher than the capsule temperature.
FLG_TEMP_H_LIM Threshold to generate Flg
Temp High Alarm
FLG_TEMP_L_LIM Threshold to generate Flg
Temp Low Alarm
SENSOR Transducer Block AI function

Block
PRIMARY_VALUE CHANNEL=1
Amplifier
Temperature AMP_TEMP_VAL CHANNEL=5
Capsule
Temperature CAP_TEMP_VAL CHANNEL=4
Calculation of
FLANG_TEMP_VAL
FLG_TEMP_COEFF
CT + (CT - AT) x Cf
HI_LIM
CHANNEL=6
LO_LIM
Heat Trace Monitoring
FLG_TEMP_H_LIM
FLG_TEMP_VAL
FLG_TEMP_L_LIM
Resorce
Block
DIAG_OPTION DIAG_PRI
DEVICE_
DIAG_ERR
STATUS[7]
ALM_SUM.disadle FLG_TEMP_ALM
LCD
Alarm and Alert FA0810.ai
Figure A8.8 Functional Block Diagram of Heat Trace Monitoring
IM 01C25T02-01E
A8.3.1 FLG_TEMP_COEF Setting A8.3.3 Assignment of FLG_TEMP_VAL to
Process Value (PV) in AI Function
The value calculated according to the following
block
procedure is set to the FLG_TEMP_COEFF.
The EJX has four AI function blocks which of
• To enhance the calculation accuracy of the
each has one channel. If set 6 to the channel of AI
flange temperature, measure the actual flange
function block, the FLG_TEMP_VAL is assigned to
temperature by using the temperature sensor
Process Value (PV) in AI function block. The unit of
etc.
the flange temperature follows the setting of XD_
• Calculate the ratio of the capsule temperature
SCALE in the assigned AI function block.
to the capsule temperature minus the amplifier
temperature from the two temperature values To Assign CAP_TEMP_VAL or AMP_TEMP_VAL to
measured by EJX. Process Value (PV) in AI function block, set 4 or 5 to
• Derive the FLG_TEMP_COEF from the the channel of AI function block.
measured flange temperature and the ratio
of the capsule temperature to the amplifier A8.3.4 Analog Alert
temperature in accordance with the following Since Flange temperature is assigned to an AI
calculation formula. Function Block, an analog alert can be generated
FLG_TEMP_COEFF(Cf) = by OUT_D in AI Block.
(Actual measured value of Flange temperature) - CT
CT - AT
For the detail of the analog alert setting, refer to
6.6.5.
A8.3.2 Alert and Alarm Setting
A8.3.5 Out of Temperature Measurement
The abnormal results of flange temperature (heat Range
trace monitoring) are given by an alert or the LCD
display of alarm status. If the measurement value of the capsule
temperature or the amplifier temperature is out of
The flange temperature changes when the heat the measurement range, the OUT signal status
trace breaks or the abnormal temperature is of PRIMARY_VALUE, SECONDARY_VALUE,
detected due to the failure. and TERTIARY_VALUE becomes “Uncertain-
The abnormal results are stored in the bit 13 and Subnormal" and the status of CAP_TEMP_VAL,
14 of DIAG_ERR in the SENSOR Transducer AMP_TEMP_VAL, and FLG_TEMP_VAL become
Block when the flange temperature is out of the “Uncertain-Sensor Conversion not Accurate”.
range between the limits preset to the following The measurement range of the capsule
parameters. temperature and the amplifier temperature is as
• FLG_TEMP_H_LIM follows.
• FLG_TEMP_L_LIM • Amplifier temperature: -40 to 85°C
Generating an alarm or alert is set by DIAG_ • Capsule temperature: -40 to 120°C
OPTION. The out of range is detected by the margin of 10°C
Refer to A8.2.5 for the detail. added with the measurement range.
IM 01C25T02-01E
A8.3.6 Status Error
There are three statuses of “GOOD”,
“UNCERTAIN”, and “BAD” for the status of FLG_
TEMP_VAL.
The factor that becomes GOOD/UNCERTAIN/BAD
is as follows.
Good: Normal status
Uncertain: Capsule or Amplifier temperature is
out of range
Bad:
• Capsule or Amplifier temperature sensor
failure
• Capsule or Amplifier EEPROM failure
• Resource block or SENSOR Transducer
block is in O/S mode
A8.3.7 Parameter Lists for Heat Trace
Monitoring Function
All the parameters for Heat Trace Monitoring
function belong to the SENSOR Transducer block.
Relative Write
Index Mode
47 2047 CAP_TEMP_VAL — Measured capsule temperature value and status.
48 2048 CAP_TEMP_RANGE -50.0 to 130.0°C — High and low range limit values, engineering units, decimal point
place for capsule temperature.
49 2049 AMP_TEMP_VAL — Measured Amplifier temperature value and status.
50 2050 AMP_TEMP_RANGE -50.0 to 95.0°C — High and low range limit values, engineering units, decimal point
place for Amplifier temperature.
97 2097 FLG_TEMP_VAL (Note) — Calculated flange temperature valueand status.
98 2098 FLG_TEMP_RANGE -50.0 to 130.0°C — High and low range limit values, engineering units, decimal point
place for flange temperature.
99 2099 FLG_TEMP_COEFF 0 AUTO Coefficient to calculate flange temperature.
100 2100 FLG_TEMP_PRI 1 AUTO Priority of the flange temperature alarm. (Not used)
101 2101 FLG_TEMP_H_LIM 130 AUTO Threshold to generate Flg Temp High Alarm.
102 2102 FLG_TEMP_L_LIM -50 AUTO Threshold to generate Flg Temp Low Alarm.
103 2103 FLG_TEMP_ALM — Status of flange temperature alarm.
Note: The factory default of FLG_TEMP_COEF is 0 so the factory default of FLG_TEMP_VAL indicates the same value as that of
CAP_TEMP_VAL.
IM 01C25T02-01E
Rev-1
Revision Information
 Title : Model EJX Series
 Manual No. : IM 01C25T02-01E
Edition Date Page Revised Item

1st Aug. 2004 — New publication.
14th June 2014 2-3 2.1.1 • Revise electrical data of FM intrinsically safe type.
4-1 4.1 • Change terminal drawing.
6-9 to 6-11 6.4.6 • Update unit table.
A6-8 A6.6 • Revise index numbers.
15th Oct. 2014 2-9 2.1.3 • Revise description in “Note3 Installation.”
2-12 2.1.4 • Add EPL code. Revise applicable standard.
Add note for electro static charge. Add electrical connection.
16th July 2015 2-11 2.1.3 (6) • Replace nameplate.
2-12 to 2-14 2.1.4 • Add b and c.
10-2 10.3 • Add SS26.
A8-8 A8.2.5.1 • Add Note for bit8.
A8-11 A8.2.7 • Add note in “IMPORTANT”.
17th Apr. 2020 ― Update of device revision(EJX:6, EJA:2)
1-1 1. Update device revision.
2-1 2.1.1 a. Update Note. 1.
2-2 to 2-3 2.1.1 b. Update all the descriptions.
2-4 2.1.2 a. Update Note 1 and 2.
2-5 2.1.2 b. Update standard and ambient temperature.
2-6 to 2-10 2.1.3 Update all the descriptions for ATEX approvals.
2-11 to 2-14 2.1.4 Update all the descriptions for IEC Ex approvals.
4-3 4.3.1 Update the figures.
4-4 4.4 Change URL for DD downloading site.
4.5 Update device revision.
5-3 to 5-7 5.3 to 5.6 Update descriptions (VCR, Index, number of object, etc.)
6-5 6.3.6 and Modify descriptions for errors.
6.3.7
6-13 6.5.6 Modify descriptions for LOW_CUT.
7-1 7.2.2 Correct descriptions for alerts.
7-4 7.3 Add descriptions including Table 7.4.
8-5 to 8-6 8.2 Correct information in Table 8.9, 8.10 and 8.11.
9-1 to 9-11 9 Correct factory default and write mode.
A6-3 to 6-9 A6.3 A6.5 Correct index No.
and A6.6
A7-4 A7.8 Modify A7.4.
A7-5 A7.9 Correct index and default.
IM 01C25T02-01E

Im01c25t02 01en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Im01c25t02 01en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Im01c25t02 01en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User’s

IM 01C25T02-01E 17th Edition

17th Edition: Apr. 2020 (YK) IM 01C25T02-01E

- Improper and/or inadequate maintenance by

Type Control drawing (intrinsic safety)

EJX/EJA-E Series pressure transmitters with

Intrinsically Safe with Entity/FISCO for

Nonincendive field wiring/FNICO for Yokogawa Electric Corporation

• Electrical Connection: Ui: 24 V

Note 2. Installation Ui: 17.5 V

Control Drawing IFM024-A12. FISCO parameters (2) [Groups: C, D, E, F, G, and IIB]

Precautions shall be taken to minimize the Notes:

parts. 3. The following conditions must be satisfied.

ignition source due to impact and/or friction

Note 4. Maintenance and Repair

FISCO Rules Nonincendive field wiring parameters

Yokogawa Electric Corporation Yokogawa Electric Corporation

Control drawing (nonincendive) FNICO Rules

General Purpose (Refer to Note 3)

Yokogawa Electric Corporation Yokogawa Electric Corporation

MOINS DE 45cm DU BOÎTIER.

Installation Diagram for Non-incendive a. ATEX Intrinsically Safe Ex ia

- The selected type of the Ex marking on the

friction on the membranes shall be avoided.

c. ATEX Intrinsically Safe Ex ic

Note 1. The transmitters with option code /KN26

(3) Installation  Tag plate for intrinsically safe Ex ia for Fieldbus

• All wiring shall comply with local installation *3 D

• There is no need for a conduit seal in

WARNING POTENTIAL ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING HAZARD - SEE USER'S MANUAL.

• OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOVING MODEL: Specified model code.

*2: “180-8750” is the Zip code for the following address.

- The selected type of the Ex marking on the

c. IECEx Intrinsically Safe Ex ic - The selected type of the Ex marking on the

NOTE Note 6. Maintenance and Repair

LCD LCD PID function

input Block tag Block tag

(1) Resource block Resource block

faults or other problems. Figure 3.1 Logical Structure of Each Block

purposes. For operation of the host, refer to Terminal 2

the instruction manual for each host. No other

• Cable: Ground terminal

Figure 4.2 Available Address Range

Our Device Description Files and Capabilities Files available at

Communication Protocol (3s) Device Revision (3s)

Our Device Description Files and Capabilities Files available at

“Field Diagnostics” function (refer to IM 01R01A15-

(2) Network definition • Terminator

First, check the capacity of the power supply. The

Setting (Enclosed is LI100

5.6.1 Link Object Set link objects as shown in Table 5.7.

Totals (# bytes) 11 111 11 114

5.6.4 Function Block Parameters

6. Explanation of Basic Items

Parameters for the Whole 6.3 SENSOR Transducer Block

Pressure Damping Range Adjust- Unit

Figure 6.1 SENSOR Transducer Functional Block

Reference to pressure/differential pressure Automatic adjustment

(5) Performance of span adjustment